776086

Olympus E-M1 Mark III Handleiding

304
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/333
Pagina verder
Instruction Manual
DIGITAL CAMERA
Model No. : IM019
Table of Contents
Feature Index
1. Preparation
2. Shooting
3. Playback
4. Menu functions
5. Connecting the Camera to
External Devices
6. Cautions
7. Information
8. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Thank you for purchasing an Olympus digital camera. Before you start to use your new camera,
please read these instructions carefully to enjoy optimum performance and a longer service life.
Be sure you have read and understood the contents of “8. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS”, before using
this product. Keep these instructions available for future reference.
We recommend that you take test shots to get accustomed to your camera before taking important
photographs.
The screen and camera illustrations shown in this manual were produced during the development
stages and may differ from the actual product.
If there are additions and/or modifications of functions due to firmware update for the camera, the
contents will differ. For the latest information, please visit the Olympus website.
2
EN
Product Manuals
Product Manuals
Indications used in this manual
The following symbols are used throughout this manual.
$Notes and other supplementary information.
%Tips and other helpful information for using the camera.
gReferences to other pages in this manual.
In addition to the “Instruction Manual”, we also offer a “Camera Function Guide”.
Consult these manuals when using the product.
Instruction Manual (this pdf)
A how-to guide to the camera and its features. The Instruction
Manual can be downloaded from the OLYMPUS website or directly
using the “OLYMPUS Image Share” (OI.Share) smartphone app.
Camera Function Guide
A function and setting guide that helps you use camera features to the full. It has been
optimized for display on mobile devices and can be viewed using OI.Share.
https://cs.olympus-imaging.jp/jp/support/cs/webmanual/index.html
3
EN
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Product Manuals 2
Before You Begin 11
Feature Index 12
Names of parts 16
1. Preparation 18
Unpacking the box contents .....18
Attaching the Strap ....................19
Charging and inserting
the battery ...................................20
Using External Power
Sources .......................................22
Connecting via USB .....................22
HLD-9 Power Battery Holder ........24
Inserting the card .......................26
Using Two Memory Cards ............27
Attaching a lens to the
camera ......................................... 28
Removing Lenses .......................30
Using the monitor .......................31
Turning the camera on ...............32
Sleep Mode ..................................32
Initial setup .................................33
What to Do If You Can’t Read
the Display ..................................35
2. Shooting 36
Information displays while
shooting ......................................36
Switching between displays ......38
Switching the information
display ..........................................39
Shooting still pictures ................41
Shooting with touch screen
operations .....................................43
Letting the camera choose
aperture and shutter speed
(P: Program AE) ...........................44
Choosing aperture (A: Aperture-
Priority AE) ...................................46
Choosing shutter speed
(S: Shutter-Priority AE) ................48
Choosing aperture and shutter
speed (M: Manual Exposure) .......50
Long Exposures (B: Bulb/Time) ...52
Lighten Blending (B: Live
Composite Photography)..............54
Saving Custom Settings to
the Mode Dial (C1/C2/C3/C4
Custom Modes) ..........................56
Saving Settings (Assign to
Custom Mode) ..............................56
Using Custom Modes
(C1/C2/C3/C4) ...........................57
Recording Movies ......................59
Recording movies in photo
shooting modes ............................59
Recording movies in movie mode
(n) ..............................................60
Touch Controls (Silent Controls) ...61
4
EN
Table of Contents
Shooting Settings .......................62
Direct Buttons ...............................63
Choosing a focus mode
(AF Mode).................................64
Controlling exposure
(Exposure Compensation) ........68
Choosing an AF Target Mode
(AF Target Mode) ......................69
Choosing a Focus Target
(AF Target Point) ......................72
Zoom frame AF/Zoom AF
(Super Spot AF) ........................73
Changing ISO sensitivity
(ISO) .........................................75
Choosing how the camera
measures brightness
(Metering) .................................77
Locking the exposure
(AE Lock) ..................................77
Performing the sequential/
self-timer shooting ....................78
Self-Timer Options
(c Custom Self-timer) ............80
Shooting without the vibration
caused by shutter button
operations (Anti-Shock r) ......80
Shooting without shutter sound
(Silent s) ................................81
Shooting without a release
time lag (Pro Capture
shooting) ................................... 81
Shooting still pictures in
a higher resolution
(High Res Shot) ........................83
Using a fl ash
(Flash photography) .................84
Choosing a Flash Mode
(Flash Mode) ............................86
The Super Control/LV Super
Control Panel ................................88
Changing ISO
sensitivity (ISO) ........................91
Choosing a focus mode
(AF Mode).................................91
Positioning and Sizing
the AF Target (AF Area) ............91
Choosing how the camera
measures brightness
(Metering) .................................92
Face priority AF/Eye priority AF
(I Face Priority) ......................92
Adjusting color
(WB (white balance)) ................94
Making fi ne adjustments to
white balance
(WB Compensation) .................96
Reducing camera shake
(Image Stabilizer) .....................97
Performing the sequential/
self-timer shooting ....................98
Setting the image aspect ..........98
Setting the saving method for
shooting data
(K Save Settings) ...................99
Photo File and Image Size
Options (KK) ..................... 100
Frame Size, Rate, and
Compression (nK) ............. 101
Filming Slow- or Fast-Motion
Movies (Slow- and Fast-Motion
Movies) ...................................104
Choosing a Flash Mode
(Flash Mode) ..........................105
Adjusting fl ash output (x) ....105
5
EN
Table of Contents
Processing options
(Picture Mode) ........................106
Adjusting overall color
(Color Creator)........................108
“Leave Color” Effects
(Partial Color) .........................109
Making fi ne adjustments to
sharpness (Sharpness) ..........110
Making fi ne adjustments to
contrast (Contrast) ..................110
Making fi ne adjustments to
saturation (Saturation) ............110
Making fi ne adjustments to
tone (Gradation) ..................... 111
Applying fi lter effects to
monochrome pictures
(Color Filter)............................112
Adjusting the tone of
a monochrome image
(Monochrome Color)...............113
Adjusting i-Enhance effects
(Effect) .................................... 113
Setting the color reproduction
format (Color Space) ..............114
Changing the brightness
of highlights and shadows
(Highlight&Shadow Control) ...115
Assigning functions to buttons
(Button Function) ....................116
3. Playback 126
Information display during
playback ....................................126
Playback image information .......126
Switching the information
display ........................................127
Viewing photographs and
movies .......................................128
Finding Pictures Quickly (Index
and Calendar Playback) .............129
Zooming In (Playback Zoom) .....129
Rotating Pictures (Rotate) ..........130
Watching movies ........................130
Protecting Pictures (0) ...........131
Copying an image (Copy)...........131
Deleting Pictures (Erase) ...........132
Selecting Pictures for Sharing
(Share Order) .............................132
Selecting Multiple Pictures (0,
Copy Select, Erase Selected,
Share Order Selected) ...............133
Print order (DPOF) .....................134
Adding Audio to Pictures (R) ...... 136
Playback Using Touch
Controls .....................................137
Selecting and protecting
images ........................................ 138
6
EN
Table of Contents
4. Menu functions 139
Basic menu operations ............139
Using Shooting Menu 1/
Shooting Menu 2 ......................141
Restoring Default Settings
(Reset) ........................................141
Saving Settings
(Assign to Custom Mode) ...........142
Processing options
(Picture Mode) ............................142
Photo File and Image Size
Options (KK) .........................142
Digital Zoom
(Digital Tele-converter) ...............143
Shooting automatically with a
fi xed interval (Intrvl. Sh./Time
Lapse) ........................................144
Varying settings over a series of
photographs (Bracketing) ...........146
Taking HDR (High Dynamic
Range) images (HDR) ................152
Recording multiple exposures
in a single image (Multiple
Exposure) ...................................154
Keystone correction and
perspective control (Keystone
Comp.) ........................................156
Setting anti-shock/silent shooting
(Anti-Shock r/Silent s) ..........157
Setting high resolution shooting
(High Res Shot) ..........................158
Slowing the Shutter in Bright
Light (Live ND Shooting) ............159
Using the Video Menu ..............161
Choosing an Exposure Mode
(n Mode (Movie Exposure
Modes)) ......................................165
Reducing Flicker Under LED
Lighting (n Flicker Scan) ..........166
Frame Size, Rate, and
Compression (nK) .................167
Assigning Roles to the Front and
Rear Dials (n Dial Function) .....168
Sound Recording Options
(Movie R) ...................................169
Using the Playback Menu ........170
Automatically Rotating Portrait-
Orientation Pictures for Playback
(R) ............................................170
Retouching Pictures (Edit) ..........170
Combining Pictures
(Image Overlay) ..........................172
Creating Movie Stills
(In-Movie Image Capture) ..........173
Trimming movies
(Movie Trimming) ........................174
Removing Protection from All
Pictures (Reset Protect) .............175
Cancelling a share order
(Reset share Order) ...................175
Copying All Pictures (Copy All) ...175
Using the setup menu ..............176
Formatting the card
(Card Setup) ...............................177
Deleting all images
(Card Setup) ...............................177
Wireless LAN Options
(Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings) ..........178
7
EN
Table of Contents
Using “My Menu” .....................179
Using the custom menus .........181
J AF/MF ...................................181
K AF/MF ...................................182
L AF/MF ...................................183
I AF/MF ...................................184
J Button/Dial/Lever ..................185
K Button/Dial/Lever ..................185
N Release/j/
Image Stabilizer ..........................186
O Release/j/
Image Stabilizer ..........................186
P Disp/8/PC ...........................187
Q Disp/8/PC ...........................188
R Disp/8/PC ...........................189
S Disp/8/PC ...........................190
T Exp/ISO/BULB/p  ................191
U Exp/ISO/BULB/p  ................192
V Exp/ISO/BULB/p  ................193
W #Custom ..............................193
X K/WB/Color ........................194
Y Record/Erase ........................195
Z Record/Erase ........................196
a EVF .......................................196
b K Utility ...............................198
c K Utility ...............................198
Combined Auto and Manual
Focus (K AF+MF) ....................200
Setting Focus and Exposure with
the AEL/AFL Button
(K AEL/AFL) ............................201
C-AF Tracking Sensitivity
(K C-AF Sensitivity) .................203
C-AF Starting Focus Target
(K C-AF Center Start) ..............204
C-AF Center Target Priority
(K C-AF Center Priority) ..........205
Choosing the AF Home Position
(N Set Home) ..........................206
AF-Target Selection
(N Select Screen Settings) ......207
Enabling AF-Target Selection
Wrap (N Loop Settings) ..........208
AF Target Size and Positioning
(t Target Mode Settings) ........209
Matching AF-Target Selection
to Camera Orientation
(K Orientation Linked N).......210
Lens Focus Range
(AF Limiter) .................................211
Fine-Tuning Autofocus
(AF Focus Adj.) ...........................212
Manual Focus Assist
(MF Assist) .................................215
Adjusting Focus During
Exposures
(Bulb/Time Focusing) .................216
8
EN
Table of Contents
Combinations of JPEG image
sizes and compression rates
(K Set) .....................................236
Setting the card to record to
(Card Slot Settings) ....................237
Saving lens info (Lens Info
Settings) .....................................239
Selecting the display style of the
viewfi nder (EVF Style) ................240
Viewfi nder Info Display Options
(V Info Settings) .......................241
Button Hold Options
(Press-and-hold Time) ................241
Correcting Fisheye Distortion
(Fisheye Compensation) ............242
5. Connecting the Camera
to External Devices 244
Precautions for Using Wi-Fi
and Bluetooth® .........................244
Connecting to Smartphones
via Wi-Fi .....................................245
Installing Apps ............................245
Connecting to Smartphones
(Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings) ..........246
Connecting When the Camera Is
Off (Power-off Standby) ..............249
Copying Pictures to
Smartphones ..............................251
Remote Photography Using a
Smartphone ................................ 253
Adding position information to
images ........................................ 254
Ending the Connection ...............255
Multi Selector Press
(S Center Button) .....................217
Multi Selector Tilt
(T Direction Key) ......................217
Assigning Roles to the Front and
Rear Dials (K Dial Function) ....218
Customizing the Fn Lever
(K Fn Lever Function) ..............219
Burst Shooting Options
(jL Settings/jH Settings) ....220
Reducing Flicker (Flicker
Reduction) ..................................222
Choosing the control panel
displays (K Control Settings) ...224
Adding information displays
(G/Info Settings) .......................226
Choosing the Playback Zoom
Ratio (qa Default Setting) ......229
Selfi e Assist (Selfi e Assist) .........229
Viewing camera images on TV
(HDMI) ........................................ 230
Choosing a USB Connection
Mode (USB Mode) ......................231
Live Bulb Update Frequency
(Live Bulb) ..................................232
Live Time Update Frequency
(Live Time) ..................................232
Choosing the Shutter Speed
(Composite Settings) ..................233
Reducing Flicker Under LED
Lighting (K Flicker Scan) .........234
Fine-Tuning Exposure
(Exposure Shift) ..........................235
Shutter speeds when the fl ash
fi res (#X-Sync./#Slow Limit) ....236
9
EN
Table of Contents
Powering the Camera via USB
(USB Power Delivery) ...............278
Connecting to TVs or External
Displays via HDMI ....................279
Viewing Pictures on a TV
(HDMI) ........................................ 280
Using a TV Remote
(HDMI Control) ...........................282
6. Cautions 283
Battery and charger .................283
Using your charger abroad .....284
Usable cards .............................284
Interchangeable lenses ............285
MF Clutch Lenses .....................286
Optional Accessories ...............287
Designated External
Flash Units .................................287
Wireless remote control fl ash
photography ...............................288
Other external fl ash units ...........290
Principal Accessories .................291
System chart .............................292
Connecting to Computers via
Wi-Fi ...........................................256
Installing Software ......................256
Readying the Computer
(Windows) ..................................257
Pairing the Computer with the
Camera (New Link) ....................258
Adjusting Wi-Fi Settings
(TWi-Fi Connect) ...................260
Uploading Pictures as They Are
Taken .......................................... 268
Ending the Connection ...............270
Network Settings ......................272
Changing Passwords
(Connection Password) ..............272
Restoring Default Wi-Fi/
Bluetooth® Settings
(Reset Settings) ..........................273
Connecting to Computers via
USB ............................................ 274
Compatible Computers ...............274
Installing Software ......................274
Uploading Pictures as They Are
Taken (0) .............................275
Connecting the Camera for
High-Speed RAW Processing
(M PC RAW) .............................276
Copying Pictures to the
Computer (Storage/MTP) ...........277
10
EN
Table of Contents
7. Information 294
Cleaning and storing the
camera ....................................... 294
Cleaning the camera ..................294
Storage ....................................... 294
Cleaning and checking the image
pickup device ..............................295
Pixel Mapping - Checking the
image processing functions ........295
Shooting tips and
information ................................296
Error codes ...............................299
Default Settings ........................301
Memory Card Capacity ............316
Specifi cations ...........................318
8. SAFETY
PRECAUTIONS 321
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ..........321
Index 326
11
EN
Before You Begin
Before You Begin
Read and Follow “8. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS”
To prevent incorrect operation resulting in fi re or other damage to property or harm to
yourself or to others, read “8. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS” (P. 321) in its entirety before
using the camera.
While using the camera, consult this manual to ensure safe and correct operation. Be
sure to keep the manual in a safe place once it is read.
Olympus will not be held liable for violations of local regulations arising from use of this
product outside the country or region of purchase.
• Use of these features outside the country or region of purchase may violate local wireless
regulations; be sure to check with local authorities before use. Olympus will not be held
liable for the user’s failure to comply with local regulations.
Wireless LAN and Bluetooth®
The camera features built-in wireless LAN and Bluetooth®. Use of these features
outside the country or region of purchase may violate local wireless regulations; be
sure to check with local authorities before use. Olympus will not be held liable for the
user’s failure to comply with local regulations.
Disable wireless LAN and Bluetooth® in areas where their use is prohibited.
g “Disabling Wi-Fi/Bluetooth®” (P. 255, 271)
User Registration
Visit the OLYMPUS website for information on registering your OLYMPUS products.
12
EN
Feature Index
Feature g
Shooting Mode 41
Custom Mode 57
Monitor Display 39, 127
Viewfi nder Display 240
Direct Button Functions 63
Live Controls 225
LV Super Control Panel 88, 90
W Shooting Menu 1
Reset / Custom Modes 141
Picture Mode 106, 142
KK100, 142
Image Aspect 98
Digital Tele-converter 143
j/Y (Drive Mode) 78, 98
Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse 144
X Shooting Menu 2
Bracketing 146
HDR 152
Multiple Exposure 154
Keystone Comp. 156
Anti-Shock r/Silent s157
High Res Shot 83, 158
Live ND Shooting 159
n Video Menu
n Mode Settings
n Mode 165
n Flicker Scan 166
Feature g
n Specifi cation Settings
nK167
b ISO-Auto Set 161
n Noise Filter 161
n WB 161
n All x161
nW Keep Warm Color 161
n Picture Mode 161
n AF/IS Settings
n AF Mode 64, 91
n C-AF Speed 162
n C-AF Sensitivity 162
n Image Stabilizer 97
n IS Level 162
n Button/Dial/Lever
n Button Function 116
n Dial Function 163
n Fn Lever Function 163
n Shutter Function 163
n Elec. Zoom Speed 163
n Display Settings
n Control Settings 164
n Info Settings 164
Time Code Settings 164
8 Display Pattern 164
a View Assist 164
Movie R169
n HDMI Output 164
Feature Index
13
EN
Feature Index
Feature g
q Playback Menu
R170
Edit 170
Print Order 134
Reset Protect 175
Reset share Order 175
Copy All 175
TWi-Fi Connect 247
G Custom Menu
J AF/MF
K AF Mode 64
K AF+MF 200
K AEL/AFL 201
AF Scanner 181
K C-AF Sensitivity 203
K C-AF Center Start 204
K C-AF Center Priority 205
K AF/MF
KNMode Settings 182
AF Area Pointer 182
N Set Home 206
N Select Screen Settings 207
N Loop Settings 208
t Target Mode Settings 209
K Orientation Linked N210
L AF/MF
AF Targeting Pad 183
AF Limiter 183
AF Illuminator 183
I Face Priority 92
AF Focus Adj. 183
Feature g
I AF/MF
Starry Sky AF Setting 184
Preset MF distance 184
MF Assist 215
MF Clutch 184
Focus Ring 184
Bulb/Time Focusing 216
Reset Lens 184
J Button/Dial/Lever
K Button Function 116
S Center Button 217
T Direction Key 217
K Dial Function 185
Dial Direction 185
K Fn Lever Function 219
Fn Lever/Power Lever 185
K Button/Dial/Lever
K Elec. Zoom Speed 185
qR Function 185
9 Lock 185
v Lock 185
N Release/j/Image Stabilizer
S-AF Release Priority 186
C-AF Release Priority
jL Settings 220
jH Settings
Flicker Reduction 222
O Release/j/Image Stabilizer
K Image Stabilizer 97
j Image Stabilizer 186
Half Way Rls With IS 186
Lens I.S. Priority 186
14
EN
Feature Index
Feature g
P Disp/8/PC
K Control Settings 224
G/Info Settings 226, 228
Picture Mode Settings 187
j/Y Settings 187
Multi Function Settings 187
Q Disp/8/PC
Live View Boost 188
Art LV Mode 188
Frame Rate 188
LV Close Up Settings 188
qa Default Setting 229
z Settings 189
R Disp/8/PC
Grid Settings 189
Peaking Settings 189
Histogram Settings 189
Mode Guide 189
Selfi e Assist 229
S Disp/8/PC
8190
HDMI 230
USB Mode 190
T Exp/ISO/BULB/p
EV Step 191
ISO Step 191
K ISO-Auto Set 191
K ISO-Auto 191
K Noise Filter 191
K Low ISO Processing 191
Noise Reduct. 192
Feature g
U Exp/ISO/BULB/p
Bulb/Time Timer 192
Live Composite Timer 192
Bulb/Time Monitor 192
Live Bulb 232
Live Time 232
Composite Settings 233
K Flicker Scan 234
V Exp/ISO/BULB/p
Metering 77
AEL Metering 193
N Spot Metering 193
Exposure Shift 193
W #Custom
#X-Sync. 236
#Slow Limit 236
x+F193
#+WB 193
#RC Mode 288
X K/WB/Color
K Set 100, 142,
236
Pixel Count 100, 142,
236
Shading Comp. 194
K WB 94
K All x194
KW Keep Warm Color 94, 96
Color Space 114
15
EN
Feature Index
Feature g
Y Record/Erase
Card Slot Settings 237
File Name 195
Edit Filename 195
dpi Settings 195
Copyright Settings 195
Lens Info Settings 239
Z Record/Erase
Quick Erase 196
RAW+JPEG Erase 196
Priority Set 196
a EVF
EVF Auto Switch 196
EVF Adjust 196
EVF Style 240
V Info Settings 196
EVF Grid Settings 197
V Half Way Level 197
S-OVF 197
b K Utility
Pixel Mapping 295
Press-and-hold Time 198
Level Adjust 198
Touchscreen Settings 198
Menu Recall 198
Fisheye Compensation 242
Feature g
c K Utility
Battery Settings 198
Backlit LCD 198
Sleep 32
Auto Power Off 199
Quick Sleep Mode 199
Certifi cation 199
e Setup Menu
Card Setup 177
X Settings 33
W35
s176
Rec View 176
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings 178
Firmware 176
My Menu 179
16
EN
Names of parts
Names of parts
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
9
8
a
b
o
p
n
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
c
d
e
1 Mode dial lock .................................P. 41
2 Mode dial ........................................P. 41
3 Rear dial* (o)
.........................P. 44 – 50, 124, 128, 228
4 F (Exposure compensation) button
................................P. 45, 47, 49, 51, 68
5 R (Movie)/H button ............P. 59/P. 133
6 Shutter button .................................P. 42
7 Front dial* (r)
...........................P. 44 – 50, 75, 124, 128
8 Self-timer lamp/AF illuminator
.......................................P. 78, 98/P. 183
9 Y (One-touch white balance) button
........................................................P. 95
0 Z (Preview) button .......................P. 117
a Lens attachment mark ....................P. 28
b Mount (Remove the body cap before
attaching the lens.)
c Stereo microphone ...............P. 136, 169
d ON/OFF lever ................................P. 32
e v button .......................................P. 185
AFm (AF/metering mode) button
..................................................P. 64, 77
jY# (Sequential shooting/self-timer/
fl ash) button ....................................P. 78
f External flash terminal ....................P. 84
g Microphone jack cover
h Cover for headphone jack.............P. 169
i Connector cover
j Strap eyelet.....................................P. 19
k Lens release button ........................P. 30
l Lens lock pin
m
Microphone jack (ø3.5 mm stereo mini-
jack for third-party microphones)
...P. 169
n Headphone jack (ø3.5 mm stereo mini-
jack for third-party headphones) ...P. 169
o HDMI connector (Type D) .............P. 230
p USB connector (Type C)
......................................P. 258, 275, 277
* In this manual, the r and o icons represent operations performed using the front dial
and rear dial.
17
EN
Names of parts
6
5
7
8
4
1
2
3
9
0
a
c
b
h
f
d
e
g
i
j
k
l
n
m
q
o
p
1 Diopter adjustment dial ...................P. 38
2 MENU button ...............................P. 139
3 u (LV) button ..............................P. 38
4 Monitor (Touch screen)
......................P. 36, 38, 43, 88, 126, 137
5 Viewfi nder ...............................P. 38, 240
6 Eye sensor
7 Eyecup ..........................................P. 291
8 (Erase) button ..........................P. 132
9 Hot shoe .................................P. 84, 287
0 Fn lever ...........................P. 44 – 50, 219
a AEL/AFL / 0 (Protect) button
.....................................P. 77, 201/P. 131
b Multi selector (S/T) *1 ............P. 69, 72
c ISO button ..............................P. 75, 226
d Arrow pad *2 ..................................P. 128
e Q button ........................P. 88, 128, 139
f INFO button ...........................P. 39, 127
g q (Playback) button ....................P. 128
h Speaker
i PBH cover.......................................P. 24
j Tripod socket
k Battery compartment cover.............P. 20
l Battery compartment lock ...............P. 20
m CHARGE (Battery charge) lamp ...P. 22
n Card compartment cover ................P. 26
o Card slot 1 ......................................P. 26
p Card slot 2 ......................................P. 26
q Remote cable terminal cover
(Remote cable terminal) ...............P. 291
*1 The multi selector is designed to be used in two ways. You can place a fi nger lightly on
the multi selector and pivot it in the desired direction (T). You can also press down on the
center of the multi selector much as you would a button (S).
*2 In this manual, the FGHI icons represent operations performed using the arrow pad.
18
EN
Preparation
1
1 Preparation
Unpacking the box contents
At purchase, the package contains the camera and the following accessories.
If anything is missing or damaged, contact the dealer from whom you purchased the
camera.
Camera Body cap * EP-12 eyecup * Hot shoe cover * Strap
CB-USB11 USB cable BLH-1 rechargeable
lithium-ion battery BCH-1 charger for
lithium-ion batteries CC-1 cable clip
• Warranty Card
Basic Manual
* The body cap, eyecup, and hot shoe cover attached to or inserted in the camera.
19
EN
Preparation
1
Attaching the Strap
1
Before attaching the strap, remove the end
from the keeper loop and loosen the strap
as shown.
Keeper loop
2
Pass the end of the strap through the strap eyelet and back
through the keeper loop.
3
Pass the end of the strap through the buckle and tighten as shown.
• Attach the other end of the strap to the other eyelet.
• After attaching the strap, pull on it fi rmly to ensure that it will not come loose.
Attaching the cable clip
Use the cable clip to secure the cable, then attach it
to the strap.
The cable clip can also be attached to the strap
eyelet.
20
EN
Preparation
1
Charging and inserting the battery
1
Charge the battery.
Charging indicator
Charging in
progress
Less than 50% Blinks in orange 1 time/second
50% or more
Less than 80% Blinks in orange 2 times/second
80% or more
Less than 100% Blinks in orange 3 times/second
Charging complete Lights up in green
Charging error Blinks in green 5 times/second
(Charging time: Approximately 2 hours)
1
2
3AC wall outlet
Lithium ion battery
Charging indicator
AC cable
Direction indicating mark (C)
Lithium ion charger
• Unplug the charger when charging is complete.
• Batteries inserted in the camera will charge when the camera is connected to an
external device via USB. g “Charging via USB” (P. 22)
2
Confi rm that the camera is off.
21
EN
Preparation
1
3
Open the battery compartment cover. Battery compartment cover
1
2
Battery compartment lock
4
Loading the battery.
• Use only BLH-1 batteries
(P. 18, 320).
Direction indicating mark
5
Close the battery compartment cover.
$
• It is recommended to set aside a backup battery for prolonged shooting in case the
battery in use drains.
• Also read “Battery and charger” (P. 283).
Removing the battery
Turn off the camera before opening or closing the battery
compartment cover. To remove the battery, fi rst push the
battery lock knob in the direction of the arrow and then
remove.
• Contact an authorized distributor or service center if you
are unable to remove the battery. Do not use force.
• Never remove batteries or memory cards while the
memory card access indicator (P. 36, 37) is displayed.
22
EN
Preparation
1
Using External Power Sources
Connecting via USB
The battery inserted in the camera will charge when the camera is connected via a
USB cable to a USB device such as a computer or to an optional USB-AC adapter
such as the F-5AC. The battery charges only when the camera is off.
Devices that conform to the USB Power Delivery (USB PD) standard can also be used
to power the camera. g “Powering the Camera via USB (USB Power Delivery)”
(P. 278)
Charging via USB
1
Confi rm that the camera is off.
2
Connect the camera to the external device via USB.
• The CHARGE lamp light during charging. Charging
times vary with the output of the USB device. The lamp
goes out as the batteries reach full charge.
3
Charging stops when the camera is turned on.
• The battery cannot be charged via USB when the camera is on.
• If a charging error occurs, the CHARGE lamp will blink. Disconnect and reconnect the
USB cable.
• USB charging is available when the battery temperature is between 0 and 40 °C.
• Batteries inserted in optional HLD-9 power battery holders will not charge (P. 24).
%
• The supply of power ends when the battery is charged. Disconnect and reconnect the
USB cable to resume charging.
• The battery will not charge while the camera is off if pictures are being uploaded to a
smartphone via Wi-Fi (background auto upload). g “Connecting When the Camera Is
Off (Power-off Standby)” (P. 249)
23
EN
Preparation
1
Powering the Camera via USB
The camera can be powered using mobile batteries or similar devices connected via
USB. The devices must:
Standard: Conform to the USB Power Delivery (USB PD) standard
Output: Be rated for an output of 9 V 3 A, 15 V 2 A, or 15 V 3 A
For more information, see “Powering the Camera via USB (USB Power Delivery)”
(P. 278).
24
EN
Preparation
1
HLD-9 Power Battery Holder
An optional HLD-9 battery holder can be used to power the camera for extended
periods. You can assign functions to the arrow pad and B-Fn button using the camera
[Button Function] options. The optional AC adapter can be used with the HLD-9.
Make sure to turn the camera off when attaching and removing the holder.
Part names
Front dial
Shutter button
Removal knob
Arrow pad
Q button
Vertical shooting lock Rear dial
AC terminal cover
B-Fn2 button
B-Fn1 button
Attaching the holder
Remove the PBH cover (a) on the
bottom of the camera before attaching
the HLD-9. Once attached, make sure
the HLD-9 removal knob is tightly
secured. Make sure to attach the PHB
cover to the camera when not using
the HLD-9.
a
a
Store the PBH cover (a) in the HLD-9.
Loading the battery
Use BLH-1 battery. Once you load the battery, make sure to lock the battery cover.
1
2
Direction indicating mark
%
• The monitor battery-level indicator (P. 32) shows
when the camera is powered by the battery in the HLD-9.
PBH
25
EN
Preparation
1
Using the AC adapter (AC-5)
Open the AC terminal cover and connect the optional AC-5 AC
adapter to the AC terminal.
• The AC adapter cannot be used to charge the camera battery.
Using the buttons
The roles performed by the arrow pad and B-Fn buttons on the HLD-9 can be
selected using the [Button Function] item. g “Assigning functions to buttons (Button
Function)” (P. 116)
Main Specifi cations (HLD-9)
Power Supply Battery: BLH-1 Lithium-ion Battery × 1
AC power: AC-5 AC Adapter
Dimensions Approx. 132.7 mm (W) × 55.8 mm (H) × 66.0 mm (D)
(5.2" × 2.2" × 2.6")
Weight Approx. 255 g (9.0 oz.) (excluding battery and terminal cap)
Splash resistance
(when attached to camera) Type Equivalent to IEC Standard publication 60529 IPX1
• Use only the designated battery and AC adapter. Failure to do so could result in injury,
damage to the product, and fi re.
• Do not use your nail to turn the removal knob. Doing so could result in injury.
• Only use the camera within the guaranteed operating temperature range.
• Do not use or store the product in dusty or humid areas.
• Do not touch the electrical contacts.
• Use a dry, soft cloth to clean the terminals. Do not clean the product with a damp cloth,
thinner, benzine, or any other organic solvents.
• Remove the batteries before putting the camera into storage for periods of a month or
more. Leaving the batteries in the camera for extended periods shortens their lives,
potentially rendering them unusable.
26
EN
Preparation
1
Inserting the card
The camera uses third-party SD, SDHC, or SDXC memory cards conforming to the SD
(Secure Digital) standard. Read “Usable cards” (P. 284) before use.
1
Confi rm that the camera is off.
2
Open the card compartment cover.
• The camera has two card slots.
2
1
3
Slide the card in until it locks into place.
• Do not forcibly insert a damaged or deformed card.
Doing so may damage the card slot.
Terminal area
4
Close the card compartment cover.
• Close it securely until you hear it click.
• Be sure the card compartment cover is closed before
using the camera.
• Cards must be formatted with this camera before fi rst
use (P. 177).
2
1
27
EN
Preparation
1
Removing the card
Press the card in to eject it. Pull out the card.
• Confi rm that the camera is off before removing memory
cards.
• Never remove batteries or memory cards while the memory
card access indicator (P. 36, 37) is displayed.
%
Card Slots 1 and 2 support different types of memory card.
• Slot 1: Supports UHS-II and UHS-I
• Slot 2: Supports UHS-I *
* UHS-II cards function as UHS-I cards when inserted in
Slot 2.
Card slot 1
Card slot 2
Using Two Memory Cards
When two memory cards are inserted, you can choose how each card is used
according to your goals. g G Custom Menu Y > [Card Slot Settings] (P. 237)
• Record only to a selected card
• Record to a selected card until it is full, then record to the second card
• Record pictures with different sizes or compression ratios to different cards
• Record copies of each picture to both cards
28
EN
Preparation
1
Attaching a lens to the camera
• See page 285 for information on compatible lenses.
1
Confi rm that the camera is off.
2
Remove the rear cap of the lens
and the body cap of the camera.
12
Rear cap
2
1
3
Align the lens attachment mark (red) on
the camera with the alignment mark (red)
on the lens, then insert the lens into the
camera’s body.
Lens attachment mark
4
Rotate the lens clockwise until you hear it
click (direction indicated by arrow 3).
• Do not press the lens release button.
• Do not touch internal portions of the camera.
3
29
EN
Preparation
1
5
Remove the front lens cap.
2
1
1
1
1
2
30
EN
Preparation
1
Removing Lenses
1
Confi rm that the camera is off.
2
Hold the lens release button and rotate the lens as
shown.
Lens release button
1
2
31
EN
Preparation
1
Using the monitor
Rotate the monitor for ease of viewing. The angle of the monitor can be adjusted
according to conditions at the time of shooting.
Up to 180°
Up to 90°
Up to 270°
• Gently rotate the monitor within its range of motion. Attempting to rotate the monitor
beyond the limits shown below could damage the connectors.
• The camera can be confi gured to display a mirror image of the view through the lens or
automatically zoom power zoom lenses all the way out when the monitor is rotated for self
portraits. g “Selfi e Assist (Selfi e Assist)” (P. 229)
32
EN
Preparation
1
Turning the camera on
1
Set the ON/OFF lever to the ON position.
• When the camera is turned on, the monitor will turn on.
• To turn the camera off, return the lever to the OFF position.
ON/OFF lever
Monitor
ISO-A
200
1023
1:02:03
P
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
250 F5.6 0.0
30p
30p
4K
YFYF
100
%
Battery level
The camera displays the level of the battery
currently in use. The battery level is shown in
10 increments.
100
%
Level of current battery (%)
The indicator fl ashes red
when the level reaches 10%.
%
• The Fn lever can be confi gured to turn the camera on and off using the [Fn Lever/Power
Lever] option (P. 185) in G Custom Menu J.
Sleep Mode
If no controls are used for a set period, the camera will automatically enter suspend
operation to reduce the drain on the batteries. This is referred to as “sleep mode”.
• When the camera enters sleep mode, the monitor will turn off and operation will be
suspended. Pressing the shutter or q button reactivates the camera.
• If no operations are performed for a set period after the camera enters sleep mode, the
camera will turn off automatically. The camera can be reactivated by turning it on again.
• The camera may require additional time to recover from sleep mode when [On] (enabled)
is selected for [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] > [Power-off Standby]. g “Connecting When
the Camera Is Off (Power-off Standby)” (P. 249)
• The delay before the camera goes to sleep or turns off automatically can be selected in
the G custom menu. At default settings, the camera will go to sleep after one minute and
turn off automatically after four hours. g G Custom Menu c > [Sleep] (P. 199), [Auto
Power Off] (P. 199)
33
EN
Preparation
1
Initial setup
After turning the camera on for the fi rst time, perform the initial setup by choosing a
language and setting the camera clock.
• Date and time information is recorded on the card together with the images.
• The fi le name is also included with the date and time information. Be sure to set the
correct date and time before using the camera. Some functions cannot be used if the date
and time have not been set.
1
Press the Q button when the initial setup dialog is
displaying prompting you to choose a language. Please select your language.
Por favor, selecciona tu idioma.
Veuillez choisir votre langue.
Bitte wählen Sie Ihre Sprache.
100
%
2
Highlight the desired language using the front or
rear dial or the FGHI buttons on the arrow pad.
• The language-selection dialog has two pages of
options. Use the front or rear dial or the FGHI
buttons on the arrow pad to move the cursor between
pages. ଛ˯ߪ
日本語
Dansk
Hrvatski
Eesti
Deutsch
Indonesia
Norsk
Set
W
English
ýHVN\
Suomi
ǼȜȜȘȞȚțȐ
Italiano
Latviski
Polski
Nederlands
Ȼɴɥɝɚɪɫɤɢ
Français
0DJ\DU
/LHWXYLǐN
Português(Pt)
100
%
Cursor
Ὶ㜴)䴭℀*
Ὶ㜴)修℀*
ѳъѕ
Romanian
Español
Viet Nam
Setare
W
Slovensky
Ɋɭɫɫɤɢɣ
Svenska
Türkçe
6ORYHQãþLQD
Srpski
ɍɤɪɚʀɧɫɶɤɚ
100
%
3
Press the Q button when the desired language is
highlighted.
• If you press the shutter button before pressing the Q
button, the camera will exit to shooting mode and no
language will be selected. You can perform the initial
setup by turning the camera off and then on again to
display the initial setup dialog and repeating the process
from Step 1.
W
100
%
Dansk
Hrvatski
Eesti
Deutsch
Indonesia
Norsk
English
ýHVN\
Suomi
ǼȜȜȘȞȚțȐ
Italiano
Latviski
Polski
Nederlands
Ȼɴɥɝɚɪɫɤɢ
Français
0DJ\DU
/LHWXYLǐN
Português(Pt)
Set
• The language can be changed at any time from the e setup menu. g “What to Do
If You Can’t Read the Display” (P. 35)
34
EN
Preparation
1
4
Set the date, time, and date format.
• Use the HI buttons on the arrow pad to highlight
items.
• Use the FG buttons on the arrow pad to change the
highlighted item.
• The clock can be adjusted at any time from the e setup
menu. g e Setup Menu > [X Settings] (P. 176)
• Press the Q button when settings are complete.
2020
100
%X
Cancel
MD TimeY
Y/M/D
The time is displayed using a
24-hour clock.
5
Highlight a time zone using the FG buttons and press the Q button.
• Press the INFO button to enable or disable daylight saving time.
6
Press the Q button to set the clock.
• If the battery is removed from the camera and the camera is left for a while, the date and
time may be reset to the factory default setting.
• You may also need to adjust the frame rate before shooting movies. g n Video
Menu > [n Specifi cation Settings] > [nK] (P. 167)
35
EN
Preparation
1
What to Do If You Can’t Read the Display
If you see unfamiliar characters or words in other languages, you may not have
selected the language you intended. Follow the steps below to choose another
language.
1
Press the MENU button to view the
menus.
1
2
1
ѯєьѬщҕѥѕѓѥё1
4:3
юѧч
ѝѤчѝҕњьѓѥё
KK
ѱўєчѓѥё
іѨѯоѶшѱўєчдѼѥўьчѯѠк
чѧлѧъѤјѯъѯјзѠь
іѣѕѣѯњјѥшҕѠѓѥё/Time Lapse
100
%
Y
F
дјѤэ шѤҟкзҕѥ
o
j/Y
юѧч
MENU button
2
Highlight the e (setup) tab using FG
on the arrow pad and press the Q
button.
Q button
Arrow pad
1
2
j±0 k±0
s
W
100
%ѯєьѬшѤҟкзҕѥ
ѳъѕ
юѧч
X дѥішѤҟкзҕѥ
шѤҟкзҕѥдѥіҙч
чѬѓѥёэѤьъѩд
дѥішѤҟкзҕѥ Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
ѯђѧіҙєѰњіҙ
дјѤэ шѤҟкзҕѥ
3
Highlight [W] using the FG buttons and press
the Q button.
1
2
100
%ѯєьѬшѤҟкзҕѥ
ѳъѕ
j±0 k±0
юѧч
s
W
X дѥішѤҟкзҕѥ
шѤҟкзҕѥдѥіҙч
чѬѓѥёэѤьъѩд
дѥішѤҟкзҕѥ Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
ѯђѧіҙєѰњіҙ
дјѤэ шѤҟкзҕѥ
4
Highlight the desired language using the FGHI
buttons and press the Q button.
W
100
%
Dansk
Hrvatski
Eesti
Deutsch
Indonesia
Norsk
English
ýHVN\
Suomi
ǼȜȜȘȞȚțȐ
Italiano
Latviski
Polski
Nederlands
Ȼɴɥɝɚɪɫɤɢ
Français
0DJ\DU
/LHWXYLǐN
Português(Pt)
SetBack
36
EN
Shooting
2
2 Shooting
Information displays while shooting
Monitor display during still photography
WB
AUTO
#
-
2.0
ISO-A
200
1023
1:02:03
99
28
mm
T W
C1
FP RC
BKT FLK
FPS
Ÿ
4:3
#
P
+2
+7-3
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
100
%
250 F5.6 +2.0
30p
30p
4K
AEL
oo
p
YFYF
S-AF
28
mm
T W
BKT HDR
1
w
1
w
1
PC
1:02:03
ND8
LVLV
-
3
G
P
q
r
s
t
u
S
p
o
78 ghi l
Q
e
A
f
DCBAzEyxwRFG
K
J
L
M
N
O
P
H
I
2341 90 abcd j k56
v
mn
Monitor display during movie mode
1
M
B
T
O
K
28
mm
T W
M-ISM-IS
1
C-AF
M
off
0:29:47
n
LL
R
R
WB
AUTO
●
REC
00:12
250 F5.6 +2.0
+2
+7-3
123
min
30p
30p
4K
TC 00:00:00:12 DF
BT.
709
ISO-A
200
±0 P 8V
[
WX
Y
Z\
TU
37
EN
Shooting
2
1 Card write indicator ...................P. 21, 27
2 Wireless LAN connection
status ....................................P. 245, 256
3 Active Bluetooth® connection ......P. 246
4 Active connection to computer (Wi-Fi)
......................................................P. 256
5 Wireless LAN connection......P. 247, 270
6 Pro Capture active ..........................P. 81
7 Super FP fl ash ..............................P. 287
8 RC mode.......................................P. 288
9 Bracketing .....................................P. 146
0 HDR ..............................................P. 152
a Multiple exposure..........................P. 154
b D Keystone compensation .........P. 156
c Fisheye compensation ..................P. 242
d Live ND fi lter photography ............P. 159
e High frame rate .............................P. 188
f Digital Tele-converter ....................P. 143
g Time lapse shooting ......................P. 144
h Face priority/Eye priority .................P. 92
i Anti-fl icker shooting ......................P. 223
j Zoom operation direction/Focal length
k Internal temperature warning ........P. 300
l Flash ...............................................P. 84
(blinks: charging in progress, lights up:
charging completed)
m AF confi rmation mark......................P. 42
n Dust reduction...............................P. 295
o Image stabilizer...............................P. 97
p Picture mode.........................P. 106, 142
q White balance .................................P. 94
r Drive mode (single-frame/sequential
shooting/self-timer/vibration reduction/
silent photography/Pro Capture/
High Res Shot) ..................P. 78 – 83, 98
s Aspect ratio .....................................P. 98
t K Image quality ..................P. 100, 142
u n Image quality ...........................P. 101
v Available recording time ...............P. 317
w Number of storable still pictures ...P. 316
x Card slot settings
Top: n Save slot ..........................P. 237
Bottom: K Save settings ..............P. 99
y Highlight & shadow control ...........P. 115
z Top: Flash intensity control ...........P. 105
Bottom: Exposure compensation ....P. 68
A Level gauge ....................................P. 40
B Exposure compensation value........P. 68
C Aperture value .........................P. 44 – 50
D Shutter speed ..........................P. 44 – 50
E Histogram
.......................................P. 39
F Preview .........................................P. 117
G AE lock....................................P. 77, 201
H Shooting mode.........................P. 41 – 60
I Custom mode .........................P. 57, 142
J Touch operation ..............................P. 43
K Flash intensity control ...................P. 105
L ISO sensitivity ...........................P. 75, 91
M AF mode ...................................P. 64, 91
N Metering mode ................................P. 77
O Flash mode .....................................P. 86
P Battery level ....................................P. 32
Q Flicker scan...................................P. 234
R Active connection to computer (USB)
......................................................P. 274
S Live view boost .............................P. 188
T Audio recording level * ............P. 61, 169
U Headphone volume * ...............P. 61, 169
V Recording level meter ...................P. 169
W a View assist .............................P. 164
X Movie audio recording ..................P. 169
Y n mode (movie exposure mode)
......................................................P. 165
Z Recording time (displayed during
recording)........................................P. 59
[ Time code .....................................P. 164
\ Silent control tab .............................P. 61
* Displayed during adjustments to [R VOL] and [P VOL]. g “Touch Controls (Silent
Controls)” (P. 61) and [n Dial Function] (P. 163)
38
EN
Shooting
2
Switching between displays
The camera uses an eye sensor to automatically switch between the monitor and
viewfi nder displays. The monitor live view display and viewfi nder also show information
on camera settings. Options are available for controlling display switching and
choosing the information shown.
Framing photos in the monitor Framing photos in the viewfi nder
Monitor
Put your
eye to the
viewfi nder
Viewfi nder
ISO-A
200
1023
1:02:03
P
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
250 F5.6 0.0
30p
30p
4K
YFYF
100
%
ISO-A
200
1023
1:02:03
P
250 F5.6
100
%
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
30p
4K
0.0
YFYF
Live view is displayed on the monitor. The viewfi nder turns on automatically
when you bring it to your eye. When
the viewfi nder is lit up, the monitor
turns off.
• If the viewfi nder is not in focus, put your eye to the
viewfi nder and focus the display by rotating the
diopter adjustment dial.
• Pressing the u (LV) button switches the display
in the monitor from live view to the super control
panel. Putting your eye to viewfi nder displays the
view through the lens. The monitor turns off.
• Shooting information can be viewed by pressing
the INFO button when the super control panel is
displayed (P. 40).
Diopter adjustment dial
u (LV) button
%
• Display switching and viewfi nder display options are available in the menus.
g G Custom Menu a > [EVF Auto Switch] (P. 196), [EVF Style] (P. 240)
39
EN
Shooting
2
Switching the information display
You can switch the information displayed in the monitor during
shooting using the INFO button.
INFO button
INFO
INFO
Level Gauge display
(Custom2)
ISO-A
200
1023
1:02:03
P
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
250 F5.6 0.0
100
%
INFO
INFO
Image Only
Histogram display
(Custom1)
Basic Information
ISO-A
200
1023
1:02:03
P
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
250 F5.6 0.0
100
%
ISO-A
200
1023
1:02:03
P
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
250 F5.6 0.0
30p
30p
4K
YFYF
100
%
INFO
INFO
INFO
• The items shown in the Custom 1 and Custom 2 displays can be chosen using [G/Info
Settings] > [LV-Info] (P. 227).
• The information shown in movie (n) mode can differ from that displayed in still
photography mode. g n Video Menu > [ n Display Settings] > [ n Info Settings]
(P. 164)
• The information display screens can be switched in either direction by rotating the dial
while pressing the INFO button.
• To choose the items displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway, highlight
[Image Only] in the [LV-Info] menu and press I.
Histogram display
A histogram showing the distribution of brightness
in the image is displayed. The horizontal axis
gives the brightness, the vertical axis the number
of pixels of each brightness in the image. Areas
above the upper limit at shooting are displayed in
red, those below the lower limit in blue, and those within the spot metering range in green.
You can choose the upper and lower limits. g G Custom Menu R > [Histogram Settings]
(P. 189)
Highlights and Shadows
Highlights and shadows, defi ned according to the upper and lower limits for the
histogram display, are shown in red and blue. You can choose the upper and lower limits.
g G Custom Menu R > [Histogram Settings] (P. 189)
More
Less
Dark Bright
40
EN
Shooting
2
Level gauge display
The orientation of the camera is indicated. The “tilt” direction is indicated on the vertical bar
and the “horizon” direction on the horizontal bar.
• The level gauge is intended as a guide only.
• Calibrate the gauge if you fi nd it is no longer truly plumb or level. g G Custom Menu
b > [Level Adjust] (P. 198)
Shooting Information
Shooting information can be viewed by pressing the INFO button when the super control
panel (P. 88) is displayed. Press the INFO button again to return to the super control
panel.
• Shooting information can be hidden using the [G/Info Settings] > [LV OFF-Info] (P. 227)
option in G Custom Menu P.
sRGB
Natural
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
M-IS
±
0
A
±
0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
2020.02.15 12:30:00
P
250
1023
1:02:03
F5.6
100
%
p
#
±
0.0
#
S-IS Auto
o
30p
30p
4K
0.0
Y
F
Y
F
S
-
AF
Off
INFO
WB
AUTO
0.0
1023
100
%
p
o
Y
F
Y
F
S-AF Off
P
250 F5.6
ISO
AUTO
F
1
/
1600
Super control panel Shooting information
41
EN
Shooting
2
Shooting still pictures
Use the mode dial to select the shooting mode, and then shoot
the image.
Indicator
Mode icon
Types of shooting modes
For how to use the various shooting modes, see the following.
PProgram AE (P. 44)
AAperture-priority AE (P. 46)
SShutter-priority AE (P. 48)
MManual exposure (P. 50)
BBulb/time (P. 52)
Live composite (P. 54)
C1/C2/C3/C4 Custom (P. 57)
nMovie (P. 60)
1
Press the mode dial lock to unlock it, and then turn to set the mode you wish
to use.
• When the mode dial lock has been pressed down, the mode dial is locked. Each time
you press the mode dial lock, it switches between locked/released.
2
Frame the shot.
• Be careful that your fi ngers or the
camera strap do not obstruct the
lens or AF illuminator.
Landscape position Portrait position
42
EN
Shooting
2
3
Adjust the focus.
• Lightly press the shutter button down to the fi rst position (press the shutter button
halfway).
The AF confi rmation mark (() will be displayed, and a green frame (AF target) will
be displayed in the focus location.
Press the shutter
button halfway AF confi rmation mark
ISO-A
200
1023
1:02:03
P
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
250 F5.6 0.0
30p
30p
4K
YFYF
100
%
ISO-A
200
1023
1:02:03
P
28mm
T W
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
250 F5.6 0.0
30p
30p
4K
YFYF
100
%
AF frame AF target
• If the camera is unable to focus, the AF confi rmation mark will fl ash (P. 296).
• The AF frame varies with the option chosen for AF-target mode. The area covered
by the AF target can be chosen in the AF-target selection display (P. 69). The AF
frame is not displayed when q (all targets) is chosen for AF-target mode.
4
Release the shutter.
• Press the shutter button all the way (fully).
• The camera will release the shutter and take a picture.
• You can focus and take pictures using touch controls. g “Shooting with touch screen
operations” (P. 43)
Pressing the shutter button halfway and all the way down
The shutter button has two positions. The act of lightly pressing the shutter button to the
fi rst position and holding it there is called “pressing the shutter button halfway”, that of
pressing it all the way down to the second position “pressing the shutter button all (or the
rest of) the way down”.
Press halfway Press the rest of
the way down
43
EN
Shooting
2
Shooting with touch screen operations
Tap d to cycle through touch screen settings.
ISO-A
200
1023
1:02:03
P
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
250 F5.6 0.0
30p
30p
4K
YFYF
100
%
dTap a subject to focus and automatically release the shutter. This option is not
available in mode B (bulb), in n (movie) mode, or when [FAF] or [FAFb] is
selected for AF mode (P. 64).
UTouch screen operations are disabled.
VTap to display an AF target and focus on the subject in the selected area. You
can use the touch screen to choose the position and size of the focus frame.
Photographs can be taken by pressing the shutter button.
LTap to choose the subject used for focus when multiple portrait subjects are
detected. L is displayed when an option other than [Face Priority Off] is selected
for [I Face Priority] (P. 92, 183). Subject selection is not available when a frame
rate of (high-speed movie recording) is selected in n (movie) mode (P. 103).
Previewing the subject (V)
1
Tap the subject in the display.
• An AF target will be displayed.
• Use the slider to choose the size of the frame.
• Tap S to turn off the display of the AF target.
P
Off
1414
1010
7
7
5
5
3x
3x
250 F5.6
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
0.0
100
%
2
Use the slider to adjust the size of the AF
target, and then tap Y to zoom in at the frame
position.
• Use your fi nger to scroll the display when the
picture is zoomed in.
• Tap Z to cancel the zoom display.
100
%
10x
• The situations in which touch screen operations are not available include the following.
In the one-touch capture white-balance display and when buttons or dials are in use
• Do not touch the display with your fi ngernails or other sharp objects.
• Gloves or monitor covers may interfere with touch screen operation.
• You can disable the touch screen operation. g G Custom Menu b > [Touchscreen
Settings] (P. 198)
44
EN
Shooting
2
Letting the camera choose aperture and shutter speed
(P: Program AE)
The camera chooses the optimal aperture and shutter speed according to subject
brightness.
1
Rotate the mode dial to P.
2
Focus and check the display.
• The shutter speed and aperture chosen by the camera
are displayed.
3
Take pictures.
ISO-A
200
1023
1:02:03
P
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
250 F5.6 0.0
30p
30p
4K
YFYF
100
%
Shooting mode
Shutter speed
Aperture
Subject Too Dark or Too Bright
If the camera is unable to achieve optimal exposure, the shutter-speed and aperture
displays will fl ash as shown.
Display Problem/solution
Large aperture (low f/-number)/
slow shutter speed
60"
60"
F2.8
F2.8
The subject is too dark.
• Use a fl ash.
Small aperture (high f/-number)/
fast shutter speed
F22
F22
8000
8000
Subject is too bright.
• The limits of the camera metering system have been
exceeded. Use a third-party ND (Neutral Density)
fi lter to reduce the amount of light entering the
camera.
• Shutter speeds as fast as 1/32000 s are available
in s (silent) mode. g “Shooting without shutter
sound (Silent s)” (P. 81), “Performing the
sequential/self-timer shooting” (P. 98)
• When using a fi xed [K ISO] setting, change the setting. g “Changing ISO sensitivity
(ISO)” (P. 75, 91)
• The aperture value shown when the displays fl ash varies with the lens and focal length.
45
EN
Shooting
2
Adjusting Settings in Mode P
Use the front and rear dials to adjust the following settings.
Front dial: Exposure compensation (P. 68)
Rear dial: Program shift
• Exposure compensation can also be adjusted using the F
button. Press the F button and then rotate the front or rear
dial.
%
• You can choose the functions performed by the front and rear dials. g G Custom Menu
J > [K Dial Function] (P. 218)
• You can use the Fn lever to reverse the roles of the front and rear dials. The lever
can also be assigned other roles. g G Custom Menu J > [K Fn Lever Function]
(P. 219)
Program Shift
Without changing exposure, you can choose from different
combinations of aperture and shutter speed selected
automatically by the camera. This is known as program
shift.
• Rotate the rear dial until the camera displays the desired
combination of aperture and shutter speed.
• The shooting mode indicator in the display changes from P
to Ps while program shift is in effect. To end program shift,
rotate the rear dial in the opposite direction until Ps is no
longer displayed.
ISO-A
200
1023
1:02:03
Ps
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
250 F5.6 0.0
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
30p
30p
4K
YFYF
100
%
Program shift
%
• You can choose whether the display refl ects the effects of exposure compensation or
maintains a constant brightness for ease of viewing. At default settings, the effects of
exposure settings are visible in the display. g G Custom Menu Q > [Live View Boost]
(P. 188)
46
EN
Shooting
2
Choosing aperture (A: Aperture-Priority AE)
In this mode, you choose the aperture (f/-number) and the camera automatically sets
the shutter speed for optimal exposure according to subject brightness. Lower aperture
values (larger apertures) reduce the depth of the area that appears to be in focus
(depth of fi eld), blurring the background. Higher aperture values (smaller apertures)
increase the depth of the area that appears to be in focus in front of and behind the
subject.
Lower aperture values… Higher aperture values…
F5.6F4.0F2.8 F8.0 F11
…reduce depth of fi eld and increase
blur. …increase depth of fi eld.
1
Rotate the mode dial to A.
2
Choose an aperture.
• At default settings, aperture is selected by rotating the
rear dial.
• The shutter speed selected automatically by the camera
will appear in the display.
3
Take pictures.
100
%
ISO-A
200
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
1023
1:02:03
30p
30p
4K
YFYF
250 F5.6 0.0
Aperture value
47
EN
Shooting
2
Subject Too Dark or Too Bright
If the camera is unable to achieve optimal exposure, the shutter-speed display will
fl ash as shown.
Display Problem/solution
Slow shutter speed
60"
60"
F5.6
F5.6
Underexposure.
• Choose a lower aperture value.
Fast shutter speed
8000
8000
F5.6
F5.6
Overexposure.
• Choose a higher aperture value.
• If the subject is still overexposed at the higher value, the limits
of the camera metering system have been exceeded. Use a
third-party ND (Neutral Density) fi lter to reduce the amount of
light entering the camera.
• Shutter speeds as fast as 1/32000 s are available in s
(silent) mode. g “Shooting without shutter sound (Silent
s)” (P. 81), “Performing the sequential/self-timer shooting”
(P. 98)
• When using a fi xed [K ISO] setting, change the setting. g “Changing ISO sensitivity
(ISO)” (P. 75, 91)
Adjusting Settings in Mode A
Use the front and rear dials to adjust the following settings.
Front dial: Exposure compensation (P. 68)
Rear dial: Aperture
• Exposure compensation can also be adjusted using the F
button. Press the F button and then rotate the front or rear
dial.
%
• You can choose the functions performed by the front and rear dials. g G Custom Menu
J > [K Dial Function] (P. 218)
• You can use the Fn lever to reverse the roles of the front and rear dials. The lever
can also be assigned other roles. g G Custom Menu J > [K Fn Lever Function]
(P. 219)
• You can choose whether the display refl ects the effects of exposure settings or maintains
a constant brightness for ease of viewing. At default settings, the effects of exposure
settings are visible in the display. g G Custom Menu Q > [Live View Boost] (P. 188)
• You can stop aperture down to the selected value and preview depth of fi eld.
g “Assigning functions to buttons (Button Function)” (P. 116)
48
EN
Shooting
2
Choosing shutter speed (S: Shutter-Priority AE)
In this mode, you choose the shutter speed and the camera automatically sets aperture
for optimal exposure according to subject brightness. Faster shutter speeds appear
to “freeze” fast-moving subjects. Slower shutter speeds add blur to moving objects,
lending them a sense of motion for a dynamic effect.
Slower shutter speeds… Faster shutter speeds…
125 250 800060301560”
…produce dynamic shots with a sense
of motion. …“freeze” the motion of fast-moving
subjects.
1
Rotate the mode dial to S.
2
Choose a shutter speed.
• At default settings, shutter speed is selected by rotating
the rear dial.
• Shutter speed can be set to values between 1/8000 and
60 s.
• Shutter speeds as fast as 1/32000 s are available in
s (silent) mode. g “Shooting without shutter sound
(Silent s)” (P. 81), “Performing the sequential/self-
timer shooting” (P. 98)
ISO-A
200
1023
1:02:03
S
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
250 F5.6 0.0
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
30p
30p
4K
YFYF
100
%
Shutter speed
• The aperture selected automatically by the camera will appear in the display.
3
Take pictures.
49
EN
Shooting
2
Subject Too Dark or Too Bright
If the camera is unable to achieve optimal exposure, the aperture display will fl ash as
shown.
Display Problem/solution
Low aperture value
2000
2000
F2.8
F2.8
Underexposure.
• Choose a slower shutter speed.
High aperture value
125
125
F22
F22
Overexposure.
• Choose a faster shutter speed. Shutter speeds as fast as
1/32000 s are available in silent mode.
• If the subject is still overexposed at the higher speed, the
limits of the camera metering system have been exceeded.
Use a third-party ND (Neutral Density) fi lter to reduce the
amount of light entering the camera.
• When using a fi xed [K ISO] setting, change the setting. g “Changing ISO sensitivity
(ISO)” (P. 75, 91)
• The aperture value shown when the display fl ashes varies with the lens and focal length.
Adjusting Settings in Mode S
Use the front and rear dials to adjust the following settings.
Front dial: Exposure compensation (P. 68)
Rear dial: Shutter speed
• Exposure compensation can also be adjusted using the F
button. Press the F button and then rotate the front or rear
dial.
%
• You can choose the functions performed by the front and rear dials. g G Custom Menu
J > [K Dial Function] (P. 218)
• You can use the Fn lever to reverse the roles of the front and rear dials. The lever
can also be assigned other roles. g G Custom Menu J > [K Fn Lever Function]
(P. 219)
• You can choose whether the display refl ects the effects of exposure settings or maintains
a constant brightness for ease of viewing. At default settings, the effects of exposure
settings are visible in the display. g G Custom Menu Q > [Live View Boost] (P. 188)
• To achieve the effect of a slow shutter in brightly-lit settings in which slow shutter speeds
are not otherwise available, use the live ND fi lter. g X Shooting Menu 2 > [Live ND
Shooting] (P. 159)
• Depending on the shutter speed selected, you may notice banding in the display caused
by fl icker from fl uorescent or LED light sources. The camera can be confi gured to reduce
the effects of fl icker during live view or when pictures are taken. g G Custom Menu
N > [Flicker Reduction] (P. 222), G Custom Menu U > [K Flicker Scan] (P. 234)
50
EN
Shooting
2
Choosing aperture and shutter speed (M: Manual Exposure)
In this mode, you choose the aperture and shutter speed. You can adjust settings
according to your goals, for example by combining fast shutter speeds with small
apertures (high f/-numbers) for increased depth of fi eld.
1
Rotate the mode dial to M.
2
Adjust aperture and shutter speed.
• At default settings, aperture is selected with the front
dial and shutter speed with the rear dial.
• Choose from shutter speeds of 1/8000–60 s.
• Shutter speeds as fast as 1/32000 s are available in
silent mode. g “Shooting without shutter sound
(Silent s)” (P. 81)
• The display shows the difference between the exposure
produced by the selected aperture and shutter speed
and the optimal exposure metered by the camera. The
display will fl ash if the difference exceeds ±3 EV.
ISO
200
1023
1:02:03
M
100
%
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
250 F5.6 -2.0
30p
30p
4K
YFYFYFYF
Difference from optimal
exposure
• When [AUTO] is selected for [K ISO], ISO sensitivity will automatically be adjusted
for optimal exposure at the selected exposure settings. [K ISO] defaults to [AUTO].
g “Changing ISO sensitivity (ISO)” (P. 75, 91)
3
Take pictures.
Subject Too Dark or Too Bright
If the camera is unable to achieve optimal exposure with [AUTO] selected for [K ISO],
the ISO sensitivity display will fl ash as shown.
Display Problem/solution
ISO-A
ISO-A
LOW
LOW
Overexposure.
• Choose a higher aperture value or faster shutter speed.
ISO-A
ISO-A
6400
6400
Underexposure.
• Choose a lower aperture value or slower shutter speed.
• If the warning does not clear from the display, choose a higher
value for ISO sensitivity. g “Changing ISO sensitivity (ISO)”
(P. 75, 91), G Custom Menu T > [K ISO-Auto Set]
(P. 191)
51
EN
Shooting
2
Adjusting Settings in Mode M
Use the front and rear dials to adjust the following settings.
Front dial: Aperture
Rear dial: Shutter speed
%
• You can choose the functions performed by the front and rear dials. g G Custom Menu
J > [K Dial Function] (P. 218)
• You can use the Fn lever to reverse the roles of the front and rear dials. The lever
can also be assigned other roles. g G Custom Menu J > [K Fn Lever Function]
(P. 219)
• Depending on the shutter speed selected, you may notice banding in the display caused
by fl icker from fl uorescent or LED light sources. The camera can be confi gured to reduce
the effects of fl icker during live view or when pictures are taken. g G Custom Menu
N > [Flicker Reduction] (P. 222), G Custom Menu U > [K Flicker Scan] (P. 234)
• You can choose whether the display refl ects the effects of exposure settings or maintains
a constant brightness for ease of viewing. At default settings, the display maintains a
constant brightness for ease of viewing. g G Custom Menu Q > [Live View Boost]
(P. 188)
Using Exposure Compensation in Mode M
In mode M, exposure compensation is available when [AUTO] is selected for [K ISO].
Because exposure compensation is performed by adjusting ISO sensitivity, aperture
and shutter speed are not affected. g “Changing ISO sensitivity (ISO)” (P. 75,
91), G Custom Menu T > [K ISO-Auto Set] (P. 191)
• Exposure compensation can be adjusted using the F
button. Hold the F button and rotate the front or rear dial.
• Exposure compensation is added to the exposure difference
shown in the display.
Exposure
compensation
ISO-A
200
1023
1:02:03
M
100
%
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
250 F5.6 -2.0
30p
30p
4K
YFYFYFYF
Exposure compensation plus
exposure difference
52
EN
Shooting
2
Long Exposures (B: Bulb/Time)
Select this mode to leave the shutter open for a long exposure. You can preview the
photo in live view and end the exposure when the desired results have been achieved.
Use when long exposures are required, for example when photographing night scenes
or fi reworks.
“Bulb” and “Live Bulb” Photography
The shutter remains open while the shutter button is pressed. Releasing the button ends the
exposure.
• The amount of light entering the camera increases the longer the shutter is open.
• When live bulb photography is selected, you can choose how often the camera updates
the live view display during the exposure.
“Time” and “Live Time” Photography
The exposure begins when the shutter button is pressed all the way down. To end the
exposure, press the shutter button all the way down a second time.
• The amount of light entering the camera increases the longer the shutter is open.
• When live time photography is selected, you can choose how often the camera updates
the live view display during the exposure.
1
Rotate the mode dial to B.
2
Select bulb or time photography.
• At default settings, the selection is made with the rear
dial.
3
Press the MENU button.
• You will be prompted to choose the interval at which the
preview is updated.
BULB F5.6
ISO
200
1023
1:02:03
B
30p
30p
4K
S-IS OFFS-IS OFF
YFYF
100
%
G
Bulb or time photography
4
Highlight an interval using FG on the arrow pad.
5
Press the
Q
button to select the highlighted option.
• The menus will be displayed. ISO L64 ~
ISO 400 ~
ISO 800 ~
ISO 1600 ~
100
%
SetBack
Live Bulb
1sec
Display Count
24 times
19 times
14 times
9 times
6
Press the MENU button to exit the menus.
• If an option other than [Off] is selected, [LIVE BULB] or [LIVE TIME] will appear in the
display.
53
EN
Shooting
2
7
Adjust aperture.
• At default settings, aperture can be adjusted using the
front dial.
BULB F5.6
ISO
200
1023
1:02:03
B
30p
30p
4K
S-IS OFFS-IS OFF
YFYF
100
%
G
Aperture
8
Take pictures.
• In bulb and live bulb modes, keep the shutter button pressed. The exposure ends
when the button is released.
• In time and live time modes, press the shutter button all the way down once to start
the exposure and again to end it.
• The exposure ends automatically when the time selected for [Bulb/Time Timer] is
reached. The default is [8 min]. The time can be changed. g G Custom Menu
U > [Bulb/Time Timer] (P. 192)
• [Noise Reduct.] is applied after shooting. The display shows the time remaining until
the process is complete. You can choose the conditions under which noise reduction
is performed (P. 192).
• During live time photography, you can refresh the preview by pressing the shutter button
halfway.
• Some limitations apply to the choice of ISO sensitivity settings available.
• Bulb photography is used in place of live bulb photography when multiple exposure,
keystone compensation, or fi sheye correction is in effect.
• Time photography is used in place of live time photography when multiple exposure,
keystone compensation, or fi sheye correction is in effect.
• During shooting, there are limits on the settings for the following functions.
Sequential shooting, self-timer shooting, time lapse shooting, AE bracket shooting,
image stabilizer, fl ash bracketing, focus bracketing, multiple exposure, etc.
• [K Image Stabilizer] (P. 97) turns off automatically.
• Depending on camera settings, the temperature, and the situation, you may notice noise
or bright spots in the monitor. These may sometimes appear in pictures even when [Noise
Reduct.] (P. 192) is enabled.
%
• Starry sky AF can be used for shots of the night sky. g “Choosing a focus mode (AF
Mode)” (P. 64), G Custom Menu I > [Starry Sky AF Setting] (P. 184)
• Display brightness can be adjusted during bulb/time photography. At default settings, the
display is darker than normal. g G Custom Menu U > [Bulb/Time Monitor] (P. 192)
• During bulb/time photography, the brightness of the subject in the display is enhanced for
ease of viewing when lighting is poor. You can choose whether to prioritize display quality
or display speed. g G Custom Menu Q > [Live View Boost] (P. 188)
• In mode
B (bulb), you can adjust focus manually while the exposure is in progress.
This allows you to defocus during the exposure or focus at the end of the exposure.
g G Custom Menu I > [Bulb/Time Focusing] (P. 216)
54
EN
Shooting
2
$ Noise
While shooting at slow shutter speeds, noise may appear on screen. These phenomena
occur when the temperature rises in the image pickup device or image pickup device internal
drive circuit, causing current to be generated in those sections of the image pickup device
that are not normally exposed to light. This can also occur when shooting with a high ISO
setting in a high-temperature environment. To reduce this noise, the camera activates the
noise reduction function. g G Custom Menu T > [Noise Reduct.] (P. 192)
Lighten Blending (B: Live Composite Photography)
Leave the shutter open for a long exposure. You can view the light trails left by
fi reworks or stars and photograph them without changing the exposure of the
background. The camera combines multiple shots and records them as a single
photograph.
1
Rotate the mode dial to B.
2
Select [LIVE COMP].
• At default settings, the selection is made with the rear
dial.
3
Press the MENU button.
• The [Composite Settings] menu will be displayed.
1023
1:02:03
B
LIVE COMP
–0.3
F5.6
100
%
Press shutter button once
to prepare for composite
shooting.
Live composite photography
4
Highlight an exposure time using FG on the arrow
pad.
• Choose an exposure time of from 1/2 to 60 s.
5
Press the Q button to select the highlighted option.
• The menus will be displayed.
100
%Composite Settings
1sec
Exposure time per image.
Exposure time and aperture
will determine your base exposure.
Back Set
6
Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.
7
Adjust aperture.
• At default settings, aperture can be adjusted using the front dial.
8
Press the shutter button all the way down to ready
the camera.
• The camera is ready to shoot when [Ready for
composite shooting] is displayed.
1023
1:02:03
B
LIVE COMP
–0.3
F5.6
ISO
200
30p
30p
4K
YFYF
100
%
Ready for composite shooting
55
EN
Shooting
2
9
Press the shutter button to start shooting.
• Live composite photography will start. The display will be updated after each
exposure.
10
Press the shutter button again to end shooting.
• Shooting ends automatically after the time selected for [Live Composite Timer]
(P. 192). The default is [3h]. Other options can be selected.
• The maximum recording time available varies with battery level and shooting
conditions. For long recording times, use an optional power battery holder (P. 24)
and AC adapter (P. 25).
• Some limitations apply to the choice of ISO sensitivity settings available.
• Limitations apply to some features during shooting, including:
sequential shooting, the self-timer, interval timer photography, AE bracketing, fl ash
bracketing, focus bracketing, High Res Shot, HDR photography, multiple exposure,
keystone compensation, the live ND fi lter, and fi sheye correction.
• [K Image Stabilizer] (P. 97) turns off automatically.
%
• Starry sky AF can be used for shots of the night sky. g “Choosing a focus mode (AF
Mode)” (P. 64), G Custom Menu I > [Starry Sky AF Setting] (P. 184)
• Display brightness can be adjusted during live composite photography. At default settings,
the display is darker than normal. g G Custom Menu U > [Bulb/Time Monitor]
(P. 192)
• The exposure time for each exposure made during live composite photography can be
chosen in advance using the menus. g G Custom Menu U > [Composite Settings]
(P. 233)
56
EN
Shooting
2
Saving Custom Settings to the Mode Dial
(C1/C2/C3/C4 Custom Modes)
Frequently-used settings and shooting modes can be saved as custom modes and
recalled as needed simply by rotating the mode dial. Saved settings can also be
recalled directly from the menus.
• Save settings to positions C1 through C4.
• At default settings, custom modes are equivalent to mode P.
Saving Settings (Assign to Custom Mode)
1
Choose a mode other than n and adjust settings
as desired.
• For information on the settings that can be saved, see
the menu list (P. 301).
2
Press the MENU button to display the menus.
3
Highlight [Reset / Custom Modes] in W Shooting
Menu 1 and press I on the arrow pad.
• [Reset / Custom Modes] options will be displayed.
1
2
1
4:3
Off
100
%
Y
F
o
Off
Back Set
Shooting Menu 1
KK
Picture Mode
Reset / Custom Modes
Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse
j/Y
Image Aspect
Digital Tele-converter
4
Highlight [Assign to Custom Mode] using the FG
buttons and press the I button.
• [Assign to Custom Mode] options will be displayed. Custom Mode Save Settings
Recall from Custom Mode
100
%Reset / Custom Modes
Back Set
Reset Basic
Assign to Custom Mode
5
Highlight the desired custom mode ([Custom Mode
C1]–[Custom Mode C4]) using FG buttons and
press the I button.
• The menu for the selected custom mode will be
displayed.
100
%
--
--
--
--
--
----
Assign to Custom Mode
Custom Mode C2
Custom Mode C1
Custom Mode C3
Custom Mode C4
Back Set
57
EN
Shooting
2
6
Highlight [Set] using the FG buttons and press
the Q button.
• The [Assign to Custom Mode] menu will be displayed
again.
• Any existing settings will be overwritten.
• To restore default settings for the selected custom
mode, highlight [Reset] and press the Q button.
100
%Custom Mode C1
Set
Set current shooting
mode and settings.
Back Set
7
Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.
$
• Custom modes can be updated automatically to refl ect any changes made to settings
while the mode is selected during shooting.
Using Custom Modes (C1/C2/C3/C4)
To recall all saved settings, including the shooting mode:
1
Rotate the mode dial to the desired custom mode
(C1, C2, C3, or C4).
• The camera will be set to the settings for the selected
mode.
2
Take pictures.
• By default, changes made after recall will not be applied to the stored settings. The saved
settings will be restored when next you select the custom mode with the mode dial.
• If [Hold] is selected for [Custom Mode Save Settings], custom modes will be updated
automatically to refl ect any changes made to settings while the mode is selected during
shooting. The changes will remain stored in the custom mode even after the mode dial is
rotated to another setting. Custom modes can used in much the same way as modes P,
A, S, B, and M.
Updating Custom Modes Automatically
Custom modes can be updated automatically to refl ect any changes made to settings
while the mode is selected during shooting.
1
Highlight [Reset/Custom Modes] in W Shooting Menu 1 and press the Q
button.
2
Highlight [Custom Mode Save Settings] and press I on the arrow pad.
3
Highlight a custom mode ([Custom Mode C1]–[Custom Mode C4]) and press
the Q button.
4
Highlight [Hold] and press the Q button.
58
EN
Shooting
2
Recalling Saved Settings
In modes other than n, you can recall the settings stored in custom modes [Custom
Mode C1] through [Custom Mode C4] but not the shooting mode. The shooting mode
remains that currently selected with the mode dial.
1
Press the MENU button to display the menus.
2
Highlight [Reset / Custom Modes] in W Shooting
Menu 1 and press I on the arrow pad.
• [Reset / Custom Modes] options will be displayed.
1
2
1
4:3
Off
100
%
Y
F
o
Off
Back Set
Shooting Menu 1
KK
Picture Mode
Reset / Custom Modes
Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse
j/Y
Image Aspect
Digital Tele-converter
3
Highlight [Recall from Custom Mode] using the
FG buttons and press the I button.
• The [Recall from Custom Mode] menu will be displayed.
100
%
Custom Mode Save Settings
Recall from Custom Mode
Assign to Custom Mode
Reset Basic
Reset / Custom Modes
Back Set
4
Highlight the desired custom mode using the FG
buttons and press the I button.
100
%
Custom Mode C2
Custom Mode C1
Custom Mode C3
Custom Mode C4
Recall from Custom Mode
Back Set
5
Highlight [Yes] using the FG buttons and press
the Q button.
• W Shooting Menu 1 will be displayed.
100
%Custom Mode C1
Yes
Apply C1 settings? Current camera
settings will be overwritten.
No
Back Set
6
Press the MENU button to exit the menus.
%
• [K Button Function] (P. 116) can be used to assign custom modes [Custom Mode C1]
through [Custom Mode C4] (P. 119) to a camera control, allowing the stored settings to
be recalled at the touch of a button in all modes except n. The selected shooting mode is
also recalled. Press the control to turn the custom mode on or off.
• Settings recalled by pressing a button cease to apply when you:
- Turn the camera off
- Rotate the mode dial to another setting
- Press the MENU button during shooting
- Perform a reset
- Save or recall custom settings
59
EN
Shooting
2
Recording Movies
Recording movies in photo shooting modes
The R button can be used for movie recording even when the mode dial is not in the
n position.
1
Press the R button to begin recording.
• Movie you are recording will be displayed on the monitor.
• If you put your eye to the viewfi nder, movie you are recording will be displayed in the
viewfi nder.
• You can change the focus location by tapping the screen while recording.
• The camera will start the recording count and display the recording time.
R button
28
mm
T W
C-AF
TC 00:00:00:12 DF
0:29:47
n
REC
00:12
LL
R
R
M-ISM-IS
1
0.0
123
min
30p
30p
4K
250 F5.6
ISO-A
200
Recording time
2
Press the R button again to end recording.
• The sound of touch operations and button operations may be recorded.
• The AF target takes on the shape selected for movie mode. Rotate the mode dial to
n (movie mode) and choose target shape in the AF target selection display (P. 69).
• The situations in which touch screen operations are not available include the following.
In the one-touch capture white-balance display and when buttons or dials are in use
• CMOS image sensors of the type used in the camera generate a so-called “rolling
shutter” effect that can cause distortion in pictures of moving objects. This distortion is
a phenomenon that occurs in pictures of fast-moving subjects or if the camera is moved
during shooting. It is particularly noticeable in pictures taken at long focal lengths.
• Movies over 4 GB in size are recorded over multiple fi les (depending on shooting
conditions, the camera may start recording to a new fi le before the 4 GB limit is reached).
The fi les can be played back as a single movie. g “Viewing Movies over 4 GB in Size”
(P. 130)
• When recording movies, use an SD card that supports an SD speed class of 10 or higher.
• A UHS-II or UHS-I card with a UHS speed class of 3 or better is required when:
a movie resolution of [4K] or [C4K] is selected in the [nK] menu or a bit rate of [A-I]
(All-Intra) is selected in the [nK] menu
• When the camera is used continuously for extended periods, the temperature of the
image sensor will rise and noise and color splotches may be visible in the display.
Should this occur, turn the camera off and wait for it to cool. Noise and color splotches
are particularly likely to occur at high ISO sensitivities. If the temperature of the sensor
increases further, the camera will turn off automatically.
60
EN
Shooting
2
• When using a Four Thirds system lens, the AF will not operate while recording movies.
• The R button cannot be used to record movies in the following instances:
During a multiple exposure (still photography also ends), while the shutter button is
pressed halfway, in mode B, during sequential shooting, time-lapse photography,
keystone compensation, or fi sh-eye correction, or while the live ND fi lter is in use
• When high-speed movie recording is selected for [nK], movies shot with [i-Enhance],
[e-Portrait], or an art fi lter selected for picture mode will be recorded in [Natural] mode.
$
• Some settings, such as AF mode, can be set separately for movies and photographs.
g “Using the Video Menu” (P. 161)
Recording movies in movie mode (n)
Rotate the mode dial to n (movie mode) to record movies using the effects available
in P, A, S, and M modes (P. 165).
• Confi guring the shutter button so that it can be used to record movies requires changes to
[n Shutter Function] (P. 163).
• A beep does not sound when the camera focuses in movie mode.
61
EN
Shooting
2
Touch Controls (Silent Controls)
You can prevent the camera from recording operating
sounds that occur due to camera operations while
shooting. Tap the silent shooting tab to display the
function items. After tapping an item, tap the displayed
arrows to select the settings.
Silent control tab
28
mm
T W
C-AF
TC 00:00:00:12 DF
0:29:47
n
REC
00:12
LL
R
R
M-ISM-IS
1
0.0
123
min
30p
30p
4K
250 F5.6
ISO-A
200
Y (power zoom) Zoom power zoom lenses in or out.
P (headphone volume) Adjust volume when using headphones.
R (recording level) Choose the recording level.
SS (shutter speed) Adjust shutter speed when [S] (shutter-priority AE) or [M]
(manual) is selected for [n Mode] (movie exposure mode)
(P. 165).
FNo (aperture) Adjust aperture when [A] (aperture-priority AE) or [M] (manual) is
selected for [n Mode] (movie exposure mode) (P. 165).
F (exposure
compensation)
Adjust exposure compensation. If [M] is selected for [n Mode]
(movie exposure mode) (P. 165), exposure compensation is
available when [AUTO] is selected for [n ISO] (P. 75).
ISO (n ISO sensitivity) Adjust [n ISO] (P. 75). This option is available when [M] is
selected for [n Mode] (movie exposure mode) (P. 165).
• Silent controls are not available during high-speed movie recording (P. 103).
62
EN
Shooting
2
Shooting Settings
The camera offers many photography-related functions. Depending on how often you
use them, you can access settings via buttons, icons in the display, or menus that can
be used for detailed adjustments.
Method Description g
Direct buttons
Adjust settings directly using buttons, including those
listed below. Commonly-used functions are assigned to
buttons for quick access during viewfi nder photography.
• The F, jY#, and ISO buttons
63
LV super control panel/
super control panel Choose from a list of settings showing current camera
status. You can also view current camera settings. 88
Live controls Adjust settings while viewing your subject in the display. 225
Menus Adjust settings from menus displayed in the monitor. 139
63
EN
Shooting
2
Direct Buttons
Frequently-used photographic functions are assigned to buttons. These are referred to
as “direct buttons”. Included are the buttons listed below, which can be used for basic
shooting settings.
4
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
2
1
Direct button Assigned function
1Y button One-touch white balance (P. 95)
2Z button Preview (P. 117)
3u (LV) button Display (monitor/viewfi nder) selection (P. 38)
4AEL/AFL button AEL/AFL (P. 77)
5ISO button ISO sensitivity (P. 75)
6Arrow pad N (AF-target position) (P. 69)
7jY# button Sequential/self-timer shooting (P. 78, 86)
8AFm button AF/metering mode (P. 64, 77)
9F button Exposure compensation (P. 68)
0R button Movie recording (P. 59)
%
• Buttons can be assigned different roles. g “Assigning functions to buttons (Button
Function)” (P. 116)
64
EN
Shooting
2
Choosing a focus mode (AF Mode)
You can select a focusing method (focus mode).
1
Press the AFm button.
2
Rotate the rear dial to select an option.
3
Press the shutter button halfway to exit to the
shooting display.
P
100
%
PreMF
pBCDE
p
S-AF C-AF
C-AF+TR
MF
S-AF
F
AF
Single AF
ESP
AF Mode
S-AF
(Single AF)
The camera focuses once when the shutter button is pressed halfway.
When the focus is locked, a beep sounds, and the AF confi rmation mark
and the AF target mark light up. This mode is suitable for taking pictures
of still subjects or subjects with limited movement.
C-AF
(Continuous AF)
The camera repeats focusing while the shutter button remains pressed
halfway. When the subject is in focus, the AF confi rmation mark lights up
on the monitor and the beep sounds when the focus is locked at the fi rst
time.
Even if the subject moves or you change the composition of the picture,
the camera continues trying to focus.
MF
(Manual focus)
This function allows you to manually focus on
any position by operating the focus ring on the
lens.
Near
Focus ring
)
C-AF+TR
(AF tracking)
Press the shutter button halfway to focus; the camera then tracks and
maintains focus on the current subject while the shutter button is held in
this position.
• The AF target is displayed in red if the camera can no longer track the
subject. Release the shutter button and then frame the subject again
and press the shutter button halfway.
• Autofocus does not work while the AF target is displayed in red even if the
camera is tracking the subject.
• Tracking AF cannot be used with:
keystone compensation, High Res Shot, focus stacking, focus
bracketing, interval-timer photography, HDR photography, the live
ND fi lter, or fi sheye correction.
PreMF
(Preset MF) The camera automatically focuses on the preset focus point when
shooting.
FAF
(Starry Sky AF) Choose this mode for pictures of stars in the night sky. Press the AEL/
AFL button to focus on the stars. g “Using Starry Sky AF” (P. 66)
• The camera may be unable to focus if the subject is poorly lit, obscured by mist or smoke,
or lacks contrast.
• When using a Four Thirds system lens, AF will not be available during movie recording.
65
EN
Shooting
2
• [AF Mode] selection is not available when the lens focus ring is in the MF position and
[Operative] is selected for [MF Clutch] (P. 184) in G Custom Menu I (P. 286).
• The Fn lever can be used to choose between the [AF Mode] settings assigned to Fn lever
Positions 1 and 2. g G Custom Menu J > [K Fn Lever Function] (P. 185, 219),
n Video Menu > [n Button/Dial/Lever] > [n Fn Lever Function] (P. 163)
Adjusting Focus Manually During Autofocus
• Before proceeding, select [On] for [K AF+MF] (P. 200) in G Custom Menu J. b will
be displayed in [S-AF], [C-AF], [C-AF+TR], and [FAF] modes.
1
Choose a focus mode marked with an b icon (P. 64).
• When recording movies, choose [S-AFb] for [n AF Mode] (P. 162).
2
Press the shutter button halfway to focus using autofocus.
• In [FAFb] mode, press the AEL/AFL button to initiate starry sky AF.
3
Keeping the shutter button pressed halfway, rotate the focus ring to adjust
focus manually.
• To refocus using autofocus, release the shutter button and press it halfway again.
• Manual focus adjustment during autofocus is not available in [FAFb] mode.
• Manual focus adjustment during autofocus is available via the focus ring on M.ZUIKO
PRO (Micro Four Thirds PRO) lenses. For information on other lenses, see the
OLYMPUS website.
4
Press the shutter button the rest of the way down to take the picture.
66
EN
Shooting
2
Using Starry Sky AF
1
Select [FAF] for AF mode and press the Q button.
2
Press the AEL/AFL button to initiate starry sky AF.
• To interrupt starry sky AF, press the AEL/AFL button again.
• At default settings, starry sky AF does not start when the shutter button is pressed
halfway. To confi gure the camera so that starry sky AF does start when the shutter
button is pressed halfway, use [K AEL/AFL] (P. 201) in G Custom Menu J.
• The camera displays [Starry Sky AF is Running] during starry sky AF. The in-focus
indicator (() is displayed for about two seconds after the camera focuses; if the
camera is unable to focus, the in-focus indicator will instead fl ash for about two
seconds.
3
Press the shutter button all the way down to take the picture.
%
• The [Starry Sky AF Setting] (P. 184) item in G Custom Menu I offers a choice of
[Accuracy] and [Speed]. Mount the camera on a tripod before taking photographs with
[Accuracy] selected.
• Your choice of AF-target modes (P. 69) is restricted to single target, 9-target group
(3 × 3), and 25-target group (5 × 5).
• The camera will not be able to focus in bright locations.
• Starry sky AF cannot be used with Pro Capture.
• [K Orientation Linked N] (P. 210), [N Loop Settings] (P. 208), [AF Limiter]
(P. 211), and [AF Illuminator] (P. 183) are fi xed at [Off], [I Face Priority] (P. 92) at
[Face Priority Off], [Frame Rate] (P. 188) at [Normal], and [AF Scanner] (P. 181) at
[mode1].
• The camera automatically focuses at infi nity when starry sky AF is selected.
• When [On] is selected for [S-AF Release Priority] (P. 186) in G Custom Menu N, the
shutter can be released even when the subject is not in focus.
• Manual focus is selected when a Four Thirds lens is attached.
• Starry sky AF is available with OLYMPUS Four Thirds lenses. It cannot, however, be used
with lenses with a maximum aperture over f/5.6. For more information, visit the OLYMPUS
website.
67
EN
Shooting
2
Setting a focus position for PreMF
1
Select [PreMF] for AF mode, and press INFO button.
2
Press the shutter button halfway to focus.
• Focus can be adjusted by rotating the focus ring.
3
Press the Q button.
• The PreMF function can be recalled by pressing the button to which [Preset MF] is
assigned in [Button Function] (P. 116). Press the button again to return to the original AF.
• The distance for the preset focus point can be set with [Preset MF distance] in G Custom
Menu I (P. 184).
• The camera also focuses at the preset distance:
- when turned on and
- when you exit the menus to the shooting display.
Manual Focus Adjustment
When [S-AFb], [C-AFb], [MF], [C-AF+TRb], [PreMF], or [FAFb] is selected for
AF mode, focus can be adjusted manually during exposures or while pictures are being
taken in [Sequential Low] mode.
• In mode
B (bulb), manual focus adjustment can be performed according to the option
selected for [Bulb/Time Focusing] (P. 216).
68
EN
Shooting
2
Controlling exposure (Exposure Compensation)
The exposure selected automatically by the camera can be altered to suit your artistic
intent. Choose positive values to make pictures brighter, negative values to make them
darker.
• Exposure compensation is available in modes P, A, S, and n. To enable exposure
compensation in mode M, select [AUTO] for [K ISO] (P. 75).
Negative (–) No compensation (0) Positive (+)
• Exposure compensation can be adjusted by up to ±5.0 EV.
The exposure bar in the display shows values of up to
±3.0 EV. The bar fl ashes when a value outside this range is
selected.
• During movie recording, exposure compensation can be
adjusted by ±3.0 EV.
• The viewfi nder and live view show the effects of values not
exceeding ±3.0 EV.
• To preview the effects of exposure compensation in
live view, select [Off] for [Live View Boost] (P. 188) in
G Custom Menu Q.
+1.3
ISO-A
200
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
1023
1:02:03
P
250 F5.6
30p
30p
4K
YFYF
100
%
Exposure
compensation Exposure
bar
• The front and rear dials or touch controls can be used to adjust exposure during movie
recording.
Adjusting Exposure Compensation
Modes P, A, and S
• In movie mode, exposure compensation can be adjusted when [P], [A], or [S] is selected
for [n Mode] (movie exposure mode).
1
Rotate the front dial to adjust exposure compensation.
• You can also choose a value by pressing the F button and using HI on the arrow
pad.
• To reset exposure compensation, press the Q button.
2
Take pictures.
Mode M
• In movie mode, exposure compensation can be adjusted when [M] is selected for
[n Mode] (movie exposure mode). You must fi rst however select [On] for n Video
Menu > [n Specifi cation Settings] > [b ISO-Auto Set] > [b ISO-Auto] (P. 161) and
[AUTO] for [n ISO] (P. 75).
1
Press the F button and then rotate the front dial or rear dial to adjust
exposure compensation.
2
Take pictures.
69
EN
Shooting
2
%
• F (exposure compensation) can be assigned to other controls. g “Assigning functions
to buttons (Button Function)” (P. 116)
Choosing an AF Target Mode (AF Target Mode)
1
Keep the multi selector pressed while
rotating the front or rear dial.
+
Multi selector
• The camera cycles through AF target modes as shown.
q
100
%
M
100
%
o
100
%
n
100
%
r
100
%
s
100
%
• At default settings, custom target modes (P. 71) are not displayed. Display can be
enabled by going to [KNMode Settings] (P. 182) in G Custom Menu K placing
checks (v) next to the desired options.
2
Release the multi selector when the desired mode is displayed.
• AF target mode options will no longer be displayed.
• The following reduce the number of AF targets available:
- Selecting [On] for [Digital Tele-converter] (P. 143)
- Selecting an option other than [4:3] for [Aspect] (P. 98)
%
• Settings can also be adjusted by fi rst pressing a button and then using the front or
rear dial. Access the AF-target display by pressing the control to which [N] has been
assigned via [Button Function] (P. 116). You can then adjust settings by rotating the front
or rear dial. At default settings, [N] is assigned to the arrow pad.
• The AF target display can be accessed by pressing the multi selector. The multi selector
can be confi gured using [S Center Button] (P. 217) in G Custom Menu J.
• Separate AF target modes can be selected according to camera orientation.
g G Custom Menu K > [K Orientation Linked N] (P. 210)
70
EN
Shooting
2
• The following focus settings can be recalled simultaneously using the Fn lever. Separate
settings can be assigned to Positions 1 and 2. Use this option to quickly adjust settings
according to shooting conditions.
[AF Mode] (P. 64), [AF Target Mode] (P. 69), and [AF Target Point] (P. 72)
The Fn lever can be confi gured using the [K Fn Lever Function] item (P. 219) in
G Custom Menu J or the [n Button/Dial/Lever] > [n Fn Lever Function] item (P. 163)
in the video menu.
• You can adjust AF target settings for [C-AF]. g G Custom Menu J > [K C-AF Center
Start] (P. 204) and [K C-AF Center Priority] (P. 205)
• Separate options can be selected for still photography and movie mode.
AF Target Modes
• The only options available when FAF is selected are single target, 9-target group (3 × 3),
and 25-target group (5 × 5) modes.
• The only options available during movie recording are single target, 9-target group (3 × 3),
25-target group (5 × 5), and all target (11 × 9) modes.
M Single Target
Select a single focus target.
M
100
%
o Small Target
Further reduce the target size for single-target AF-target
selection. Use for pinpoint focus on small subjects.
o
100
%
N 5-Target Group
Select a group of 5 targets, arranged in a cross. The
camera chooses the target used for focus from within the
selected group.
n
100
%
r 9-Target Group (3 × 3)
Select a group of 9 targets, arranged in a square. The
camera chooses the target used for focus from within the
selected group.
r
100
%
71
EN
Shooting
2
s 25-Target Group (5 × 5)
Select a group of 25 targets, arranged in a square. The
camera chooses the target used for focus from within the
selected group.
s
100
%
q All Targets
The camera chooses the target used for focus from all
available targets.
• The camera chooses from 121 (11 × 11) targets during still
photography and from 99 (11 × 9) targets in movie mode. q
100
%
u/v/w/x Custom Target
Custom target modes can be displayed by going to [KNMode Settings] (P. 182) in
G Custom Menu K and placing checks (v) next to the desired options.
Use the AF target mode selected for [t Target Mode Settings] (P. 209) in
G Custom Menu K. The default setting is single target.
%
• To enable cluster AF targeting when q (all targets) is
selected and either [C-AF] is chosen for [n AF Mode]
or [S-AF], [S-AFb], [C-AF], or [C-AFb] is chosen for
[K AF Mode] (P. 64), select [On2] for [AF Area Pointer]
(P. 182). The camera will display AF targets for all areas
that are in focus.
100
%
72
EN
Shooting
2
Choosing a Focus Target (AF Target Point)
The frame showing the location of the focus point is referred to as the “AF target”. You
can position the target over your subject. At default settings, the multi selector is used
to position the AF target.
1
Use the multi selector to position the AF target.
• The target can also be positioned using the arrow pad.
Pressing FGHI buttons displays the AF target.
Multi selector
• The AF target is displayed at the start of the operation.
• To select the center AF target, press the multi selector
or press and hold the Q button.
• You can choose whether AF-target selection “wraps
around” the edges of the display (P. 208). M
100
%
AF target
2
Take pictures.
• The AF-target selection display will clear from the monitor when the shutter button is
pressed halfway.
• The AF frame is displayed in place of the selected AF target.
• If [N] is assigned to a control using [Button Function] (P. 116), you can press the
control and then use the arrow pad or multi selector to choose the AF target.
• You can reposition the AF target during focusing when [C-AF] or [C-AFb] is selected in
still photography mode.
• You can also reposition the AF target during movie recording.
• The size and number of the AF target changes depending on the [Digital Tele-converter]
(P. 143), [Aspect] (P. 98), and group target (P. 69) settings.
%
• When [On] is selected for [AF Targeting Pad] (P. 183), you can reposition the AF target
using monitor touch controls while framing your subject in the viewfi nder.
73
EN
Shooting
2
Zoom frame AF/Zoom AF (Super Spot AF)
You can zoom in on the display during shooting. For greater precision during focusing,
zoom in on the focus area. At higher zoom ratios, you can focus on areas smaller than
the standard focus target. You can reposition the focus area as desired during zoom.
• Before you will be able to use Super Spot AF, you must use [Button Function] (P. 116) to
assign [a] (P. 119) to a camera control.
ISO-A
200
1023
1:02:03
P
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
250 F5.6 0.0
30p
30p
4K
YFYF
100
%
Shooting display
ISO-A
200
1023
1:02:03
P
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
250 F5.6
Off
0.0
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
30p
30p
4K
YFYF
100
%
Zoom frame AF display
10x
100
%
Zoom AF display
aa
a
a (Press and hold) / Q
1
Press the button to which [a] (magnify) is
assigned.
• The zoom frame will be displayed.
ISO-A
200
1023
1:02:03
P
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
250 F5.6
Off
0.0
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
30p
30p
4K
YFYF
100
%
2
Position the frame using the multi selector.
• To re-center the frame, press the multi selector or press
and hold the Q button.
• The frame can also be positioned using the arrow pad
(FGHI).
ISO-A
200
1023
1:02:03
P
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
250 F5.6
Off
0.0
30p
30p
4K
YFYF
100
%
3
Adjust the size of the zoom frame to choose the
zoom ratio.
• Press the INFO button and then use the FG buttons
or the front or rear dial to adjust the size of the zoom
frame.
• Press the Q button to accept and exit.
3
x
3
x
100
%
74
EN
Shooting
2
4
Press the button to which [a] is assigned once
more.
• The camera will zoom the selected area in to fi ll the
display.
• Use the front or rear dial to zoom in or out.
• Use the multi selector to scroll the display.
• Use the arrow pad (FGHI) to scroll the display.
10x
100
%
• In shooting mode M (manual) or B (bulb), you can
press the INFO button during zoom to choose aperture
or shutter speed.
• Press the a button to return to the zoom frame.
• Press the Q button to end focus zoom.
• You can also end focus zoom by pressing and holding
the a button.
250 F5.6
100
%
Exposure adjustment display
for modes
M
and
B
5
Press the shutter button halfway to focus using autofocus.
• Focus zoom applies to the display only. Pictures taken with the camera are not affected.
%
• Touch controls can be used for focus zoom. g “Shooting with touch screen operations”
(P. 43)
• You can make the area in the zoom frame brighter for easier focus or confi gure the
camera to exit focus zoom when the shutter button is pressed halfway to focus.
g G Custom Menu Q > [LV Close Up Settings] (P. 188)
75
EN
Shooting
2
Changing ISO sensitivity (ISO)
Select a value according to subject brightness. Higher values let you photograph
darker scenes but also increase image “noise” (mottling). Select [AUTO] to let the
camera adjust sensitivity according to lighting conditions.
• ISO sensitivity is fi xed at [AUTO] during movie recording when [P], [A], or [S] is selected
for [n Mode] (movie exposure mode). Setting [n Mode] to [M] allows other options to be
selected.
1
Press the ISO button, and rotate the front or rear dial to select a value.
AUTO
Sensitivity is adjusted automatically according to shooting conditions.
Use [K ISO-Auto Set] (P. 191) in G Custom Menu T to choose
the maximum sensitivity selected by the camera and the shutter
speed at which auto sensitivity control takes effect during still
photography.
During movie recording, ISO sensitivity will be set to values of
from ISO 200 to 6400. When [M] is selected for [n Mode] (movie
exposure mode), auto ISO sensitivity control can be enabled by
selecting [On] for [b ISO-Auto Set] (P. 161) > [b ISO-Auto].
You can also choose maximum and standard values for ISO
sensitivity.
L64, L100,
200–25600
(still photography)
Choose a value for ISO sensitivity. ISO 200 offers a good balance
between noise and dynamic range. Choose [L100] or [L64] for larger
apertures (higher f-numbers) or slower shutter speeds. [L64] is
equivalent to ISO 64, [L100] to ISO 100.
• [L64] and [L100] are available at all exposure step values.
• [L64] and [L100] reduce dynamic range.
200–6400
(movie recording)
Choose a value for [n ISO]. ISO 200 offers a good balance between
noise and dynamic range. This option is available when [M] is
selected for [n Mode] (movie exposure mode).
• Combining values over ISO 8000 with settings that use an electronic shutter (for example,
silent mode or focus bracketing) sets the fl ash sync speed to 1/20 s.
• Regardless of the value selected for ISO sensitivity, the fl ash sync speed for photos taken
using ISO bracketing in silent mode is 1/20 s.
• When [M] is selected for [n Mode] (movie exposure mode), ISO sensitivity can be
adjusted during recording using touch controls (P. 61) or by rotating the front or rear
dial.
• If [Dramatic Tone] or [Watercolor] is chosen for picture mode during still photography,
sensitivity will not exceed ISO 1600 when [AUTO] is selected.
76
EN
Shooting
2
• The following restrictions apply when [M] is selected for [n Mode] (movie exposure
mode):
• [l OM-Log400] selected for picture mode:
- If the frame rate selected for [nK] is 24p, 25p, or 30p, [AUTO] is restricted to
sensitivities of ISO 400–3200.
- If the frame rate selected for [nK] is 50p or 60p, [AUTO] is restricted to
sensitivities of ISO 400–6400.
- The lowest value that can be selected manually is ISO 400.
• Other picture modes:
- If the frame rate selected for [nK] is 24p, 25p, or 30p, [AUTO] is restricted to
sensitivities of ISO 200–3200.
%
• The role performed by the ISO button can also be assigned to other controls.
g “Assigning functions to buttons (Button Function)” (P. 116)
77
EN
Shooting
2
Choosing how the camera measures brightness (Metering)
You can choose how the camera meters subject brightness.
1
Press the AFm button.
2
Rotate the front dial to select an option.
3
Press the shutter button halfway to exit to the
shooting display.
Metering
P
100
%
PreMF
pBCDE
p
S-AF C-AF
C-AF+TR
MF
S-AF
F
AF
Single AF
ESP
pDigital ESP metering Suited to most scenes, including back-lit subjects. The
camera meters 324 areas of the frame and calculates optimal
exposure taking into consideration the nature of the scene.
BCenter weighted
averaging metering
Suited to compositions that place the main
subject at the center of the frame. The camera
sets exposure based on the average light level
for the entire frame while assigning the greatest
weight to the area in the center.
CSpot metering Use a specifi c area of the subject meter
exposure. The camera meters a small portion
(approximately 2%) of the frame.
DSpot metering
(highlight) Increases spot metering exposure. Ensures bright subjects
appear bright.
ESpot metering
(shadow) Lowers spot metering exposure. Ensures dark subjects
appear dark.
• The spot metering position can be set at the selected AF target. g G Custom Menu
V > [N Spot Metering] (P. 193)
Locking the exposure (AE Lock)
You can lock the exposure by pressing the AEL/AFL button. Use this when you want
to adjust the focus and exposure separately or when you want to shoot several images
at the same exposure.
AE lock is available only when [mode1] or [mode2] is selected for [K AEL/AFL]
(P. 201) during still photography (note, however, that when [FAF] or [FAFb] is
selected for AF mode, AE lock is available only in [mode1]).
• If the AEL/AFL button has been assigned a different role, you will need to assign [AEL/
AFL] (P. 117) to a control using [Button Function] (P. 116).
• If you press the AEL/AFL button once, the exposure is locked and u is displayed.
g “Setting Focus and Exposure with the AEL/AFL Button (K AEL/AFL)” (P. 201)
• Press the AEL/AFL button once again to release the AE Lock.
• The lock will be released if you operate the mode dial, MENU button, or Q button.
78
EN
Shooting
2
Performing the sequential/self-timer shooting
Adjust settings for burst or self-timer photography. Choose an option according to your
subject. Other options, including anti-shock and silent modes, are also available.
1
Press the jY# button.
2
Rotate the rear dial to select a value.
• Custom self-timer options can be viewed by pressing the INFO button.
oSingle Single-frame advance. The camera takes one photo each
time the shutter button is pressed all the way down.
TSequential High
The camera takes photos at up to about 15 fps while the
shutter button is held all the way down. Focus, exposure,
and white balance are locked at the values for the fi rst shot
in each series. You can choose the frame advance rate and
the maximum number of shots in each series (P. 220). The
frame advance rate drops at [K ISO] settings over 8000.
SSequential Low
The camera takes photos at up to about 10 fps while the
shutter button is held all the way down. You can choose
the frame advance rate and the maximum number of shots
in each series (P. 220). Focus and exposure conform to
the options selected for [K AF Mode] (P. 64, 91) and
[K AEL/AFL] (P. 201). If [C-AF], [C-AFb], [C-AF+TR],
or [C-AF+TRb] is selected for [K AF Mode], the camera
will focus before each shot. The frame advance rate drops at
[K ISO] settings over 8000.
XY 12sec
The shutter is released 12 seconds after the shutter button
is pressed all the way down. The self-timer lamp will light for
about 10 seconds and then start to fl ash about 2 seconds
before the shutter is released. The camera focuses when the
shutter button is pressed halfway.
ZY 2sec
When the shutter button is pressed all the way down, the
self-timer lamp will start to fl ash and a photo will be taken
after about 2 seconds. The camera focuses when the shutter
button is pressed halfway.
cCustom
Self-Timer Adjust self-timer settings, including the self-timer delay and
the number of shots taken when the timer expires (P. 80).
♦S
(sample
icon) Anti-Shock r
Reduce the slight blur caused by shutter motion (P. 80).
Available in single-frame, sequential low, and self-timer
modes.
79
EN
Shooting
2
♥S
(sample
icon) Silent s
Take pictures with the electronic shutter. Use for shutter
speeds faster than 1/8000 s or in settings where the sound of
the shutter would be unwelcome (P. 81). Available in single-
frame, sequential low, sequential high, and self-timer modes.
Frame advance rates of up to 60 fps are available when
sequential high is selected. In ♥T mode, focus, exposure,
and white balance are locked at the values for the fi rst shot
in each series. The fl ash sync speed is 1/50 s. At [K ISO]
settings over ISO 8000, the fl ash sync speed drops to 1/20 s
and the maximum frame advance rate to 30 fps.
pPro Capture
High
Capture starts when the shutter button is pressed halfway. The
camera starts recording pictures, including those captured while
the button was pressed halfway, when the button is pressed
all the way down (P. 81). In p mode, focus, exposure, and
white balance are locked at the values metered when the shutter
button is pressed halfway. At [K ISO] settings over ISO 8000,
the maximum frame advance rate drops to 30 fps.
qPro Capture
Low
hHigh Res Shot Take high-resolution photos (P. 83). Use [High Res Shot]
(P. 158) > [Shooting Method] in X Shooting Menu 2 to
choose a shooting method.
• To cancel the activated self-timer, press G.
• Fix the camera securely on a tripod for self-timer shooting.
• If you stand in front of the camera to press the shutter button when using the self-timer,
the picture may be out of focus.
• In S and q modes, the camera displays the view through the lens during shooting. In
T and p modes, it displays the shot immediately preceding the current frame.
• The speed of sequential shooting varies depending on the lens you are using and the
focus of the zoom lens.
• During sequential shooting, if the battery level icon blinks due to low battery, the camera
stops shooting and starts saving the pictures you have taken on the card. The camera
may not save all of the pictures depending on how much battery power remains.
• Some drive modes are not displayed by default. Use [j/Y Settings] (P. 187) in
G Custom Menu P to choose the modes displayed.
• Photographs taken in silent and pro-capture modes may be distorted if the subject or
camera moves quickly during shooting.
• To use the fl ash in [Silent s] mode (P. 81), select [Allow] for [Anti-Shock r/Silent s]
(P. 157) > [Silent s Mode Settings] > [Flash Mode] in X Shooting Menu 2.
• The frame advance rate may slow when [On1] or [On2] is selected for [Live View Boost].
Select [Off] to maintain a consistent frame rate. g G Custom Menu Q > [Live View
Boost] (P. 188)
80
EN
Shooting
2
Self-Timer Options (c Custom Self-timer)
Adjust self-timer settings, including the shutter release delay and the number of shots
taken when the timer expires.
1
Press the jY# button.
2
Highlight c (custom self-timer) by rotating the rear
dial and press the INFO button.
3
Highlight items using HI on the arrow pad and
use FG to choose an option. P
100
%
Y1s ×3 0.5s Off
h
q
ƆS
Sp
M
#0$12 3
Custom Self-timer
Settings o
Fill In
Number of Frames Choose the number of shots taken when the timer expires.
Y Timer Choose how long the camera waits to begin shooting after the
shutter button is pressed all the way down.
Interval Length If the number of shots is 2 or more, choose the interval between the
shots taken when the timer expires.
Every Frame AF If the number of shots is 2 or more, choose whether the camera
focuses before each shot.
Shooting without the vibration caused by shutter button operations
(Anti-Shock r)
Reduce the slight blur caused by shutter motion.
Use this option when even slight camera motion can cause blur, for example during
macro or telephoto photography.
You must fi rst enable display of this option by selecting [j/Y Settings] (P. 187) in
G Custom Menu P and placing a check (v) next to the appropriate item.
The delay between the shutter button being pressed all the way down and the start
of shooting can be selected using [Anti-Shock r/Silent s] > [Anti-Shock r] in
X Shooting Menu 2 (P. 157).
1
Press the jY# button.
2
Select one of the items marked ♦ using the rear dial and press the Q button.
3
Take pictures.
• When the set time has elapsed, the shutter is released and the picture is taken.
81
EN
Shooting
2
Shooting without shutter sound (Silent s)
In situations where the shutter sound is a problem, you can shoot without making a
sound. An electronic shutter is used to reduce the minuscule camera shake caused by
the motion of the mechanical shutter, much as is the case for anti-shock photography.
The delay between the shutter button being pressed all the way down and the shutter
being released can be selected using [Anti-Shock r/Silent s] > [Silent s] in
X Shooting Menu 2 (P. 157).
1
Press the jY# button.
2
Select one of the items marked ♥ using the rear dial and press the Q button.
3
Take pictures.
• When the shutter is released, the monitor screen will go dark for a moment. No
shutter sound will be emitted.
• The desired results may not be achieved under fl ickering light sources such as fl uorescent
or LED lamps or if the subject moves abruptly during shooting.
• The fastest available shutter speed is 1/32000 s.
Shooting without a release time lag (Pro Capture shooting)
Capture starts when the shutter button is pressed halfway; the moment the button
is pressed the rest of the way down, the camera will start saving the last n captured
pictures to the memory card, where n is a number selected before shooting begins. If
the button is held all the way down, shooting will continue until the selected number
of pictures is recorded. Use this option to capture moments you might otherwise miss
due to your subject’s reactions or shutter lag. Choose from [Pro Capture Low] and [Pro
Capture High].
Shutter button pressed
halfway
Shutter lag
Up to 35 frames Burst shooting
continues
Shutter button pressed all
the way down
Moment you
want
82
EN
Shooting
2
Pro Capture Low (q)
The camera shoots at up to 18 fps. A maximum of 35 frames can be captured before
the shutter button is pressed all the way down. If [C-AF], [C-AFb], [C-AF+TR], or
[C-AF+TRb] is selected for [K AF Mode] (P. 64), the camera will focus before
each shot. Choose this option if you anticipate that the distance to the subject will
change during shooting.
Pro Capture High (p)
The camera shoots at up to 60 fps. A maximum of 35 frames can be captured before
the shutter button is pressed all the way down. The camera will use [S-AF] when
[C-AF] or [C-AF+TR] is selected for [K AF Mode] (P. 64) and [S-AFb] when
[C-AFb] or [C-AF+TRb] is selected. Choose this option if the distance to the
subject is unlikely to change very much during shooting.
1
Press the jY# button.
2
Select p (Pro Capture High) or q (Pro Capture Low) using the rear dial
and press the Q button.
3
Take pictures.
• Capture starts when the shutter button is pressed
halfway. A capture icon ( ) will be displayed. If the
button is kept pressed halfway for over a minute,
capture will end and the Z icon will clear from the
display. Press the shutter button halfway again to
resume shooting.
• Press the shutter button all the way down to start saving
pictures to the memory card.
• Shooting will continue while the shutter button is
pressed all the way down, up to the number of shots
selected for [Frame Count Limiter].
Capture icon
ISO-A
200
1023
1:02:03
P
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
250 F5.6 0.0
30p
30p
4K
28
mm
T W
YFYF
100
%
• [Max fps], [Pre-shutter Frames], and [Frame Count Limiter] can be adjusted using the
[jL Settings] and [jH Settings] options (P. 220) in G Custom Menu N.
• Selecting q (Pro Capture Low) restricts aperture to values between maximum aperture
and f8.0.
• Pro Capture is not available while the camera is connected to a smartphone.
• Four Thirds and third-party Micro Four Thirds lenses cannot be used in q (Pro Capture
Low) mode.
• Flickering occurred by fl uorescent lights or the large movement of the subject, etc. may
cause distortions in images.
• During capture, the monitor will not go dark and the sound of the shutter will not be heard.
• The slowest shutter speed is limited.
• Depending on subject brightness and the options selected for [ISO] and exposure
compensation, the display frame rate may drop below that selected for [Frame Rate]
(P. 188) in G Custom Menu Q.
83
EN
Shooting
2
Shooting still pictures in a higher resolution (High Res Shot)
Shoot at resolutions higher than that of the image sensor. The camera takes a series
of shots while moving the image sensor and combines them to create a single high-
resolution photo. Use this option to capture details that normally would not be visible
even at high zoom ratios.
Use the [High Res Shot] option (P. 158) in X Shooting Menu 2 to choose time
between the shutter button being pressed all the way down and the shutter being
released, the time allocated for the fl ash to charge when a fl ash is used in High Res
Shot mode, and the shooting style (tripod-mounted or hand-held).
When High Res Shot is enabled, the image quality mode for High Res Shot can be
selected using [KK] (P. 100, 142).
1
Press the jY# button.
2
Select h using the rear dial.
• To choose between tripod and hand-held modes, press the INFO button and rotate
the front or rear dial.
3
Press the Q button.
• A h icon will be displayed. The icon will fl ash if the
camera is not steady. The icon stops fl ashing when the
camera is steady and ready to shoot.
• After enabling High Res Shot, check the option selected
for image quality. Image quality can be adjusted in the
LV super control panel.
ISO-A
200
1023
1:02:03
P
250 F5.6
IF
0.0
30p
30p
4K
hh
100
%
Camera readying for High
Res Shot (fl ashes)
4
Take pictures.
• The h will fl ash to warn that shots may be blurred by camera shake. Keep the
camera steady.
• Shooting is complete when the green h icon clears from the display.
• The camera will automatically create the composite image when shooting is
complete. A message will be displayed during this process.
• Choose from JPEG (AF, IF, or JF) and RAW+JPEG modes. When image quality
is set to RAW+JPEG, the camera saves a single RAW image (extension “.ORI”) before
combining it with the high resolution shooting. Pre-combination RAW images can be
played back using the latest version of Olympus Workspace.
• AF and AF+RAW are unavailable when [Handheld] is selected as the shooting method.
• [S-IS Off] is automatically selected for [K Image Stabilizer] (P. 97) when [Tripod] is
chosen for [Shooting Method], [S-IS AUTO] when [Handheld] is selected.
• The maximum wait time for [Shooting Method] > [Handheld] is 1 second.
• During RC fl ash photography, the maximum fl ash wait time is 4 seconds and the fl ash
control mode is fi xed at MANUAL.
• High Res Shot is available in modes P, S, A, and M.
84
EN
Shooting
2
• The following cannot be used:
interval-timer photography, multiple exposure, keystone compensation, bracketing,
fi sheye correction, and HDR.
• Pictures taken with [e-Portrait] or an art fi lter selected for picture mode will be recorded in
[Natural] mode.
• Image quality may drop under fl ickering light sources such as fl uorescent or LED lamps.
• If the camera is unable to record a composite image due to blur or other factors, only the
fi rst shot will be recorded. If [JPEG] is selected for image quality, the shot will be recorded
in JPEG format, while if [RAW+JPEG] is selected, the camera will record two copies, one
in RAW (.ORF) and the other in JPEG format.
Using a fl ash (Flash photography)
When using an optional fl ash unit designed for use with the camera, you can choose
the fl ash mode using camera controls and take pictures with the fl ash. See the
documentation provided with the fl ash unit for information on fl ash features and their
use.
Attaching Compatible Flash Units
The methods used to attach and operate external fl ash units vary with the unit. See
the documentation provided with the unit for details. The instructions here apply to the
FL-LM3.
• Confi rm that both the camera and fl ash unit are off. Attaching or removing a fl ash unit
while either the camera or fl ash unit is on could damage the equipment.
1
Remove the hot shoe cover and attach the fl ash.
• Slide the fl ash in until the foot clicks into place at the
back of the shoe.
Hot shoe cover
2
Position the fl ash head for bounce-fl ash
photography or direct lighting.
• The fl ash head can be rotated up and left or right.
• Note that fl ash output may be insuffi cient for correct
exposure when bounce fl ash lighting is used.
85
EN
Shooting
2
3
Rotate the fl ash ON/OFF lever to the ON position.
• Rotate the lever to the OFF position when the fl ash is
not in use.
ON/OFF lever
Removing Flash Units
1
Keeping the UNLOCK button pressed, slide the
fl ash unit from the hot shoe.
2
1
UNLOCK button
86
EN
Shooting
2
Choosing a Flash Mode (Flash Mode)
When taking pictures with a fl ash unit designed for use with the camera, you can select
a fl ash mode using camera controls. Turning an attached fl ash unit on automatically
limits the fastest available shutter speed.
1
Press the jY# button.
2
Rotate the front dial to select an option.
• In manual fl ash mode, you can adjust fl ash output by
pressing the INFO button and rotating the front dial.
• Manual fl ash output cannot be adjusted if the fl ash
mode can be selected using the controls on the fl ash
unit.
3
Press the shutter button halfway to exit to the
shooting display.
Flash mode
P
100
%M
#0$12 3
oo
o
TƆTp
Ɔ
o
ƆS
S
Single
Fill In
Flash Modes
#Fill In
Enable the fl ash.
• Shutter speed can be set to values between that selected
for [#Slow Limit] (P. 236) and [#X-Sync.] (P. 236) in
G Custom Menu W.
$Flash Off Disable the fl ash.
• The fl ash will not fi re even if the unit is on.
0Redeye Reduce “red-eye” in portrait photos. In other respects, the fl ash
functions as it does in # (fi ll in) mode.
2Slow
(slow front-
curtain sync)
Slow shutter speeds are used to capture both the main subject
and the background.
• Shutter speed is set according to the exposure value metered
by the camera and is not restricted by the option selected for
[#Slow Limit].
1Red-Eye
Slow 2 (slow sync) combined with red-eye reduction. The fl ash is
timed using front-curtain sync.
MSlow2
(slow rear-
curtain sync)
As for 2 (slow sync).
• The fl ash fi res immediately before the shutter
closes. Moving objects appear to leave trails
of light behind them.
3, 4,
etc. Manual Value The fl ash fi res at the selected level.
• Super FP high-speed sync must be confi gured using fl ash controls.
• In [0] (red-eye reduction) mode, the shutter will be released approximately one second
after the initial red-eye reduction pre-fl ash. Do not move the camera until shooting is
complete.
• [0] (red-eye reduction) may not produce the desired results in some conditions.
87
EN
Shooting
2
Flash Mode and Shutter Speed
The range of shutter speeds available varies with the fl ash mode. The range of
available speeds can be further restricted using the options in the G custom menu.
g G Custom Menu W > [#X-Sync.] (P. 236), [#Slow Limit] (P. 236)
Exposure
mode LV super
control panel Flash mode Flash timing Shutter speed
P/A
#Fill fl ash Front-curtain sync 30 – 1/250 s
0Red-eye
$Flash off — —
1Red-eye slow Front-curtain sync 60 – 1/250 s
2Slow
M
Slow Rear-curtain sync
3, 4, etc. Manual value Front-curtain sync 30 – 1/250 s
S/M
#Fill fl ash Front-curtain sync 60 – 1/250 s
0Red-eye
$Flash off — —
MSlow Rear-curtain sync 60 – 1/250 s
3, 4, etc. Manual value Front-curtain sync 60 – 1/250 s
B *
#Fill fl ash Front-curtain sync —
0Red-eye
$Flash off — —
MSlow Rear-curtain sync —
3, 4, etc. Manual value Front-curtain sync —
* Rear-curtain sync is not available when [LIVE COMP] is selected (P. 54).
• The fastest shutter speed available when the fl ash fi res is 1/250 s. Bright backgrounds in
pictures taken with the fl ash may be overexposed.
• The fl ash sync speed for silent modes (P. 81), High Res Shot (P. 83), and focus
bracketing (P. 148) is 1/50 s. Setting [K ISO] to a value over ISO 8000 when using an
option that requires the electronic shutter (for example, silent mode or focus bracketing)
sets the fl ash sync speed to 1/20 s. The fl ash sync speed is also set to 1/20 s during ISO
bracketing (P. 147).
• Even the minimum available fl ash output may be too bright at short range. To prevent
overexposure in pictures taken at short range, select mode A or M and choose a smaller
aperture (higher f-number) or choose a lower setting for [K ISO].
88
EN
Shooting
2
The Super Control/LV Super Control Panel
The super control/LV super control panel lists shooting settings and their current
values. Use the LV super control panel when framing shots in the monitor (“live view”),
the super control panel when framing shots in the viewfi nder.
• Pressing the u (LV) button during live view enables viewfi nder photography and
displays the LV super control panel in the monitor.
ISO-A
200
1023
1:02:03
P
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
250 F5.6 0.0
30p
30p
4K
YFYF
100
%
u
(LV button)
sRGB
Natural
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
M-IS
±
0
A
±
0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
2020.02.15 12:30:00
P
250
1023
1:02:03
F5.6
100
%
p
#
±
0.0
#
S-IS Auto
o
30p
30p
4K
0.0
Y
F
Y
F
S
-
AF
Off
Live view photography Viewfi nder photography (monitor
turns off while viewfi nder is on)
LV Super Control Panel (Live View Photography)
To display the LV super control panel in the monitor, press the Q button during live
view.
ISO-A
200
1023
1:02:03
P
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
250 F5.6 0.0
30p
30p
4K
YFYF
100
%
Q
sRGB
Natural
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
M-IS
±
0
A
±
0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
P
250
1023
1:02:03
F5.6
p
#
±
0.0
#
o
S-IS Auto
30p
30p
4K
Y
F
Y
F
S
-
AF
100
%
Off
KRecommended ISO
Super Control Panel (Viewfi nder Photography)
When you frame subjects in the viewfi nder, the super LV control panel will be displayed
in the monitor at all times. Press the Q button to activate the cursor.
sRGB
Natural
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
M-IS
±
0
A
±
0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
2020.02.15 12:30:00
P
250
1023
1:02:03
F5.6
100
%
p
#
±
0.0
#
S-IS Auto
o
30p
30p
4K
0.0
Y
F
Y
F
S
-
AF
Off
Q
sRGB
Natural
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
M-IS
±
0
A
±
0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
KRecommended ISO
P
250
1023
1:02:03
F5.6
100
%
p
#
±
0.0
#
S-IS Auto
o
30p
30p
4K
Y
F
Y
F
S
-
AF
Off
89
EN
Shooting
2
Using the Super Control/LV Super Control Panel
1
Press the Q button.
• If you press the button during live view, the LV super
control panel will be displayed in the monitor.
• The last setting used will be highlighted.
Cursor
sRGB
Natural
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
M-IS
±
0
A
±
0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
P
250
1023
1:02:03
F5.6
p
#
±
0.0
#
o
S-IS Auto
30p
30p
4K
Y
F
Y
F
S
-
AF
100
%
Off
KRecommended ISO
2
Highlight an item using FGHI
on the arrow pad or by rotating the
rear dial.
• The selected setting will be
highlighted.
• You can also highlight items by
tapping them in the display.
sRGB
Natural
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
M-IS
±
0
A
±
0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
P
250
1023
1:02:03
F5.6
p
#
±
0.0
#
o
S-IS Auto
30p
30p
4K
Y
F
Y
F
S
-
AF
100
%
Off
KAF Mode
3
Rotate the front dial to change the
highlighted setting.
sRGB
Natural
PreMF
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
M-IS
±
0
A
±
0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
P
250
1023
1:02:03
F5.6
p
#
±
0.0
#
o
S-IS Auto
30p
30p
4K
Y
F
Y
F
100
%
Off
KAF Mode
4
Press the shutter button halfway to accept current settings and exit the LV
super control panel.
• If you are using the super control panel, the cursor will vanish and setting will end.
Additional Options
Pressing the Q button in Step 2 displays options for the highlighted
setting. In some cases, additional options can be viewed by pressing
the INFO button.
Q button
INFO button
sRGB
Natural
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
M-IS
±
0
A
±
0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
P
250
1023
1:02:03
F5.6
p
#
±
0.0
#
o
S-IS Auto
30p
30p
4K
Y
F
Y
F
S
-
AF
100
%
Off
KImage Stabilizer Q
P
S-IS OFF S-IS AUTO
9mm
100
%
S-ISS-IS
1
S-ISS-IS
2
S-ISS-IS
3
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
Focal Length o
Auto I.S.
INFO
P
S-IS OFF S-IS AUTO
100
%
S-ISS-IS
1
S-ISS-IS
2
S-ISS-IS
3
mm.000 09
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
Auto I.S.
[K Image Stabilizer]
• Touch controls can be used in place of the Q button. Lightly tap the desired setting twice
to display options.
90
EN
Shooting
2
Settings Available in the Super Control/LV Super Control Panel
LV super control panel Super control panel
sRGB
Natural
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
M-IS
S-IS Auto
±
0
A
±
0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
P
250
1023
1:02:03
F5.6
Y
F
p
o
Y
F
#
±
0.0
#
30p
30p
4K
S
-
AF
100
%
Off
KRecommended ISO
1
2
4
5
8
7
6
e
f
g
h
i
j
cd
3
0ba9
sRGB
Natural
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
M-IS
±
0
A
±
0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
KRecommended ISO
P
250
1023
1:02:03
F5.6
100
%
p
#
±
0.0
#
S-IS Auto
o
30p
30p
4K
Y
F
Y
F
S
-
AF
Off
1 Currently selected option
2 ISO sensitivity .................................P. 75
3 AF mode .........................................P. 64
AF target .........................................P. 69
4 Flash mode .....................................P. 86
5 Flash intensity control ...................P. 105
Manual fl ash output ........................P. 86
6 K Image stabilizer ........................P. 97
7 n Image stabilizer .........................P. 97
8 K Storage options ........................P. 99
9 Drive mode (sequential shooting/
self-timer) ........................................P. 78
0 K Image quality ..........................P. 100
a Metering mode ................................P. 77
b I Face priority ...............................P. 92
c n Image quality ...........................P. 101
d Aspect ratio .....................................P. 98
e White balance .................................P. 94
White balance compensation..........P. 96
Color temperature *1 ........................ P. 94
f Picture mode.................................P. 106
g N Sharpness................................P. 110
u Contrast ...................................P. 110
t Saturation ................................P. 110
z Gradation.................................P. 111
x Color fi lter ................................P. 112
y Monochrome color ...................P. 113
3 Effect ........................................P. 113
R Color *2 ..................................... P. 109
c Color/Vivid *3 .............................P. 108
Effect *4 ..........................................P. 109
h Color space...................................P. 114
i Highlight & shadow control ...........P. 115
j Button function assignment ..........P. 116
*1 Displayed when CWB (custom white balance) is selected for white balance.
*2 Displayed when Partial Color is set.
*3 Displayed when Color Creator is set.
*4 Displayed when an art fi lter is selected.
91
EN
Shooting
2
Changing ISO sensitivity (ISO)
You can set the ISO sensitivity. g “Changing ISO sensitivity (ISO)” (P. 75)
• Separate options can be selected for still photography and movie mode.
1
Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.
2
Use FGHI to select [ISO].
3
Use the front dial to select an option.
ISO
sRGB
Natural
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
M-IS
±
0
A
±
0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
P
250
1023
1:02:03
F5.6
p
#
±
0.0
#
o
S-IS Auto
30p
30p
4K
Y
F
Y
F
S
-
AF
100
%
Off
KRecommended ISO
Choosing a focus mode (AF Mode)
You can select a focusing method (focus mode). g “Choosing a focus mode (AF
Mode)” (P. 64)
• Separate options can be selected for still photography and movie mode.
1
Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.
2
Use FGHI to select [AF Mode].
3
Use the front dial to select an option.
AF Mode
sRGB
Natural
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
M-IS
±
0
A
±
0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
P
250
1023
1:02:03
F5.6
p
#
±
0.0
#
o
S-IS Auto
30p
30p
4K
Y
F
Y
F
S
-
AF
100
%
Off
KAF Mode
Positioning and Sizing the AF Target (AF Area)
Choose an AF target. g “Choosing an AF Target Mode (AF Target Mode)” (P. 69),
“Choosing a Focus Target (AF Target Point)” (P. 72)
1
Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.
2
Highlight [AF Area] using FGHI on the arrow
pad and press the Q button.
• AF-target selection options will be displayed.
3
Use the front or rear dial to choose an AF-target
mode and FGHI to position the AF target.
AF Area
sRGB
Natural
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
M-IS
±
0
A
±
0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
P
250
1023
1:02:03
F5.6
p
#
±
0.0
#
o
S-IS Auto
30p
30p
4K
Y
F
Y
F
S
-
AF
100
%
Off
AF Area
92
EN
Shooting
2
Choosing how the camera measures brightness (Metering)
You can choose how the camera meters subject brightness. g “Choosing how the
camera measures brightness (Metering)” (P. 77)
1
Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.
2
Use FGHI to select [Metering].
3
Use the front dial to select an option.
sRGB
Natural
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
M-IS
±
0
A
±
0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
P
250
1023
1:02:03
F5.6
p
#
±
0.0
#
o
S-IS Auto
30p
30p
4K
Y
F
Y
F
S
-
AF
100
%
Off
Metering
Metering
Face priority AF/Eye priority AF (I Face Priority)
The camera automatically detects and focuses on the faces or eyes of portrait
subjects. When digital ESP metering is used, exposure will be weighted according to
the value metered for the face.
1
Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.
2
Use FGHI to select [I Face Priority].
sRGB
Natural
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
M-IS
±
0
A
±
0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
P
250
1023
1:02:03
F5.6
p
#
±
0.0
#
o
S-IS Auto
30p
30p
4K
Y
F
Y
F
S
-
AF
100
%
Off
Face Priority
I Face priority
3
Use the front dial to select an option.
IFace Priority On The camera detects and focuses on faces.
NFace Priority Off
Face priority AF off.
KFace & Eye Priority On The camera detects faces and focuses on the eye
closest to the camera.
MFace & L. Eye Priority On The camera detects faces and focuses on the left eye.
LFace & R. Eye Priority On The camera detects faces and focuses on the right eye.
93
EN
Shooting
2
4
Point the camera at your subject.
• Faces detected by the camera are indicated by white
frames. The face chosen for focus is indicated by
brackets at the corners of the frame. If eye-priority AF is
enabled, a white frame will appear over one or the other
of the selected subject’s eyes.
• If multiple faces are detected, the face used for focus
can be selected via the control to which [I Face
Selection] (P. 122) has been assigned using [Button
Function] (P. 116). Pressing this control selects the
face nearest the AF target. To choose a different face,
hold the control and rotate the front or rear dial. Release
the control when the desired subject is selected.
ISO-A
200
1023
1:02:03
P
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
250 F5.6 0.0
30p
30p
4K
YFYF
100
%
The face chosen for focus
is indicated by white double
brackets.
• The face used for focus can also be selected via touch controls (P. 43).
5
Press the shutter button halfway to focus.
• The area of the subject used for focus is indicated by a
green border.
• If the camera detects the subject’s eyes, it will focus on
an eye.
• Face and eye priority are also available in [MF]
(P. 64). Faces and eyes detected by the camera
are indicated by white frames. Exposure will be set
according to the value metered for the center of the
face.
ISO-A
200
1023
1:02:03
P
28
mm
T W
100
%
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
250 F5.6
ISO-A
200
1023
1:02:03
P
28
mm
T W
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
250 F5.6 0.0
30p
30p
4K
YFYF
6
Press the shutter button the rest of the way down to shoot.
• Depending on the subject and the art fi lter setting, the camera may not be able to correctly
detect the face.
• We recommend selecting [Face Priority Off] when photographing non-portrait subjects
using [C-AF] or [C-AFb] in still photography mode.
• When set to [p] (Digital ESP metering) (P. 77), metering is performed with priority
given to faces.
• If the zoom frame is displayed, the camera will focus on the subject in the zoom frame.
• Even when faces or eyes are detected, you can opt to focus on a target chosen using AF-
target selection rather than on the face or eye selected by the camera. g G Custom
Menu J > [K AEL/AFL] > [Face Priority AF] (P. 201)
• [Face & Eye Priority On], [Face & L. Eye Priority On], and [Face & R. Eye Priority On] are
not available in movie mode.
• Face/eye priority is unavailable if [N Spot Metering] (P. 193) is selected during C
(spot) metering (P. 77) in single-target AF-target mode (P. 69).
%
• Using [Button Function] (P. 116), you can assign [I Face Priority] (P. 122) to a camera
control that you can then press to disable or enable face detection. You can also change
[I Face Priority] settings by holding the button and rotating the front or rear dial.
94
EN
Shooting
2
Adjusting color (WB (white balance))
White balance (WB) ensures that white objects in images recorded by the camera
appear white. [AUTO] is suitable in most circumstances, but other values can be
selected according to the light source when [AUTO] fails to produce the desired results
or you wish to introduce a deliberate color cast into your images.
• Separate options can be selected for still photography and movie mode.
1
Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.
2
Use FGHI to select [WB].
WB
sRGB
Natural
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
M-IS
±
0
A
±
0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
P
250
1023
1:02:03
F5.6
p
#
±
0.0
#
o
S-IS Auto
30p
30p
4K
Y
F
Y
F
S
-
AF
100
%
Off
KWB
3
Use the front dial to select an option.
• One-touch white balance and custom white balance options can be viewed by
pressing the Q button followed by the INFO button.
WB mode Color
temperature Light conditions
Auto white
balance AUTO —
Most normal scenes (scenes containing
objects that are white or close to white)
• This mode is recommended in most
situations.
• You can choose the white balance used
under incandescent lighting (P. 96).
Preset white
balance
55300 K Sunlit outdoor scenes, sunsets, fi reworks
N7500 K Daylight shots of subjects in the shade
O6000 K Shots taken in daylight under overcast skies
13000 K Subjects under incandescent lighting
>4000 K Subjects under fl uorescent lighting
U— Underwater photography
n5500 K Light sources with the same color
temperature as fl ash lighting
One-touch white
balance P/Q/
W/X
Color temperature
set by one-touch
WB
Situations in which you want to set white
balance for a specifi c subject
• Color temperature is set to a value
metered from a white object under the
lighting what will be used in the fi nal
photograph (P. 95).
Custom white
balance CWB 2000 K – 14000 K Situations in which you can identify the
appropriate color temperature
• Choose a color temperature.
95
EN
Shooting
2
One-touch white balance
Measure white balance by framing a piece of paper or other white object under
the lighting that will be used in the fi nal photograph. Use this option to fi ne-tune
white balance when you fi nd it hard to obtain the desired results with white balance
compensation or preset white balance options such as 5 (sunlight) or O (overcast).
The camera stores the metered value for quick recall as required.
1
After selecting [P], [Q], [W], or [X] (one-touch white balance 1, 2, 3, or
4), press the Q button followed by the INFO button.
2
Photograph a piece of colorless (white or gray) paper.
• Frame the piece of paper so that it fi lls the display. Ensure that it is free of shadows.
• In still photography mode, press the INFO button and then the shutter button.
• In movie mode, press the INFO button to release the shutter.
• The one-touch white balance screen appears.
3
Select [Yes] and press the Q button.
• The new value is saved as a preset white balance option.
• The new value is stored until one-touch white balance is measured again. Turning the
power off does not erase the data.
Metering White Balance with the One-Touch White Balance Button (Y)
Assigning [k] to a button allows the control to be used to measure white balance. By
default, the Y button can be used to measure white balance during still photography.
To measure white balance during movie recording, you must fi rst assign one-touch
white balance to a control using [n Button Function] (P. 116).
1
Frame a piece of colorless (white or gray) paper in the center of the display.
• Frame the piece of paper so that it fi lls the display. Ensure that it is free of shadows.
2
Hold the one-touch WB button and press
the shutter button all the way down.
• When recording movies, press the one-
touch white balance button to proceed to
Step 3.
• You will be prompted to choose the one-
touch white balance option that will be
used to store the new value.
+
One-touch white balance button (Y)
3
Highlight a one-touch white balance setting using
FG on the arrow pad and press the Q button.
• The new value will be saved as the value for the
selected setting and the camera will exit to the shooting
display.
100
%
12000K
Y
X
4
3
One Touch WB
SetCancel
96
EN
Shooting
2
W Keep Warm Color
Choose how the camera adjusts white balance for pictures taken using auto white
balance under incandescent lighting.
1
After selecting [AUTO], press the INFO button.
• [W Keep Warm Color] options will be displayed.
2
Highlight an option using FGHI on the arrow pad and press the Q
button.
Off The camera suppresses the warm tones produced by incandescent lighting.
On The camera preserves the warm tones produced by incandescent lighting.
Making fi ne adjustments to white balance (WB Compensation)
Fine-tune white balance. Separate values can be selected for each white balance
option. Adjust settings as described below.
A A (amber–blue) axis Positive values add a red cast, negative values a blue cast.
G G (green–magenta) axis Positive values add a green cast, negative values a magenta
cast.
1
Press the Q button to display the LV super control panel.
2
Highlight [A±0] or [G±0] using the arrow pad and
highlight the desired value using the front dial.
• The effect can be previewed by pressing the Q button.
White balance compensation
sRGB
Natural
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
M-IS
±
0
A
±
0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
P
250
1023
1:02:03
F5.6
p
#
±
0.0
#
o
S-IS Auto
30p
30p
4K
Y
F
Y
F
S
-
AF
100
%
Off
KAuto x
• White balance compensation can be applied to all white balance modes simultaneously.
g G Custom Menu X > [K All x] (P. 194), n Video Menu > [n Specifi cation
Settings] > [n All x] (P. 161)
%
• Changes to white balance can be previewed in live view. During still photography, the
effect can be previewed in a photograph. Press the R (movie) button in the white balance
compensation display to view an image captured at current settings.
97
EN
Shooting
2
Reducing camera shake (Image Stabilizer)
You can reduce the amount of camera shake that can occur when shooting in low light
situations or shooting with high magnifi cation.
1
Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.
2
Use FGHI to select the image stabilizer.
K Image Stabilizer
sRGB
Natural
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
M-IS
±
0
A
±
0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
P
250
1023
1:02:03
F5.6
p
#
±
0.0
#
o
S-IS Auto
30p
30p
4K
Y
F
Y
F
S
-
AF
100
%
Off
KImage Stabilizer
n Image Stabilizer
3
Use the front dial to select an option.
Still
picture
(S-IS)
S-IS Off Still-I.S. Off Image stabilization disabled. Select this option when
using a tripod.
S-IS
AUTO Auto I.S.
Image stabilization applies to motion on all axes.
If panning motion is detected, the camera will
automatically suspend image stabilization on that
axis.
S-IS1All Direction
Shake I.S. Image stabilization applies to motion on all axes.
S-IS2Vertical Shake
I.S. Image stabilization applies to vertical motion. Use
when panning the camera horizontally.
S-IS3Horizontal
Shake I.S. Image stabilization applies to horizontal motion. Use
when panning the camera vertically.
Movie
(M-IS)
M-IS Off Movie-I.S. Off Image stabilizer is off.
M-IS1All Direction
Shake I.S. Electronic image stabilization combined with VCM-
controlled image sensor movement.
M-IS2All Direction
Shake I.S. VCM-controlled image sensor movement only.
• Image stabilization may be unable to compensate for excessive camera motion or very
slow shutter speeds. Use a tripod in these cases.
• You may notice noise or vibration while image stabilization is in effect.
• The setting selected with the lens image stabilization switch, if any, takes priority over that
selected with the camera.
• [S-IS AUTO] functions as [S-IS1] when [On] is selected for [Lens I.S. Priority].
%
• You can choose whether image stabilization will be performed while the shutter button is
pressed halfway. g G Custom Menu O > [Half Way Rls With IS] (P. 186)
• You can prioritize lens image stabilization. g G Custom Menu O > [Lens I.S. Priority]
(P. 186)
98
EN
Shooting
2
Using lenses other than Micro Four Thirds/Four Thirds System lenses
When using lenses other than Micro Four Thirds or Four Thirds system lenses, you will need
to specify the lens focal length.
• Set [Image Stabilizer], press the Q button, press the INFO button, then use FGHI to
select a focal length, and press the Q button.
• Choose a focal length between 0.1 mm and 1000.0 mm.
• Choose the value that matches the one printed on the lens.
• The selected value is not reset when you select [Reset / Custom Modes] (P. 141) >
[Reset] (basic) in W Shooting Menu 1.
Performing the sequential/self-timer shooting
You can take a series of pictures by keeping the shutter button pressed all the way
down. Alternatively, you can take pictures using the self-timer. Other options, including
anti-shock and silent modes, are also available. g “Performing the sequential/self-
timer shooting” (P. 78 – 83)
1
Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.
2
Use FGHI to select the sequential shooting/
self-timer.
3
Use the front dial to select an option.
sRGB
Natural
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
M-IS
±
0
A
±
0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
P
250
1023
1:02:03
F5.6
p
#
±
0.0
#
o
S-IS Auto
30p
30p
4K
Y
F
Y
F
S
-
AF
100
%
Off
Single
Sequential shooting/
self-timer
Setting the image aspect
Choose the ratio of width to height for pictures according to your intent or your goals
for printing or the like. In addition to the standard aspect (width-to-height) ratio of [4:3],
the camera offers settings of [16:9], [3:2], [1:1], and [3:4].
1
Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.
2
Use FGHI to select [Aspect].
3
Use the front dial to select an option.
sRGB
Natural
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
M-IS
±
0
A
±
0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
P
250
1023
1:02:03
F5.6
p
#
±
0.0
#
o
S-IS Auto
30p
30p
4K
Y
F
Y
F
S
-
AF
100
%
Off
Aspect
Aspect
• Image aspect can only be set for still images.
• JPEG images are recorded at the selected aspect ratio. RAW images are the same size
as the image sensor and are recorded at an aspect ratio of 4:3 with a tag indicating the
aspect ratio selected. A crop indicating the selected aspect ratio is displayed when images
are played back.
99
EN
Shooting
2
Setting the saving method for shooting data (K Save Settings)
Choose how the camera stores pictures when two memory cards are inserted.
1
Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.
2
Use FGHI to select [K Save Settings].
sRGB
Natural
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
M-IS
±
0
A
±
0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
P
250
1023
1:02:03
F5.6
p
#
±
0.0
#
o
S-IS Auto
30p
30p
4K
Y
F
Y
F
S
-
AF
100
%
Off
KSave Settings
K Save Settings
3
Use the front dial to select an option.
yStandard Pictures are recorded to the memory card in the slot selected for
[K Save Slot] (P. 237). Shooting ends when the card is full.
zAuto Switch
Pictures are recorded to the memory card in the slot selected
for [K Save Slot] (P. 237). Pictures will be recorded to the
remaining card when the card in the selected slot fi lls. This
setting automatically reverts to [Standard] when only one
memory card is inserted.
1Dual
Independent 1
Each picture is recorded twice, once in each of two different
image quality formats. Choose an image quality for each slot
(P. 100). Shooting ends when either card is full. Image quality is
set separately for each slot; after changing the option selected,
check the current image quality setting.
2Dual
Independent 3
Each picture is recorded twice, once in each of two different
image quality formats. Choose an image quality for each slot
(P. 100). Recording continues to the card in the remaining slot
when either card fi lls. Image quality is set separately for each
slot; after changing the option selected, check the current image
quality setting.
3Dual Same 1
Each picture is recorded twice, once to each card, using the
option currently selected for image quality. Shooting ends when
either card is full. This setting automatically reverts to [Standard]
when only one memory card is inserted.
4Dual Same 3
Each picture is recorded twice, once to each card, using the
option currently selected for image quality. Recording continues
to the card in the remaining slot when either card fi lls. This
setting automatically reverts to [Standard] when only one
memory card is inserted.
• If you press the Q button, you can specify the card to record the shooting data to with
[Card Slot Settings] of G Custom Menu Y (P. 237).
• The image quality mode may change if you change the option selected for [K Save
Settings] or replace a memory card with one that can contain a different amount of
additional photographs. Check the image quality mode before taking photographs.
100
EN
Shooting
2
Photo File and Image Size Options (KK)
You can set an image quality mode for still images. Select a quality suitable for the
application (such as for processing on PC, use on website etc.).
1
Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.
2
Use FGHI to select [KK].
• When [Dual Independent 1] or [Dual Independent 3]
is selected for [K Save Settings], a different setting
can be used for each slot (P. 99).
sRGB
Natural
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
M-IS
±
0
A
±
0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
KK
P
250
1023
1:02:03
F5.6
p
#
±
0.0
#
o
S-IS Auto
30p
30p
4K
Y
F
Y
F
S
-
AF
100
%
Off
KK
3
Use the front dial to select an option.
• Choose from the following options. The image size/compression combinations
available can be selected in the menus. g G Custom Menu X > [K Set]
(P. 236)
Option Image size Compression ratio File format
YSF 5184 × 3888 SuperFine (1/2.7) JPG
YF5184 × 3888 Fine (1/4) JPG
YN5184 × 3888 Normal (1/8) JPG
XN3200 × 2400 Normal (1/8) JPG
RAW 5184 × 3888 Lossless compression ORF
RAW+JPEG RAW plus the JPEG option selected above
• When [Standard], [Dual Same 1], or [Dual Same 3], or [Auto Switch] is selected
for [Card Slot Settings] > [K Save Settings] (P. 237) in G Custom Menu Y, the
selected option applies to the cards in both slots 5 and 4.
• During the high resolution shooting (P. 83), you can select between AF, IF,
JF, AF+RAW, IF+RAW, and JF+RAW.
• AF and AF+RAW are unavailable when [Handheld] is selected for High Res Shot.
• Selecting High Res Shot changes the image quality option selected; be sure to check
the image quality setting before shooting.
$
• RAW fi les store raw image data in an unprocessed state. Choose this format (extension
“.ORF”) for pictures that will later be enhanced.
- Cannot be viewed on other cameras
- Can be viewed on computers using Olympus Workspace Digital Photo Managing
software
- Can be saved in JPEG format using the [RAW Data Edit] (P. 170) retouch option in
the camera menus
101
EN
Shooting
2
Frame Size, Rate, and Compression (nK)
Choose the image quality options available for movie recording.
When choosing an option, consider how the movie will be used: for example, are you
planning to process it on a computer, or is it intended for upload to a website? The
camera can store multiple combinations of frame size, rate, and compression from
which you can select according to your goals. Slow- and fast-motion and high-speed
movie options are also available. g “Filming Slow- or Fast-Motion Movies (Slow- and
Fast-Motion Movies)” (P. 104) and “Filming High-Speed Movies” (P. 103)
1
Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.
2
Use FGHI to select [nK].
sRGB
Natural
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
M-IS
±
0
A
±
0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
250 F5.6
p
#
±
0.0
#
n1:02:03
o
S-IS Auto
30p
30p
4K
123
min
C
-
AF
Y
F
Y
F
Off
nK
nK
3
Use the front dial to select an option.
• To change movie record mode settings, press Q followed by the INFO button and
rotate the rear dial.
102
EN
Shooting
2
The Movie Quality Icon
Changes to settings are refl ected in the [nK] icon as shown below.
Frame size
FHD Full HD *11920 × 1080
HD HD *11280 × 720
4K 4K *13840 × 2160
C4K 4K Digital Cinema *14096 × 2160
Compression/bit rate
A-I All Intra *2• Not available when [4K] or
[C4K] is selected for [Movie
Resolution].
SF Super Fine
FFine
NNormal
Frame rate
60p 60p: 59.94 fps • [60p] and [50p] are not
available when:
- [FHD] is selected for
[Movie Resolution] and
[A-I] is selected for bit
rate
- [4K] or [C4K] is selected
for [Movie Resolution]
• Selecting [C4K] for [Movie
Resolution] fi xes [Frame Rate]
at [24p].
50p 50p: 50.00 fps
30p 30p: 29.97 fps
25p 25p: 25.00 fps
24p 24p: 23.98 fps
24p: 24.00 fps (C4K)
Movie type
nSetting 1, 2, 3, or 4:
Save up to four combinations of frame size, rate, and
compression for later use.
Custom:
Choose frame sizes of 4K or 4K Digital Cinema. You can
also shoot fast- or slow-motion movies (P. 104).
—High-speed movie g “Filming High-Speed Movies”
(P. 103)
*1 Movies are saved in MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 format. Individual movie fi les can be up to 4 GB
in size. Continuous shots can be no more than 29 minutes in length.
*2 “All-Intra” movies use no inter-frame compression. This suits them to editing but increases
fi le size.
• Depending on the card used, recording may end before the maximum length is reached.
• Bit-rate selection may be unavailable at some settings.
• Movies are recorded at an aspect ratio of 16:9. C4K movies are recorded at an aspect
ratio of 17:9.
103
EN
Shooting
2
Filming High-Speed Movies
Film at high frame rates. Movies are fi lmed at 120 fps and play back at 60 fps.
Stretching playback to double the recording time (as is the case when 60p is selected
as the playback frame rate) lets you view in slow motion movements that in real life
took only the blink of an eye.
A high-speed movie option can be included in the movie image quality menu. Your
choice of playback frame rate determines the playback speed multiplier.
Changes to settings are refl ected in the movie quality icon as shown.
Frame size
FHD Full HD (1920 × 1080)
Movie type
HS High speed (120 fps)
Playback frame rate
60p 60p: 59.94 fps; plays back at 0.5× speed
50p 50p: 50.00 fps; plays back at 0.42× speed
30p 30p: 29.97 fps; plays back at 0.25× speed
25p 25p: 25.00 fps; plays back at 0.21× speed
24p 24p: 23.98 fps; plays back at 0.2× speed
1
Select (high-speed movie recording).
• To use current settings, press the Q button. The camera will exit the menu with the
current options selected.
2
To edit current settings, press the INFO button in Step 1.
• This places the cursor in the list of high-speed movie options.
3
Choose the playback frame rate.
• Use FG on the arrow pad to highlight the desired playback frame rate.
4
Press the Q button to select the highlighted option and exit.
• Focus, exposure, and white balance lock during recording.
• Sound is not recorded.
• The picture angle is slightly reduced.
• Aperture, shutter speed, exposure compensation, and ISO sensitivity cannot be changed
during recording.
• Time codes cannot be recorded or displayed.
• Brightness may change if zoom is adjusted during recording.
• Individual movies can be up to 4 GB in size.
• High-speed movie recording is not available while the camera is connected to an HDMI
device.
• [n Image Stabilizer] > [M-IS1] is not available.
• [Movie H] cannot be used.
• [i-Enhance], [e-Portrait], and art fi lter picture modes are not available.
• [Gradation] is fi xed at [Gradation Normal].
• High-speed movie recording is not available during remote photography when the camera
is connected to a smartphone.
104
EN
Shooting
2
Filming Slow- or Fast-Motion Movies
(Slow- and Fast-Motion Movies)
You can create slow motion or fast-motion movies. You can set the recording speed
using in record mode.
1
Press the Q button to display the LV super control panel.
2
Use FGHI to select [nK].
3
Use the front dial to select
24
C4K (custom record
mode) (P. 102), then press the Q button.
• The option selected for [Slow or Fast Motion] can
be changed by pressing the INFO button. After
highlighting [Slow or Fast Motion] using HI, use FG
to choose a speed multiplier and then press the Q
button. Choose high multipliers for fast-motion movies,
low multipliers for slow-motion movies. The frame rate
changes accordingly.
sRGB
Natural
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
M-IS
±
0
A
±
0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
250 F5.6
p
#
±
0.0
#
n1:02:03
o
S-IS Auto
123
min
C
-
AF
Y
F
Y
F
Off
nK
24p
24p
C4K
4
Press the R button to start shooting.
• Press the R button again to end shooting.
• The movie will be played back at a fi xed speed so that it appears to be in slow motion
or fast-motion.
• Sound will not be recorded.
• Any picture mode art fi lters will be canceled.
• Either or both of slow motion and fast-motion cannot be set for some options of [nK].
• Shutter speed is limited to values no slower than 1/24 s. The slowest speed available
varies with the option selected for [Frame Rate].
105
EN
Shooting
2
Choosing a Flash Mode (Flash Mode)
When taking pictures with a fl ash unit designed for use with the camera, you can select
a fl ash mode using camera controls. g “Choosing a Flash Mode (Flash Mode)”
(P. 86)
1
Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.
2
Use FGHI to select [Flash Mode].
3
Use the front dial to select an option.
• Flash settings can be accessed via the LV super control
panel.
sRGB
Natural
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
M-IS
±
0
A
±
0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
P
250
1023
1:02:03
F5.6
p
o
S-IS Auto
30p
30p
4K
Y
F
Y
F
S
-
AF
#
#
±
0.0
100
%
Off
Flash Mode
Flash mode
Adjusting fl ash output (x)
Flash output can be adjusted if you fi nd that your subject is over- or under-exposed
even though the exposure in the rest of the frame is appropriate.
Flash compensation is available in modes other than [#Manual] (manual).
1
Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.
2
Use FGHI to select [x].
3
Use the front dial to select an option.
sRGB
Natural
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
M-IS
±
0
A
±
0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
P
250
1023
1:02:03
F5.6
p
#
±
0.0
#
o
S-IS Auto
30p
30p
4K
Y
F
Y
F
S
-
AF
100
%
Off
x
x
• Changes to fl ash intensity made with the external fl ash unit are added to those made with
the camera.
106
EN
Shooting
2
Processing options (Picture Mode)
Choose how pictures are processed during shooting to enhance color, tone, and other
properties. Choose from preset picture modes according to your subject or artistic
intent. Contrast, sharpness, and other settings can be adjusted separately for each
mode. You can also add artistic effects using art fi lters. Art fi lters give you the option
of added frame effects and the like. Adjustments to individual parameters are stored
separately for each picture mode and art fi lter.
• This item applies during both still photography and movie recording.
Picture mode options
Ai-Enhance The camera adjusts colors and contrast for optimal results
according to the type of subject (P. 113).
BVivid Choose for vivid colors.
CNatural Choose for natural colors.
DMuted Choose for pictures that will later be retouched.
EPortrait Enhance skin tones.
JMonochrome Record pictures in monochrome. You can apply color fi lter effects
and choose a tint (P. 113).
KCustom Adjust picture mode parameters to create a custom version of a
selected picture mode.
ve-Portrait Smooth complexions.
FUnderwater Process pictures to preserve the vivid colors seen under water.
• We recommend choosing [Off] for [#+WB] (P. 193) when this
option is selected.
cColor Creator Adjust hue and color to suit your creative intent (
P. 108
).
ePop Art
Uses Art Filter settings. Art effects can also be used.
fSoft Focus
gPale&Light Color
hLight Tone
iGrainy Film
jPin Hole
kDiorama
lCross Process
mGentle Sepia
nDramatic Tone
oKey Line
pWatercolor
qVintage
rPartial Color
vBleach Bypass
9Instant Film
107
EN
Shooting
2
kFlat * Movies are recorded using a tone curve adapted to color
grading.
lOM-Log400 * Movies are recorded using a log tone curve for greater freedom
during color grading.
* Displayed in movie mode when [On] is selected for [n Specifi cation Settings] >
[n Picture Mode] in the n Video Menu (P. 161).
• Art fi lters apply only to the JPEG copy. [RAW+JPEG] is automatically selected for image
quality in place of [RAW].
• Depending on the scene, the effects of some settings may not be visible, while in other
cases tone transitions may be ragged or the image rendered more “grainy”.
%
• You can hide or reveal picture modes using [Picture Mode Settings] (P. 187) in
G Custom Menu P.
1
Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.
2
Use FGHI to select [Picture Mode].
Picture Mode
sRGB
Natural
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
M-IS
±
0
A
±
0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
P
250
1023
1:02:03
F5.6
p
#
±
0.0
#
o
S-IS Auto
30p
30p
4K
Y
F
Y
F
S
-
AF
100
%
Off
Picture Mode
3
Use the front dial to select an option.
• Depending on the option selected, picture mode
parameters may be displayed in LV super control panel.
Adjust parameters as desired (P. 110 – 113).
sRGB
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
M-IS
A
±
0
G
±
0
P
250
1023
1:02:03
F5.6
p
Standard
S
Normal
±
0
±
0
±
0
#
±
0.0
#
o
S-IS Auto
30p
30p
4K
Y
F
Y
F
S
-
AF
100
%
Off
Picture Mode
i-Enhance
Changes depending on
mode selected
108
EN
Shooting
2
Adjusting overall color (Color Creator)
The camera permits intuitive adjustments to color saturation and hue. Choose from
30 hues and 8 levels of saturation. The results can be previewed in the display.
1
Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.
2
Use FGHI to select [Picture Mode].
3
Rotate the front dial to highlight [Color Creator].
• A [c Color/Vivid] item will appear in the LV super control
panel.
4
Highlight [c Color/Vivid] using FG and press the
Q button.
Picture Mode
sRGB
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
M-IS
A
±
0
G
±
0
P
250
1023
1:02:03
F5.6
p
c
Color/Vivid
#
±
0.0
#
o
S-IS Auto
30p
30p
4K
Y
F
Y
F
S
-
AF
100
%
Off
Color Creator
Picture Mode
c Color/Vivid
5
Adjust saturation and hue.
• Rotate the front dial to adjust hue.
• Rotate the rear dial to adjust saturation.
• To restore default values, press and hold the Q button.
100
%
ColorColor
ViVid±0ViVid±0
ResetReset
6
Press the Q button to save changes.
• You can also save changes by pressing the shutter button halfway.
• Photos are recorded in RAW+JPEG format when [RAW] is selected for image quality
(P. 100, 142).
• Pictures taken using [HDR] (P. 152) or [Multiple Exposure] (P. 154) are recorded at the
[Natural] setting.
• [Color Creator] can be assigned to a camera control. It can be accessed via buttons
assigned the [Multi Function] (P. 124) role using [Button Function] (P. 116).
109
EN
Shooting
2
“Leave Color” Effects (Partial Color)
Shoot in black-and-white while capturing objects of a selected hue in color. For
example, you can shoot in black-and-white while leaving only reds in color. The results
can be previewed in the display.
[Partial Color] is an art fi lter option. Settings can be adjusted when it is selected for
picture mode. Choose from three “leave color” fi lters (1 through 3).
1
Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.
2
Use FGHI to select [Picture Mode].
Picture Mode
sRGB
Natural
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
M-IS
±
0
A
±
0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
P
250
1023
1:02:03
F5.6
p
#
±
0.0
#
o
S-IS Auto
30p
30p
4K
Y
F
Y
F
S
-
AF
100
%
Off
Picture Mode
3
Highlight [ART141], [ART142], or [ART143] using
the front dial.
• [R Color] and [Effect] options will be displayed in the
LV super control panel.
sRGB
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
M-IS
A
±
0
G
±
0
P
250
1023
1:02:03
F5.6
p
Effect Off
#
±
0.0
#
ART141
o
S-IS Auto
30p
30p
4K
Color
Y
F
Y
F
S
-
AF
100
%
Off
Partial Color 1
R Color Effect
4
Highlight [R Color] using FG on the arrow pad
and press the Q button.
• A color ring will be displayed.
sRGB
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
M-IS
A
±
0
G
±
0
Color
P
250
1023
1:02:03
F5.6
p
#
±
0.0
#
ART141
30p
30p
4K
S-IS Auto
Color Effect Off
Y
F
Y
F
S
-
AF
100
%
o
Off
5
Select a color using the dials.
6
Press the Q button to save changes.
• You can also save changes by pressing the shutter button halfway.
110
EN
Shooting
2
Making fi ne adjustments to sharpness (Sharpness)
Adjust image sharpness. Outlines can be emphasized for a sharp, clear picture.
Settings are stored separately for each picture mode.
1
Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.
2
Use FGHI to select [Sharpness].
3
Use the front dial to select an option.
Sharpness
sRGB
Natural
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
M-IS
±
0
A
±
0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
P
250
1023
1:02:03
F5.6
100
%
p
#
±
0.0
#
o
S-IS Auto
30p
30p
4K
Y
F
Y
F
S
-
AF
Off
Sharpness
Making fi ne adjustments to contrast (Contrast)
Adjust image contrast. Increasing contrast heightens the difference between bright and
dark areas for a harder, more well-defi ned picture. Settings are stored separately for
each picture mode.
1
Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.
2
Use FGHI to select [Contrast].
3
Use the front dial to select an option.
Contrast
sRGB
Natural
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
M-IS
A
±
0
G
±
0
P
250
1023
1:02:03
F5.6
p
S
±
0
±
0
±
0
#
±
0.0
#
o
S-IS Auto
30p
30p
4K
Y
F
Y
F
S
-
AF
100
%
Off
Contrast
Making fi ne adjustments to saturation (Saturation)
Adjust color saturation. Increasing saturation makes pictures more vivid. Settings are
stored separately for each picture mode.
1
Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.
2
Use FGHI to select [Saturation].
3
Use the front dial to select an option.
Saturation
sRGB
Natural
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
M-IS
A
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
P
250
1023
1:02:03
F5.6
p
S
±
0
±
0
#
±
0.0
#
o
S-IS Auto
30p
30p
4K
Y
F
Y
F
S
-
AF
100
%
Off
Saturation
111
EN
Shooting
2
Making fi ne adjustments to tone (Gradation)
Adjust color brightness and shading. Bring pictures closer to what you envisage by, for
example, brightening the entire picture. Settings are stored separately for each picture
mode.
1
Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.
2
Use FGHI to select [Gradation].
Gradation
sRGB
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
M-IS
A
±
0
G
±
0
P
250
1023
1:02:03
F5.6
p
Natural
S
Normal
±
0
±
0
±
0
#
±
0.0
#
o
S-IS Auto
30p
30p
4K
Y
F
Y
F
S
-
AF
100
%
Off
Gradation
3
Use the front dial to select an option.
z Auto
(Shadow Adj)
Divides the image into detailed regions and adjusts the brightness
separately for each region. This is effective for images with areas
of large contrast in which the whites appear too bright or the
blacks appear too dark.
z Normal
(Gradation Normal) Optimal shading. Recommended in most circumstances.
z High
(Gradation High Key) Uses a tone suitable for a bright subject.
z Low
(Gradation Low Key) Uses a tone suitable for a dark subject.
112
EN
Shooting
2
Applying fi lter effects to monochrome pictures (Color Filter)
Color fi lter effects can be added when [Monochrome] is selected for picture mode
(P. 106). Depending on the color of the subject, color fi lter effects can make subjects
brighter or enhance contrast. Orange adds more contrast than yellow, red more
contrast than orange. Green is a good choice for portraits and the like.
1
Press the Q button to display the LV super control panel.
2
Use FGHI to select [Picture Mode].
3
Select [Monochrome] using the front dial.
4
Use FGHI to select [Color Filter]. Color Filter
sRGB
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
M-IS
A
±
0
G
±
0
P
250
1023
1:02:03
F5.6
p
N
F
Normal
N
T
S
±
0
±
0
#
±
0.0
#
o
S-IS Auto
30p
30p
4K
Y
F
Y
F
S
-
AF
100
%
Off
Color Filter
MMonochrome
5
Use the front dial to select an option.
N:None No fi lter effect.
Ye:Yellow Reproduces clearly defi ned white cloud with natural blue sky.
Or:Orange Slightly brings out blue skies or the light of the setting sun.
R:Red Further brings out blue skies or autumn foliage.
G:Green Adds warmth to skin tones in portraits. The green fi lter also emphasizes
the reds in lipstick.
113
EN
Shooting
2
Adjusting the tone of a monochrome image (Monochrome Color)
Add a tint to black-and-white pictures in the [Monochrome] picture mode (P. 106).
1
Press the Q button to display the LV super control panel.
2
Use FGHI to select [Picture Mode].
3
Select [Monochrome] using the front dial.
4
Use FGHI to select [Monochrome Color]. Monochrome Color
sRGB
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
M-IS
A
±
0
G
±
0
P
250
1023
1:02:03
F5.6
p
N
F
Normal
N
T
S
±
0
±
0
#
±
0.0
#
o
S-IS Auto
30p
30p
4K
Y
F
Y
F
S
-
AF
100
%
Off
Monochrome Color
MMonochrome
5
Use the front dial to select an option.
N:Normal Creates a normal black and white image.
S:Sepia Shoot in sepia-tinted monochrome.
B:Blue Shoot in blue-tinted monochrome.
P:Purple Shoot in purple-tinted monochrome.
G:Green Shoot in green-tinted monochrome.
Adjusting i-Enhance effects (Effect)
Choose the strength of the i-Enhance effect when [i-Enhance] is selected for picture
mode (P. 106).
1
Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.
2
Use FGHI to select [Effect].
Effect
sRGB
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
M-IS
A
±
0
G
±
0
P
250
1023
1:02:03
F5.6
p
i-Enhance
Standard
S
Normal
±
0
±
0
±
0
#
±
0.0
#
o
S-IS Auto
30p
30p
4K
Y
F
Y
F
S
-
AF
100
%
Off
Effect
3
Use the front dial to select an option.
3Low (Effect: Low) Adds a low i-Enhance effect to images.
3Standard
(Effect: Standard) Adds an i-Enhance effect between “low” and “high” to images.
3High (Effect: High) Adds a high i-Enhance effect to images.
114
EN
Shooting
2
Setting the color reproduction format (Color Space)
You can select a format to ensure that colors are correctly reproduced when shot
images are regenerated on a monitor or using a printer. This option is equivalent to the
[Color Space] (P. 194) in G Custom Menu X.
1
Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.
2
Use FGHI to select [Color Space].
sRGB
Natural
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
M-IS
±
0
A
±
0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
P
250
1023
1:02:03
F5.6
p
#
±
0.0
#
o
S-IS Auto
30p
30p
4K
Y
F
Y
F
S
-
AF
100
%
Off
Color Space
Color Space
3
Use the front dial to select an option.
sRGB The established color space standard for Windows systems. It is widely
supported across displays, printers, digital cameras, and computer
applications. This setting is recommended in most circumstances.
AdobeRGB
A color space standard defi ned by Adobe Systems Inc. It can reproduce
a wider gamut of colors than sRGB. Accurate color reproduction is
available only with software and devices (displays, printers, and the like)
that support this standard. An underscore (“_”) appears at the beginning
of the fi le name (e.g., “_xxx0000.jpg”).
• [AdobeRGB] is not available in HDR or movie (n) mode or when an art fi lter is selected
for picture mode.
115
EN
Shooting
2
Changing the brightness of highlights and shadows
(Highlight&Shadow Control)
Adjust brightness separately for highlights, mid-tones, and shadows. You gain greater
control over exposure than you would with exposure compensation alone. You can
selectively make highlights darker or shadows brighter.
1
Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.
sRGB
Natural
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
M-IS
A
±
0
G
±
0
P
250
1023
1:02:03
F5.6
p
S
±
0
±
0
±
0
#
±
0.0
#
o
S-IS Auto
30p
30p
4K
Y
F
Y
F
S
-
AF
100
%
Off
Highlight&Shadow Control
Highlight&Shadow Control
2
Use FGHI to select [Highlight&Shadow Control], then press the Q
button.
3
Press the INFO button to choose the desired tone
range.
• The tone range changes each time the button is
pressed.
100
%
Shadow±0
HighLight+5HighLight
±0
Midtone
Selected tone range
4
Rotate the dials to choose the desired setting.
• [Hi. & Sh.] selected
Adjust highlights using the front dial and shadows using
the rear dial.
• [Midtone] selected
Use the front or rear dial.
• Press and hold the Q button to restore the default
curve.
100
%
Shadow±0
HighLight+5HighLight+5
ResetReset
Midtone
5
Press the Q button to save changes.
• You can also save changes by pressing the shutter button halfway.
• [Highlight & Shadow Control] can be assigned to a button. Select [Multi Function]
(P. 124) for [Button Function] (P. 116).
116
EN
Shooting
2
Assigning functions to buttons (Button Function)
Other roles can be assigned to buttons in place of their existing functions.
The functions assigned using [K Button Function] take effect only during still
photography (P. 185). The functions assigned using [n Button Function] take effect
in n (movie) mode (P. 163).
Customizable Controls
Icon Button Default role
FF (exposure compensation) button F (exposure compensation)
RR (movie) button RREC (movie recording)
uu (LV) button u (display selection)
tAEL/AFL button t (exposure/focus lock)
KISO button K (ISO sensitivity)
dArrow pad N (AF-target position)
DArrow pad I (right) *1Still picture: # (fl ash)
Movie: X (electronic zoom) *2
EArrow pad G (down) *1Still picture: j/Y (sequential shooting/
self-timer)
Movie: WB (white balance)
YOne-touch white balance button Still picture: k (one-touch white balance)
Movie: PEAK (peaking)
ZPreview button Still picture: z (preview)
Movie: a (magnify)
mOptional power battery holder
B-Fn1 button K (ISO sensitivity)
nOptional power battery holder
B-Fn2 button t (exposure/focus lock)
vOptional power battery holder
arrow pad Still picture: N (AF-target position)
Movie: n (direct function)
wOptional power battery holder
arrow pad I (right) *3Still picture: # (fl ash)
Movie: X (electronic zoom) *2
xOptional power battery holder
arrow pad G (down) *3
Still picture: j/Y (sequential shooting/
self-timer)
Movie: WB (white balance)
lL-Fn button (lens focus function
buttons) AF Stop
*1 To use I and G on the arrow pad in their assigned roles, select [Direct Function] for
[d] (arrow pad).
*2 Only available with power zoom lenses.
*3 To use I and G on the power battery holder arrow pad in their assigned roles, select
[Direct Function] for [v].
117
EN
Shooting
2
To change the function assigned to a button, follow the steps below.
1
Press the Q button to display the LV super control
panel.
2
Use FGHI to select [Button Function], then
press the Q button.
• [K Button Function] of G Custom Menu J (P. 185)
is displayed in still image shooting mode, and
[n Button Function] of [n Button/Dial/Lever] (P. 163)
is displayed in movie mode.
sRGB
Natural
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
M-IS
±
0
A
±
0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
P
250
1023
1:02:03
F5.6
p
#
±
0.0
#
o
S-IS Auto
30p
30p
4K
Y
F
Y
F
S
-
AF
100
%
Off
KButton Function
Button Function
3
Highlight the desired control using FG on the arrow pad and press the I
button.
4
Highlight a function using the FG buttons and press the Q button to assign
it to the selected control.
• The options available vary from button to button.
Available Roles
Role Function
AF Stop Suspend autofocus. Focus locks and autofocus is suspended while
the control is pressed. Applies only to lens l buttons.
AEL/AFL (t)
Lock focus and/or exposure. When used for exposure lock, the
control locks exposure when pressed and releases the lock when
pressed a second time. The behavior of the control can be selected
using [K AEL/AFL] in G Custom Menu J (P. 201).
RREC (movie
recording) The control functions as a movie-record button. Press to start or stop
recording.
Direct Function
(n)
Assign roles to the buttons on the arrow pad (FGHI). The
following roles can be assigned:
H button: N (AF-target selection)
F button: F (exposure compensation)
I button: # (fl ash) (still picture) / electronic zoom (movie)
G button: j/Y (drive mode) (still picture) / WB (movie)
• The I and G buttons can be assigned other functions.
Preview (z)
Stop aperture down to the selected value. This lets you preview
depth of fi eld. Aperture stops down to the currently-selected value
while the button is pressed. Preview options can be selected using
[z Settings] in G Custom Menu Q (P. 189).
• This role is available for [K Button Function] only.
118
EN
Shooting
2
Role Function
k (one-touch
white balance)
Measure a value for one-touch white balance (P. 94, 95).
To measure white balance during still photography, frame a reference
object (a piece of white paper or the like) in the display, then press
and hold the control and press the shutter button. A list of one-touch
white balance options will be displayed, from which you can choose
the location to which the new value will be saved.
To measure white balance during movie recording, frame a reference
object (a piece of white paper or the like) in the display and press the
button. A list of one-touch white balance options will be displayed,
from which you can choose the location to which the new value will
be saved.
AF Area Select
(N)
You can choose the AF-target mode (P. 69) and position (P. 72).
Press the control to view the AF-target selection display.
Use the front or rear dial to choose AF-target mode and the multi
selector or arrow pad to position the AF target.
• You can choose the controls used for this operation.
g G Custom Menu K > [N Select Screen Settings] (P. 207)
N Home
(AF home position)
(NH)
Recall previously-saved [AF Mode], [AF Target Mode], and [AF
Target Point] “home position” settings. Press the control to recall
saved settings and press it again to restore the settings previously
in effect. Home position settings are saved using [N Set Home] in
G Custom Menu K (P. 206).
• This role is available for [K Button Function] only.
• You can save separate home positions for landscape and portrait
orientations using [K Orientation Linked N] (P. 210) in
G Custom Menu K.
MF (AF/MF toggle)
Switch between AF and MF. Press once to select MF and again to
return to the previous mode. The focus mode can also be selected by
holding the button and rotating a dial.
This option will have no effect during still photography if [mode2] is
selected for [K Fn Lever Function] (P. 219).
It will likewise have no effect during movie recording if [mode2] is
selected for [n Fn Lever Function] (P. 163).
RAW K
(RAW quality)
Switch between RAW + JPEG and JPEG [KK] settings. Press the
control to switch from RAW or JPEG to RAW + JPEG or from RAW +
JPEG to JPEG. You can also choose an image quality setting by
holding the button and rotating a dial.
• This role is available for [K Button Function] only.
Test Picture
(K TEST)
Take a test shot. You can view the effects of selected settings in an
actual photograph. If you keep the control pressed while pressing the
shutter button, you will be able to view the results but the picture will
not be saved to the memory card.
• This role is available for [K Button Function] only.
119
EN
Shooting
2
Role Function
Custom Mode
C1–C4
Recall settings for the selected custom mode. Press the control
once to recall saved settings, a second time to restore the settings
previously in effect (P. 58). The control continues to perform this
function when a custom mode is selected with the mode dial.
• This role is available for [K Button Function] only.
Exposure F (F)
Adjust exposure settings. Hold the control and rotate the front or
rear dial. Alternatively, you can press the button to activate settings
and then rotate the dials. The adjustments available vary with the
shooting mode:
[P]: Use the front or rear dial or HI on the arrow pad for exposure
compensation. Use the FG buttons for program shift.
[A]: Use the front or rear dial or HI on the arrow pad for exposure
compensation. Use the FG buttons for aperture.
[S]: Use the front or rear dial or HI on the arrow pad for exposure
compensation. Use the FG buttons for shutter speed.
[M] *: Use the rear dial or FG on the arrow pad for shutter speed.
Use the front dial or the HI buttons for aperture.
[B]: Use rear dial or FG on the arrow pad to switch between bulb/
time and live composite photography. Use the front dial or HI
buttons to choose the aperture.
* For information on adjusting exposure settings when [AUTO]
is selected for [ISO] (P. 75, 91), see “Adjusting Exposure
Compensation” (P. 68).
Digital Tele-
converter (b)Turn the digital teleconverter on or off (P. 143). Press once to zoom
in and again to zoom out.
Keystone Comp.
(D)
Press the control to view keystone compensation settings (P. 156).
After adjusting settings, press the control again to exit. To cancel
keystone compensation, press and hold the control.
• This role is available for [K Button Function] only.
Fisheye
Compensation
(A)
Enable fi sheye correction (P. 242). Press once to enable fi sheye
correction. Press again to disable. Hold the button and rotate the
front or rear dial to choose from [Angle] options 1, 2, and 3.
• This role is available for [K Button Function] only.
Magnify (a)
Press the control once to display the zoom frame and again to zoom
in (P. 73). Press the control a third time to exit zoom; to hide the
zoom frame, press and hold the control. Use the multi selector, touch
controls, or the arrow pad (FGHI) to position the zoom frame.
120
EN
Shooting
2
Role Function
HDR (M)
Enable HDR (P. 152). Press once to enable HDR. Press again to
disable. Hold the button and rotate the front or rear dial to adjust HDR
settings, including HDR bracketing.
• This role is available for [K Button Function] only.
BKT (N)
Enable bracketing (P. 146). Press once to enable bracketing. Press
again to disable. Hold the button and rotate the front or rear dial to
adjust [Bracketing] settings.
• This role is available for [K Button Function] only.
ISO
Adjust [ISO] settings (P. 75). Hold the control and rotate the front
or rear dial. Alternatively, you can press the button to activate settings
and then rotate the dials. Use the front or rear dial or HI on the
arrow pad to adjust settings.
WB (white balance)
Adjust [WB] settings (P. 94). Hold the control and rotate the front or
rear dial. Alternatively, you can press the button to activate settings
and then rotate the dials. Use the front or rear dial or HI on the
arrow pad to adjust settings.
Multi Function
Confi gure the control for use as a multi-function button (P. 124).
Hold the control and rotate the front or rear dial to choose the
function performed. The selected function can be performed by
pressing the control.
Peaking (PEAK)
Toggle focus peaking on or off (P. 215). Press the control once to
turn peaking on and again to turn it off. When peaking is on, peaking
options (color, amount) can be displayed by pressing the INFO
button.
V Level Disp
(R)
Display the digital level gauge. The exposure bar display in the
viewfi nder functions as a level gauge. Press the control again to exit.
This option takes effect when [Style 1] or [Style 2] is selected for
[EVF Style] (P. 240) in G Custom Menu a.
u View
Selection
(display selection)
Switch between viewfi nder photography and live view. If [Off] is
selected for [EVF Auto Switch] (P. 196), the display will switch
between the viewfi nder and the monitor. Press and hold the control to
display [EVF Auto Switch] options.
S-OVF (n)Enable [S-OVF] (P. 197). Press once to turn OVF simulation on.
Press again to turn it off.
• This role is available for [K Button Function] only.
AF Limiter
(AFLimit)
Enable the AF limiter (P. 183). Press once to enable [AF Limiter].
Press again to disable. Hold the button and rotate the front or rear
dial to choose from three stored settings.
• This role is available for [K Button Function] only.
121
EN
Shooting
2
Role Function
Preset MF (PreMF)
Toggle [AF Mode] > [Preset MF] on or off (P. 64). Press the control
once to enable preset MF and again to restore the previous focus
mode. Alternatively, you can choose the [AF Mode] by holding the
control and rotating a dial.
This option will have no effect during still photography if [mode2] is
selected for [K Fn Lever Function] (P. 219).
It will likewise have no effect during movie recording if [mode2] is
selected for [n Fn Lever Function] (P. 163).
Lens Info Settings
(sLens)Recall previously-saved lens data (P. 239). Recall saved data for the
current lens after changing lenses or the like.
IS Mode (IS)Toggle [Image Stabilizer] on or off (P. 97). Press once to select
[Off] and again to turn image stabilization on. Hold the control and
rotate the front or rear dial to access [Image Stabilizer] options.
Flicker Scan
(P)
Adjust settings for [Flicker Scan] (P. 166, 234). Press the control
to select [On]. You can adjust shutter speed for best results while
viewing banding in the display. Press the control again to display
shooting information and access other settings. Press and hold the
control to select [Off] for [Flicker Scan].
G Lock (touch
control lock)
Lock touch controls. Press and hold the button once to lock touch
controls and again to unlock.
• This function can be assigned to the I and G buttons only. You
must fi rst set [d] to [Direct Function].
Electronic Zoom
(X)
Zoom power zoom lenses in or out. After pressing the control, use the
arrow pad to zoom in or out. Use For I on the arrow pad to zoom
in and G or H to zoom out.
• This function can be assigned to the I and G buttons only. You
must fi rst set [d] to [Direct Function].
Flash Mode (#)
Adjust fl ash settings (P. 86). Press once to display fl ash options
and again select the highlighted option and exit. Highlight settings
using the front or rear dial or HI on the arrow pad.
• This function can be assigned to the I and G buttons only. You
must fi rst set [d] to [Direct Function].
• This role is available for [K Button Function] only.
122
EN
Shooting
2
Role Function
j/Y (sequential
shooting/self-timer)
Choose a drive (sequential shooting/self-timer) mode (P. 78).
Press the button to display drive mode options and then choose a
mode using the front or rear dial or the HI buttons on the arrow
pad.
• This function can be assigned to the I and G buttons only. You
must fi rst set [d] to [Direct Function].
• This role is available for [K Button Function] only.
Live ND Shooting
(O)
Enable the live ND fi lter (P. 159). Press once to enable [Live ND
Shooting]. Press again to disable. Hold the button and rotate the front
or rear dial to adjust [Live ND Shooting] settings.
• This role is available for [K Button Function] only.
I Face Selection
(E)
Select the face used for focus when the camera detects multiple
portrait subjects. Pressing the button selects the face closest to the
current AF target. If q (all targets) is selected for AF-target mode,
pressing the button will instead select the face closest to the center
of the frame. To focus on a different face, hold the button and rotate
the front or rear dial. This option can also be used during movie
recording.
I Face Priority
(I)
Pressing the button when an option other than [Face Priority Off] is
selected for [I Face Priority] (P. 92) selects [Face Priority Off]; to
restore the previous setting, press the button again. To change the
option displayed in the [I Face Priority] menu, hold the button and
rotate the front or rear dial.
Live View Boost
(G)
Pressing the button when [Off] is selected for [Live View Boost]
(P. 188) selects [On1]. If an option other than [Off] is selected,
pressing the button selects [Off]; to restore the previous setting, press
the button again. To choose an option for [Live View Boost], hold the
control and rotate the front or rear dial.
• This role is available for [K Button Function] only.
Focus Ring Lock
(B)
Press the control once to disable, and again to enable, the lens
focus ring. This option is available when [S-AFb], [C-AFb], [MF],
[C-AF+TRb], [PreMF], or [FAFb] is selected for [AF Mode].
The b portion of the AF mode indicator is displayed gray while the
ring is disabled.
In the case of lenses equipped with an MF (manual focus) clutch,
pressing the button has no effect when the focus ring is in the MF
position (closer to the camera body).
Focus ring lock ends when you perform an operation such as turning
the camera off or attaching a different lens.
123
EN
Shooting
2
Role Function
Movie H (H)
Zoom in or out using the movie teleconverter (P. 125). Press the
control once to display the zoom frame and again to zoom in. Press
the control a third time to exit zoom; to hide the zoom frame, press
and hold the control. Use the multi selector, touch controls, or the
arrow pad (FGHI) to position the zoom frame.
• This role is available for [n Button Function] only.
S-AF Focus using [S-AF]. Press the control to focus. Focus will lock while
the control is pressed.
• This role is available for [n Button Function] only.
Off The control is not used.
124
EN
Shooting
2
Using multi function options (Multi Function)
Assign multiple roles to a single button.
• To use the multi function feature, you must fi rst assign [Multi Function] to a camera control
using [Button Function] (P. 116).
Choosing a function
1
Hold the button to which [Multi Function] is assigned
and rotate the front or rear dial.
• Rotate the dial until the desired feature is highlighted.
Release the button to select the highlighted feature.
2
Press the button to which [Multi Function] is
assigned. P
100
%
ISO WB
a
Highlight&Shadow Control
3
Adjust settings.
The multi-function button can be used to:
Highlight&Shadow
Control Adjust brightness using the front or rear dial. Press the INFO button
to choose the tone range (highlights, shadows, or mid-tones).
Color Creator Use the front dial to adjust hue and the rear dial to adjust saturation.
ISO Choose a setting using the front or rear dial.
WB
Magnify The zoom frame will be displayed.
Image Aspect Choose a setting using the front or rear dial.
S-OVF Press the button to turn the feature on or off.
Peaking
• You can choose the options displayed. g G Custom Menu P > [Multi Function
Settings] (P. 187)
125
EN
Shooting
2
Adjusting Zoom During Filming (Movie H)
You can zoom in on a selected area of the frame for movie recording without using lens
controls. Use for instant close-ups or cuts to wider angle. Buttons or touch controls
can be used to choose the zoom location and cut to close ups or wide angles during
fi lming.
[Movie H] is a [n Button Function] option. It turns on or off with a button and so must
be assigned to a control using [n Button Function] (P. 116).
• This feature is not available when [4K] or [C4K] is selected for [nK] > [Movie
Resolution].
• This feature cannot be used to fi lm high-speed movies.
• [Movie H] cannot be combined with [Digital Tele-converter] (P. 143).
Using [Movie H]
1
Press the button to which [Movie H] is assigned.
• A frame will appear in the center of the display.
M-ISM-IS
1
1:02:03
n
LL
R
R
30p
30p
4K
C-AF
TC 00:00:00:00 DF
0.0
250 F5.6
ISO-A
200
123
min
2
Position the frame as desired.
• Position the frame using touch controls, the multi
selector, or the arrow pad (FGHI).
• To re-center the frame, press the multi selector once or
press and hold the Q button.
Multi selector
3
Press the button to which [Movie H] is assigned once more.
• The camera will zoom the selected area in to fi ll the display.
• To return to the zoom frame, press the button to which [Movie H] is assigned a third
time.
4
To end zoom, press the Q button once, or press and hold the button to which
[Movie H] is assigned.
126
EN
Playback
3
3
Information display during playback
Playback image information
Simplifi ed display
×10
2020.02.15 12:30:00 15
100-0015
4:3
HDR1
48kHz
YFYF
w
1
w
1
100
%
JPEG
d
HDR1
ND8
w
1
w
1
b
c
1 890a76
fed
j
hgi
234
5
Overall display
ISO 400
250
+2.0
sRGB
2020.02.15 12:30:00 15
WB
AUTO
A+4
F5.6
45mm
+1.0-18
G+4
Natural
1/8
P
100
%
100-0015
4:3
HDR1
5184×3888
YFYF
w
1
w
1
×10
48kHz JPEG
lkm
s
p
q
r
t
v
u
wxyABz
on
Playback
127
EN
Playback
3
1 Battery level ....................................P. 32
2 Wireless LAN connection
status ....................................P. 245, 256
3 Active Bluetooth® connection ......P. 246
4 Active connection to computer (Wi-Fi)
......................................................P. 256
5 Wireless LAN connection......P. 247, 270
6 GPS data indicator........................P. 254
7 Print order
Number of prints ...........................P. 134
8 Sound record ................................P. 136
9 Share order ...................................P. 132
0 Protect ..........................................P. 131
a Image selected .............................P. 133
b File number ...................................P. 195
c Frame number
d Playback slot.................................P. 237
e Image quality ........................P. 100, 142
f Aspect ratio .....................................P. 98
g HDR image ...................................P. 152
h Focus stacking ..............................P. 149
i Live ND fi lter .................................P. 159
j Date and time .................................P. 33
k Aspect border .................................P. 98
l AF target display .............................P. 69
m Shooting mode..........................P. 41–60
n Shutter speed ...........................P. 44–50
o Exposure compensation .................P. 68
p Aperture value ..........................P. 44–50
q Focal length
r Flash intensity control ...................P. 105
s White balance compensation..........P. 96
t Color space...................................P. 114
u Picture mode.........................P. 106, 142
v Compression rate .........................P. 236
w Pixel count ....................................P. 236
x ISO sensitivity ...........................P. 75, 91
y White balance .................................P. 94
z Focus adjustment .........................P. 183
A Metering mode ................................P. 77
B Histogram
Switching the information display
You can switch the information displayed during playback by pressing
the INFO button.
INFO button
ISO 400
250
+2.0
sRGB
2020.02.15 12:30:00 15
WB
AUTO
A+4
F5.6
45mm
+1.0-18
G+4
Natural
1/8
P
100
%
100-0015
4:3
HDR1
5184×3888
YFYF
w
1
w
1
×10
48kHz JPEG
2020.02.15 12:30:00 15
100-0015
4:3
HDR1
YFYF
w
1
w
1
100
%×10
48kHz JPEG
100
%
Overall displayImage only
Simplifi ed display
INFO
INFOINFO
• You can add histogram, highlight & shadow, and Light Box to the information displayed
during playback. g G Custom Menu P > [G/Info Settings] > [q Info] (P. 226)
128
EN
Playback
3
Viewing photographs and movies
1
Press the q button.
• Your most recent photograph or movie will be displayed.
• Select the desired photograph or movie using the front dial or arrow pad.
• Press the shutter button halfway to return to shooting mode.
%
• The q button can be used to switch between cards while playback is in progress. To
choose a card, hold the q button and rotate the front or rear dial. This does not change
option selected for [Card Slot Settings] > [q Slot] (P. 237) in G Custom Menu Y.
Front dial
Arrow pad
Displays
the previous frame Displays
the next frame
q button
2020.02.15 12:30:00 15
100
%
100-0015
4:3
YFYF
Still image
2020.02.15 12:30:00 4
100-0004
P
WB
AUTO
TC 00:00:00:00 DF
123
min
30p
30p
4K
48kHz
Movie
Rear dial (o)Zoom in (p)/Index (q)
Front dial (r)Previous (t)/Next (s)
Operation also available during close-up playback.
Arrow pad (FGHI)/
multi selector (S/T)
Single-frame playback: Next (I)/previous (H)/playback volume
(FG)
Close-up playback: Changing the close-up position
• You can display the next frame (I) or the previous frame (H)
during close-up playback by pressing the INFO button.
• Press the INFO button again to display a zoom frame and use
FGHI to change its position.
Index/calendar playback: Highlight image
The above operations can also be performed using the multi
selector.
• The operations performed using FGHI can also be
performed by pressing the multi selector up, down, left, or right.
• The operations performed by pressing the INFO button can
also be performed by pressing the center of the multi selector.
INFO button
View image info
H (R) button Select picture (P. 133)
129
EN
Playback
3
0 (AEL/AFL) button Protect picture (P. 131)
button Delete picture (P. 132)
Q button
View menus (in calendar playback, press this button to exit to
single-frame playback)
Finding Pictures Quickly (Index and Calendar Playback)
• In single-frame playback, rotate the rear dial to G for index playback. Rotate further for
calendar playback.
• Turn the rear dial to a to return to single-frame playback.
Q
Single-frame
playback
2020.02.15 12:30:00 15
100
%
100-0015
4:3
YFYF
Index display
2020.02.15 12:30:00 20
100
%
Calendar display
2020.2
Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat
100
%
1
8765432
1514131211109
22212019181716
3126 27 28 29 30
54321
27 28 2926252423
q
p
q
p
• You can change the number of frames for index display. g G Custom Menu P > [G/
Info Settings] > [G Settings] (P. 228)
Zooming In (Playback Zoom)
In single-frame playback, turn the rear dial to a to zoom in. Turn to G to return to
single-frame playback.
2× zoom
Close-up playback
Single-frame
playback 14× zoom
2x
100
%
q
p
q
p
2020.02.15 12:30:00 15
100
%
100-0015
4:3
YFYF
14x
100
%
130
EN
Playback
3
Rotating Pictures (Rotate)
Choose whether to rotate photographs.
1
Play the photograph back and press the Q button.
2
Select [Rotate] and press the Q button.
3
Press F to rotate the image counterclockwise, G to rotate it clockwise; the
image rotates each time the button is pressed.
• Press the Q button to save settings and exit.
• The rotated image is saved in its current orientation.
• Movies and protected images cannot be rotated.
%
• The camera can be confi gured to automatically rotate portrait-orientation pictures during
playback. g q Playback Menu > [R] (P. 170)
[Rotate] is not available when [Off] is selected for [R].
Watching movies
Select a movie and press the Q button to display the
playback menu. Select [Play Movie] and press the Q
button to begin playback. Fast-forward and rewind using
H/I. Press the Q button again to pause playback. While
playback is paused, use F to view the fi rst frame and G
to view the last frame. Use HI or the front dial to view
previous or next frame. Press the MENU button to end
playback.
123
min
Movie
Play from Beginning
Play Movie
Movie Edit
Share Order
0
Copy
Back Set
Viewing Movies over 4 GB in Size
Long movies may exceed 4 GB in size. Movies over 4 GB in size are recorded over multiple
fi les. The fi les can be played back as a single movie.
1
Press the q button.
• The most recent picture will be displayed.
2
Display a long movie you want to view and press the Q button.
• The following options will be displayed.
[Play from Beginning]: Plays back a split movie all the way through
[Play Movie]: Plays back fi les separately
[Delete entire n]: Deletes all parts of a split movie
[Erase]: Deletes fi les separately
• We recommend using the latest version of Olympus Workspace to play back movies on a
computer (P. 274). Before launching the software for the fi rst time, connect the camera to
the computer.
131
EN
Playback
3
Protecting Pictures (0)
Protect images from accidental deletion. Display the
image you want to protect and press the 0 (AEL/AFL)
button to add 0 to the image (protection icon). Press the
0 (AEL/AFL) button again to cancel protection. You
can also protect multiple selected images. g “Selecting
Multiple Pictures (0, Copy Select, Erase Selected, Share
Order Selected)” (P. 133)
• Formatting the card erases all data including protected
images.
0 (protect) icon
2020.02.15 12:30:00 20
100
%
100-0020
4:3
YFYF
• When an unprotected image is displayed, you can hold the 0 (AEL/AFL) button and
rotate the front or rear dial to protect all images displayed while the dial is rotated. Any
previously-protected images displayed while the dial is rotated will be unaffected.
• When a protected image is displayed, you can hold the 0 (AEL/AFL) button and
rotate the front or rear dial to remove protection from all images displayed while the dial
is rotated. Any previously-unprotected images displayed while the dial is rotated will be
unaffected.
• The same operations can be performed during playback zoom or when a picture is
selected in the index display.
Copying an image (Copy)
When there are cards with available space in both slots 1 and 2, you can copy an
image to the other card.
1
Display an image you want to copy and press the Q button.
2
Highlight [Copy] and press the Q button.
3
Choose whether to specify the destination folder.
• If you select [Assign], choose a destination folder.
4
Highlight [Yes] and press the Q button.
• The picture will be copied to the other card.
• You can also copy all images on a card to the other card at a time. g q Playback
Menu > [Copy All] (P. 175)
132
EN
Playback
3
Deleting Pictures (Erase)
Display an image you want to delete and
press the button. Select [Yes] and press
the Q button.
You can erase images without the
confi rmation step by changing the button
settings. g G Custom Menu Z > [Quick
Erase] (P. 196)
• You can choose whether deleting
pictures recorded in RAW+JPEG image
quality modes deletes both copies, only
the JPEG copy, or only the RAW copy.
g G Custom Menu Z > [RAW+JPEG
Erase] (P. 196)
100
%Erase
Yes
No
Back Set
button
Selecting Pictures for Sharing (Share Order)
You can select images you want to transfer to a smartphone in advance. When playing
back images you want to transfer, press the Q button to display the playback menu.
Highlight [Share Order], press the Q button, and press F or G to mark the image for
sharing; a h icon and the fi le type will be displayed.
To cancel a share order, press F or G. You can select images you want to transfer
in advance and set a share order all at once. g “Selecting Multiple Pictures (0,
Copy Select, Erase Selected, Share Order Selected)” (P. 133), “Copying Pictures to
Smartphones” (P. 251)
• Up to 200 pictures on each slot can be marked for sharing at a time.
$
• Pictures can also be marked for sharing using the H (R)
button. If the H (R) button is currently assigned a role other
than [h], assign it the [h] role using the [qR Function]
option in G Custom Menu K (P. 185).
• When an unmarked image is displayed, you can hold the
H (R) button and rotate the front or rear dial to mark for
sharing all images displayed while the dial is rotated. Any
previously-marked images displayed while the dial is rotated
will be unaffected.
2020.02.15 12:30:00 21
100
%
• When a marked image is displayed, you can hold the H (R) button and rotate the front or
rear dial to remove share marking from all images displayed while the dial is rotated. Any
previously-unmarked images displayed while the dial is rotated will be unaffected.
• The same operations can be performed during playback zoom or when a picture is
selected in the index display.
133
EN
Playback
3
Selecting RAW+JPEG Pictures for Sharing
In the case of pictures recorded with [RAW+JPEG] for image quality, you can choose
to share only the JPEG copies, only the RAW copies, or both the JPEG and RAW
copies.
1
Press the MENU button to view the menus.
2
Highlight [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] in the e setup menu and press I on the
arrow pad.
3
Highlight [RAW+JPEG h] using FG and press I.
4
Highlight an option using FG and press the Q button.
JPEG Only the JPEG copies will be marked for sharing.
RAW Only the RAW copies will be marked for sharing.
RAW+JPEG Both RAW and JPEG copies will be marked for sharing.
• Changing the option selected for [RAW+JPEG h] does not affect pictures already marked
for sharing.
• Regardless of the option selected, removing share marking removes the marking from
both copies.
Selecting Multiple Pictures
(0, Copy Select, Erase Selected, Share Order Selected)
You can select multiple images for [0], [Copy Select], [Erase Selected] or [Share
Order Selected].
Press the Q button to display the menu, and then select
from [0], [Copy Select], [Erase Selected] or [Share Order
Selected].
This function is also available in single-frame playback.
• When an unmarked image is displayed, you can hold the
H (R) button and rotate the front or rear dial to select all
images displayed while the dial is rotated. Any previously-
marked images displayed while the dial is rotated will be
unaffected.
2020.02.15 12:30:00 21
100
%
• When a marked image is displayed, you can hold the H (R) button and rotate the front
or rear dial to deselect all images displayed while the dial is rotated. Any previously-
unmarked images displayed while the dial is rotated will be unaffected.
134
EN
Playback
3
Print order (DPOF)
You can save digital “print orders” to the memory card listing the pictures to be printed
and the number of copies of each print. You can then have the pictures printed at a
print shop that supports DPOF. A memory card is required when creating a print order.
Creating a print order
1
Press the Q button during playback and select [<] (Print Order).
2
Select [<] or [<ALL] and press the Q button.
Individual picture
Press HI to select the frame that you want to set as print
reservation, then press FG to set the number of prints.
• To set print reservation for several pictures, repeat this
step. Press the Q button when all the desired pictures
have been selected.
All pictures
Select [<ALL] and press the Q button.
100
%Print Order
<
Back Set
ALL
3
Select the date and time format and press the Q
button.
No The pictures are printed without the date and time.
Date The pictures are printed with the shooting date.
Time The pictures are printed with the shooting time.
• When printing images, the setting cannot be changed
between the images.
100
%X
Date
Time
No
Back Set
4
Select [Set] and press the Q button.
• The setting will be applied to the images saved on the card being used for playback.
• The camera cannot be used to modify print orders created with other devices. Creating a
new print order deletes any existing print orders created with other devices.
• Print orders cannot include RAW images or movies.
135
EN
Playback
3
Removing all or selected pictures from the print order
You can reset all print reservation data or just the data for selected pictures.
1
Press the Q button during playback and select [<] (Print Order).
2
Select [<] and press the Q button.
• To remove all pictures from the print order, select [Reset] and press the Q button. To
exit without removing all pictures, select [Keep] and press the Q button.
• You can also remove all pictures from the print order by selecting [<ALL] and
choosing [Reset].
3
Press HI to select images you wish to remove from the print order.
• Use G to set the number of prints to 0. Press the Q button once you have removed
all the desired pictures from the print order.
4
Select the date and time format and press the Q button.
• This setting is applied to all frames with print reservation data.
• The setting will be applied to the images saved on the card being used for playback.
5
Select [Set] and press the Q button.
136
EN
Playback
3
Adding Audio to Pictures (R)
You can record audio using the built-in stereo microphone or an optional external
microphone and add it to pictures. The recorded audio provides a simple replacement
for written notes about the pictures.
• Audio recordings can be up to 30 s long.
1
Display the image to which you want to add audio and press the Q button.
• Audio recording is not available with protected images.
• Audio can also be added to pictures using the [Edit] option in the playback menu. Use
[Edit] > [Sel. Image] to select the picture, then press the Q button and select [R].
2
Select [R] and press the Q button.
• To exit without adding audio, select [No].
JPEG
100
%
JPEG Edit
Share Order
0
R
Rotate
<
Back Set
3
Select [R Start] and press the Q button to begin
recording.
4
Press the Q button to end recording.
• Pictures with audio are indicated by H icons and
indicators showing the recording rate.
• To delete recorded audio, select [Erase] in Step 3.
100
%R
No
R Start
Erase
Back Set
%
• Audio is recorded at the rate selected for movies. The rate can be selected using
[Movie R] (P. 169) in the n video menu.
Audio Playback
Playback begins automatically when a picture with audio is displayed. To adjust the
volume:
1
Press the q button to display a picture.
2
Press F or G on the arrow pad.
• F button: Raise volume.
• G button: Lower volume.
100
%
137
EN
Playback
3
Playback Using Touch Controls
Use touch controls to zoom pictures in and out, scroll pictures, or choose the picture
displayed.
Full-frame playback
Displaying the previous or next image
• Slide your fi nger to the left to view the next image, and
right to view the previous image.
100
%
Magnify
• Lightly tap the screen to display the slider and P.
• Slide the bar up or down to zoom in or out.
• Slide your fi nger to scroll the display when the picture is
zoomed in.
• Tap P to display index playback.
Tap Q for calendar playback.
100
%
Index/Calendar playback
Displaying the previous or next page
• Slide your fi nger up to view the next page, and down to
view the previous page.
• Tap Q or R to switch the number of images
displayed. g G Custom Menu P > [G/Info
Settings] > [G Settings] (P. 228)
• Tap R several times to return to single-frame playback. 21
100
%
Viewing images
• Tap an image to view it full frame.
138
EN
Playback
3
Selecting and protecting images
In single-frame playback, lightly tap the screen to display the touch menu. You can
then perform the desired operation by tapping the icons in the touch menu.
HSelect an image. You can select multiple images and delete them collectively.
hImages you want to share with a smartphone can be set. g “Selecting Pictures
for Sharing (Share Order)” (P. 132)
0Protects an image.
• Do not tap the display with your fi ngernails or other sharp objects.
• Gloves or monitor covers may interfere with touch screen operation.
139
EN
Menu functions (Basic operations)
4
4
Basic menu operations
The menus contain shooting and playback options that are not displayed by the LV
super control panel, etc., and let you customize the camera settings for easier use.
Tab Tab name Description
WShooting Menu 1 Photography-related items. Ready the camera for shooting or
access basic photo settings.
XShooting Menu 2 Photography-related items. Adjust advanced photo settings.
nVideo Menu Items related to movie recording. Adjust basic and custom
settings.
qPlayback Menu Playback- and retouch-related items.
GCustom Menu Items for customizing the camera.
eSetup Menu Items for setting the clock, choosing a language, and the like.
PMy Menu * A customizable menu containing only items you select.
* “My Menu” contains no items at shipment. Use “My Menu” to store and organize
frequently-used items from other menus. Select items for addition to “My Menu” from the
camera menus (P. 179).
1
Press the MENU button to display the menus.
1
2
1
4:3
Off
100
%
Y
F
o
Off
Back Set
Shooting Menu 1
KK
Picture Mode
Reset / Custom Modes
Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse
j/Y
Image Aspect
Digital Tele-converter
Preliminary and basic
shooting options.
Press the Q button to
confi rm the setting
Guide
Operation guide
Press the MENU button
to go back one screen
Tab
• A guide is displayed about 2 seconds after you select an option. Press the INFO
button to view or hide guides.
2
Use FG to select a tab and press the Q button.
• The menu group tab appears when the G Custom
Menu is selected. Use FG to select the menu group
and press the Q button.
1
2
A2
A3
A4
B1
B2
C1
C2
A1
A1
A1. AF/MF
mode2
±0
S3/C4/M3/F3
Off
S-AF
100
%
AF Scanner
KAEL/AFL
KAF+MF
KAF Mode
KC-AF Sensitivity
KC-AF Center Start
KC-AF Center Priority
Back Set
Menu group
Menu functions
140
EN
Menu functions (Basic operations)
4
3
Select an item using FG and press the Q button to display options for the
selected item.
1
2
2
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
100
%Shooting Menu 2
Keystone Comp.
Multiple Exposure
HDR
Bracketing
High Res Shot
Live ND Shooting
Back Set
Anti-Shock r/Silent s
1
2
2
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
100
%Shooting Menu 2
Keystone Comp.
Multiple Exposure
HDR
Bracketing
High Res Shot
Live ND Shooting
Back Set
Anti-Shock r/Silent s
Off
On
The current setting
is displayed
Function
Q
4
Use FG to highlight an option and press the Q button to select.
• Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menu.
• For the default settings of each option, refer to “Default Settings” (P. 301).
• Depending on camera status and settings, some items may be unavailable. Items that are
not available are grayed out and cannot be selected.
• You can also navigate the menus using the multi selector or the front and rear dials in
place of the arrow pad.
141
EN
Menu functions (Shooting menu)
4
Using Shooting Menu 1/Shooting Menu 2
1
2
1
4:3
Off
o
Off
100
%
Y
F
Back Set
Shooting Menu 1
KK
Picture Mode
Reset / Custom Modes
Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse
j/Y
Image Aspect
Digital Tele-converter
Shooting Menu 1 Shooting Menu 2
WReset / Custom Modes (P. 141)
Picture Mode (P. 106, 142)
KK (P. 100, 142)
Image Aspect (P. 98)
Digital Tele-converter (P. 143)
j/Y (drive) (P. 78, 80)
Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse (P. 144)
XBracketing (P. 146)
HDR (P. 152)
Multiple Exposure (P. 154)
Keystone Comp. (P. 156)
Anti-Shock r/Silent s (P. 157)
High Res Shot (P. 158)
Live ND Shooting (P. 159)
Restoring Default Settings (Reset)
Camera settings can be easily restored to default settings. You can opt to reset almost
all settings or only those directly related to photography.
1
Select [Reset / Custom Modes] in W Shooting Menu 1 and press the Q
button.
2
Select [Reset] and press the I button.
100
%
Custom Mode Save Settings
Recall from Custom Mode
Assign to Custom Mode
Reset Basic
Reset / Custom Modes
Back Set
3
Highlight [Full] or [Basic], and press the Q button.
• To reset all settings except the time, date, and a few others, highlight [Full] and press
the Q button. g “Default Settings” (P. 301)
4
Press the Q button in the [Reset / Custom Modes] menu.
5
Select [Yes] and press the Q button.
142
EN
Menu functions (Shooting menu)
4
Saving Settings (Assign to Custom Mode)
Frequently-used settings and shooting modes can be saved to custom modes (C1
through C4) and recalled for use as required simply by rotating the mode dial. Saved
settings can also be recalled directly from the menus. g “Recalling Saved Settings”
(P. 58)
• At default settings, custom modes are equivalent to mode P.
Processing options (Picture Mode)
You can make individual adjustments to contrast, sharpness and other parameters in
[Picture Mode] (P. 106) settings. Changes to parameters are stored for each picture
mode separately.
1
Select [Picture Mode] in W Shooting Menu 1 and
press the Q button.
• The camera will display the picture mode available in the
current shooting mode.
1
2
1
4:3
Off
100
%
Y
F
o
Off
Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse
j/Y
Back Set
Shooting Menu 1
Image Aspect
KK
Picture Mode
Reset / Custom Modes
Digital Tele-converter
2
Select an option with FG and press the Q button.
• Press I to set the detailed options for the selected picture mode. Detailed options are not
available for some picture modes.
• Changes to contrast have no effect at settings other than [Normal].
%
• You can reduce the number of picture mode options displayed in the menu.
g G Custom Menu P > [Picture Mode Settings] (P. 187)
Photo File and Image Size Options (KK)
g “Photo File and Image Size Options (KK)” (P. 100)
• You can change the JPEG image size and compression ratio combination, and [X] and
[W] pixel counts. [K Set], [Pixel Count] g “Combinations of JPEG image sizes and
compression rates (K Set)” (P. 236)
143
EN
Menu functions (Shooting menu)
4
Digital Zoom (Digital Tele-converter)
This option takes a crop at the center of the frame the same dimensions as the size
option currently selected for image quality and zooms it in to fi ll the display. The zoom
ratio increases by about 2×. This allows you to zoom in past the lens’ maximum focal
length, making it a good choice when you are unable to switch lenses or fi nd it diffi cult
to get any closer to your subject.
1
Select [Digital Tele-converter] in W Shooting Menu 1, and press the Q
button.
2
Highlight [On], and press the Q button.
3
Press the MENU button to exit the menus.
• When [On] is selected, the zoom ratio increases by 2×
and a
H
icon is displayed. Pictures will be recorded at
the new zoom ratio.
Digital teleconverter
ISO-A
200
1023
1:02:03
P
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
250 F5.6 0.0
30p
30p
4K
YFYF
100
%
• The digital teleconverter cannot be used with multiple exposure, keystone compensation,
or, fi sheye correction.
• This function is not available when [Movie 6] is assigned to a button using the
[n Button/Dial/Lever] > [n Button Function] option (P. 116, 163) in the video menu.
• JPEG images are recorded at the selected zoom ratio. In the case of RAW images, a
frame shows the zoom crop. A frame showing the zoom crop is displayed on the image
during playback.
• During zoom, the size of the AF targets increases and their number decreases.
%
• [Digital Tele-converter] can be assigned to a button. You then need only press the button
to enable it. g “Assigning functions to buttons (Button Function)” (P. 116)
144
EN
Menu functions (Shooting menu)
4
Shooting automatically with a fi xed interval (Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse)
You can set the camera to shoot automatically with a set time lapse. The shot frames
can also be recorded as into a single movie. This setting is only available in P/A/S/M
modes.
1
Select [Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse] in W Shooting
Menu 1 and press the Q button.
1
2
1
4:3
Off
100
%
Y
F
o
Off
Back Set
Shooting Menu 1
KK
Picture Mode
Reset / Custom Modes
Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse
j/Y
Image Aspect
Digital Tele-converter
2
Select [On] and press I.
3
Adjust the following settings and press the Q button.
Number of Frames Choose the number of frames shot.
Start Waiting Time Choose how long the camera waits before starting interval timer
photography and taking the fi rst shot.
Interval Length Choose how long the camera waits between shots once shooting
has begun.
Time Lapse Movie
Choose whether to record a time-lapse movie.
[Off]: The camera saves the individual shots but does not use them
to create a time-lapse movie.
[On]: The camera records the individual shots and also uses them to
create a time-lapse movie.
Movie Settings Choose the frame size ([Movie Resolution]) and frame rate ([Frame
Rate]) for movies created using [Time Lapse Movie].
4
Press the Q button repeatedly to return to W Shooting Menu 1.
• Press the MENU button to exit the menus.
• A 99 icon will appear in the shooting display (the icon
shows the selected number of shots). Interval-timer photography
ISO-A
200
1023
1:02:03
P
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
250 F5.6
99
0.0
30p
30p
4K
YFYF
100
%
5
Take pictures.
• The 99 icon will turn green and the number of shots remaining will be displayed.
• Frames are shot even if the image is not in focus after AF. If you wish to fi x the focus
position, shoot in MF.
• [Rec View] (P. 176) starts in 0.5 seconds.
145
EN
Menu functions (Shooting menu)
4
• If the time until shooting or the shooting interval is 1 minute 31 seconds or longer, the
monitor will go dark and the camera will enter sleep mode if no operations are performed
for 1 minute. The camera and monitor will reactivate automatically 10 seconds before a
picture is taken, and can be reactivated manually by pressing the shutter button.
• The camera automatically selects [S-AF] for AF mode (P. 64) in place of [C-AF] and
[C-AF+TR], and [S-AFb] in place of [C-AFb] and [C-AF+TRb].
• When [FAF] is selected as the AF mode, focus to initiate shooting, then lock focus and
start recording.
• Touch operations are disabled during time lapse shooting.
• Time-lapse shooting cannot be combined with bracketing, multiple exposure, HDR, or the
live ND fi ler.
• The fl ash will not work if the fl ash charging time is longer than the interval between shots.
• Choosing a value over 1000 for [Number of Frames] selects [Off] for [Time Lapse Movie].
• If any of still pictures are not recorded correctly, the time lapse movie will not be
generated.
• If there is insuffi cient space on the card, the time lapse movie will not be recorded.
• Time lapse shooting will be canceled if any of the following is operated:
Mode dial, MENU button, q button, lens release button, or connecting the USB cable.
• Turning the camera off ends interval-timer photography.
• If there is not enough charge left on the battery, the shooting may end partway through.
Make sure the battery is charged enough before shooting.
• Time-lapse movies created at a size of [4K] may not display on some computer systems.
More information is available on the OLYMPUS website.
146
EN
Menu functions (Shooting menu)
4
Varying settings over a series of photographs (Bracketing)
Bracketing is used to vary shooting settings such as exposure and white balance
over a series of shots. Depending on the setting, you may be able to combine several
different forms of bracketing. Use bracketing if you are unsure what settings to use or
lack the time needed to change settings during shooting. You can also store bracketing
settings and later recall them simply by turning bracketing on.
AE BKT (AE bracketing)
The camera varies the exposure of each shot. You can select
the bracketing increment from 0.3 EV, 0.7 EV, and 1.0 EV. In
single-frame shooting mode, one photograph is taken each
time the shutter button is pressed all the way down, while in
sequential shooting mode the camera continues to take shots
in the following order while the shutter button is pressed all the
way down: no modifi cation, negative, positive.
• Number of shots: Choose from 2, 3, 5, or 7.
• A t icon is displayed in green until all the shots in the bracketing sequence have been
taken.
• The camera modifi es exposure by varying aperture and shutter speed (mode P), shutter
speed (mode A), aperture (mode S), or ISO sensitivity (mode M).
• If an option other than [AUTO] is selected for [ISO] (P. 75, 91) in mode M, the
camera will instead modify exposure by varying shutter speed.
• The camera brackets the value currently selected for exposure compensation.
• The size of the bracketing increment changes with the value selected for [EV Step]
(P. 191).
• Exposure bracketing cannot be combined with FL or focus bracketing.
WB BKT (WB bracketing)
Three images with different white balances (adjusted in
specifi ed color directions) are automatically created from one
shot, starting with the value currently selected for white balance.
• White balance can be varied by 2, 4, or 6 steps on each of
the A – B (Amber – Blue) and G – M (Green – Magenta) axes.
• The camera brackets the value currently selected for white
balance compensation.
• WB bracketing cannot be combined with ART or focus bracketing.
ART BKT
ISO BKT
Focus BKT
WB BKT
AE BKT
FL BKT
100
%
--
--
--
--
A-- G--
3f 1.0EV
Back Set
Bracketing
Off
2f 0.3EV
2f 0.7EV
2f 1.0EV
3f 0.3EV
3f 0.7EV
3f 1.0EV
WB BKT
A-B G-M
3f 4Step 3f 4Step
100
%
Back Set
147
EN
Menu functions (Shooting menu)
4
FL BKT (FL bracketing)
The camera varies fl ash level over three shots (no modifi cation
on the fi rst shot, negative on the second, and positive on the
third). The amount can be chosen from 0.3, 0.7, and 1.0 EV.
In single-frame shooting mode, one photograph is taken each
time the shutter button is pressed all the way down, while in
sequential shooting mode the camera continues to take shots
in the following order while the shutter button is pressed all the
way down: no modifi cation, negative, positive.
• A t icon is displayed in green until all the shots in the bracketing sequence have been
taken.
• The size of the bracketing increment changes with the value selected for [EV Step]
(P. 191).
• Flash bracketing cannot be combined with AE or focus bracketing.
ISO BKT (ISO bracketing)
The camera varies the sensitivity over three shots while keeping
the shutter speed and aperture fi xed. You can select the
bracketing increment from 0.3 EV, 0.7 EV, and 1.0 EV. Each
time the shutter button is pressed, the camera shoots three
frames with the set sensitivity (or if auto sensitivity is selected,
the optimal sensitivity setting) on the fi rst shot, negative
modifi cation on the second shot, and positive modifi cation on
the third shot.
• The size of the bracketing increment does not change with the value selected for [ISO
Step] (P. 191).
• Bracketing is performed regardless of the upper limit set with [K ISO-Auto Set] (P. 191).
• During silent photography, the fl ash sync speed is set to 1/20 s.
• ISO sensitivity bracketing cannot be combined with ART or focus bracketing.
ART BKT (ART bracketing)
Create multiple copies of each picture, each with a different art
fi lter (picture mode) applied. The options selected are indicated
by checks (v).
• With the exceptions of AE and FL bracketing, ART bracketing
cannot be combined with other forms of bracketing.
ART BKT
ISO BKT
Focus BKT
WB BKT
AE BKT
FL BKT --
--
--
--
A-- G--
3f 1.0EV
100
%
Back Set
Bracketing
Off
3f 0.3EV
3f 0.7EV
3f 1.0EV3f 1.0EV
ART BKT
ISO BKT
Focus BKT
WB BKT
AE BKT
FL BKT --
--
--
--
A-- G--
3f 1.0EV
100
%
Back Set
Bracketing
Off
3f 0.3EV
3f 0.7EV
3f 1.0EV
ART BKT
H
100
%
Pop Art 2
Pop Art 1
Soft Focus
Pale&Light Color 1
Pale&Light Color 2
Light Tone
Grainy Film 1
Back
148
EN
Menu functions (Shooting menu)
4
Focus BKT (Focus bracketing)
Take a series of shots at different focus positions. Focus moves
successively farther from the initial focus position. Choose the
number of shots using [Set number of shots] and the change
in focus distance using [Set focus differential]. Choose smaller
values for [Set focus differential] to narrow the change in focus
distance, larger values to widen it. If you are using a fl ash other
than the dedicated fl ash unit, you can specify the time it takes to
charge using the [#Charge Time] option.
Press the shutter button all the way down and release it
immediately. Shooting will continue until the selected number of
shots is taken or until the shutter button is pressed all the way
down again.
• Focus bracketing is not available with lenses that have
mounts conforming to the Four-Thirds standard.
• Focus bracketing ends if zoom is adjusted during shooting.
• Shooting ends when focus reaches infi nity.
• Pictures taken using focus bracketing are shot in silent
mode.
• To use the fl ash, select [Allow] for [Silent s Mode Settings]
(P. 157) > [Flash Mode].
• Focus bracketing cannot be combined with other forms of
bracketing.
• The fl ash sync speed is set to 1/50 s. Selecting a value over
ISO 8000 for [K ISO] sets the fl ash sync speed to 1/20 s.
• Olympus Workspace can be used to stack [Focus BKT]
pictures taken using lenses that support [Focus Stacking].
• See the OLYMPUS website for information on the lenses
that can be used with [Focus Stacking].
ART BKT
ISO BKT
Focus BKT
WB BKT
AE BKT
FL BKT
3f 1.0EV
--
--
--
--
A-- G--
100
%
Back Set
Bracketing
Off
On
Set number of shots
Back Set
003
100
%
On
8
5
Focus BKT
100
%
Back Set
Set number of shots
Focus Stacking
Set focus differential
#Charge Time 0sec
10
1
3
Wide
Narrow
#Charge Time
30sec
Select time between shutter
release for flash recharge.
This setting is not necessary
when using an Olympus flash.
100
%
Back Set
149
EN
Menu functions (Shooting menu)
4
Focus BKT (Focus Stacking)
The camera automatically shifts focus over a series of from 3 to
15 shots and combines to create a single JPEG image that is in
focus all the way from the foreground to background.
The camera automatically takes 3 to 15 shots bracketing the
current focus position.
• If focus stacking fails, the camera will record the selected
number of photos without creating a composite image.
• Shooting will end if zoom is adjusted after the shutter button has been pressed all the way
down to start focus stacking photography.
• The angle of view for composited images is narrower than the original images.
• A frame indicating the fi nal crop will be shown in the display.
Compose the shot with your subject in the frame.
• Guide line selected in [Displayed Grid] (P. 189) will not be
displayed.
• Pictures taken with [e-Portrait] or an art fi lter selected for
picture mode are recorded in [Natural] mode.
• See the OLYMPUS website for information on the lenses
that can be used with [Focus Stacking].
• Focus stacking cannot be combined with other forms of bracketing.
Using Bracketing
1
Select [Bracketing] in X Shooting Menu 2 and
press the Q button.
1
2
2
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
100
%Shooting Menu 2
Keystone Comp.
Multiple Exposure
HDR
Bracketing
High Res Shot
Live ND Shooting
Back Set
Anti-Shock r/Silent s
2
After selecting [On], press I and select a bracket
shooting type.
• A menu of bracketing types will be displayed.
1
2
2
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
100
%Shooting Menu 2
Keystone Comp.
Multiple Exposure
HDR
Bracketing
High Res Shot
Live ND Shooting
Back Set
Anti-Shock r/Silent s
Off
On
3
Highlight a bracketing type using the FG buttons
and press the I button.
• The camera will display bracketing options for the
selected bracketing type.
ART BKT
ISO BKT
Focus BKT
WB BKT
AE BKT
FL BKT
3f 1.0EV
--
--
--
--
A-- G--
100
%
Back Set
Bracketing
Off
8
5
100
%
Set number of shots
Focus Stacking
Set focus differential
#Charge Time 0sec
Focus BKT
Back Set
ISO-A
200
1023
1:02:03
P
100
%
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
250 F5.6
BKT
0.0
30p
30p
4K
YFYF
150
EN
Menu functions (Shooting menu)
4
4
Using the FGHI buttons, select [On] or a bracketing program.
• AE BKT
Highlight the number of shots (for example, 2f) and
press the I button to view bracketing amounts. Use the
FG buttons to highlight an amount and press Q to
select the highlighted option and return to the previous
display.
ART BKT
ISO BKT
Focus BKT
WB BKT
AE BKT
FL BKT
100
%
--
--
--
--
A-- G--
3f 1.0EV
Back Set
Bracketing
Off
2f 0.3EV
2f 0.7EV
2f 1.0EV
3f 0.3EV
3f 0.7EV
3f 1.0EV
• WB BKT
You will be prompted to choose a color axis (A–B or
G–M). Use the HI buttons to highlight an axis and the
FG buttons to choose the bracketing amount. Press
the Q to return to the previous display when settings
are complete.
WB BKT
A-B G-M
3f 4Step 3f 4Step
100
%
Back Set
• ART BKT
Highlight [On] and press the I button to display a menu
of picture modes and art fi lters. Use the FG buttons
to highlight the desired fi lters and press the Q button
to select (selected fi lters are indicated by check marks).
Press the MENU button to return to the previous
display when settings are complete.
ART BKT
H
100
%
Pop Art 2
Pop Art 1
Soft Focus
Pale&Light Color 1
Pale&Light Color 2
Light Tone
Grainy Film 1
Back
• Focus BKT
Highlight [On] and press the I button to view focus
bracketing settings. Use the FG buttons to highlight
a setting and press the I button to display options.
Use the FG buttons to highlight an option and press
the Q button to return to the setting menu. Press the
Q button again to return to the bracketing menu when
settings are complete. The [Focus BKT] menu is also
used for [Focus Stacking] settings (P. 149).
Off
8
5
100
%
Set number of shots
Focus Stacking
Set focus differential
#Charge Time 0sec
Focus BKT
Back Set
5
With [On] selected, press the Q button to save changes and exit.
6
Confi rm that [On] is selected for [Bracketing] and
press the Q button.
• To save changes without enabling bracketing, press the
MENU button or highlight [Off] and press the Q button.
1
2
2
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
100
%Shooting Menu 2
Keystone Comp.
Multiple Exposure
HDR
Bracketing
High Res Shot
Live ND Shooting
Back Set
Anti-Shock r/Silent s
Off
On
7
Take pictures.
• A t icon is displayed when bracketing is active.
151
EN
Menu functions (Shooting menu)
4
• Bracketing cannot be combined with HDR, interval-timer photography, keystone
compensation, multiple-exposure photography, High Res Shot, fi sheye compensation, or
the live ND fi ler.
• Bracketing is not available if there is not enough space on the camera’s memory card for
the selected number of frames.
• AE, FL, and focus bracketing are not available in mode B.
%
• [BKT] can be assigned to a camera control, which can then be used to enable or disable
bracketing, choose the bracketing type, or adjust bracketing settings. g “Assigning
functions to buttons (Button Function)” (P. 116)
152
EN
Menu functions (Shooting menu)
4
Taking HDR (High Dynamic Range) images (HDR)
The camera varies exposure over a series of shots, selects from each tone range
with the highest level of detail, and combines them to create a single picture with a
wide dynamic range. If the photo features a high-contrast subject, details that would
otherwise be lost in shadows or highlights will be preserved.
• This option is available in P, A, S, and M modes.
1
Press the MENU button to display the menus.
2
Highlight [HDR] in X Shooting Menu 2 and press I
on the arrow pad.
1
2
2
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
100
%Shooting Menu 2
Keystone Comp.
Multiple Exposure
HDR
Bracketing
High Res Shot
Live ND Shooting
Back Set
Anti-Shock r/Silent s
3
Highlight an option using the FG buttons and
press the Q button.
• X Shooting Menu 2 will be displayed.
100
%HDR
HDR1
Takes 4 pictures at once
at different exposures and
composites automatically into
a high contrast image.
Back Set
HDR1
Each time you take a photo, the camera will take a series of shots while varying
exposure and combine them into a single picture. Choose [HDR1] for natural-
looking results, [HDR2] for a more painterly effect.
• [K ISO] is fi xed at ISO 200.
• Shutter speeds can be as slow as 4 s. Shooting will continue for up to 15 s.
• Picture mode is fi xed at [Natural] and color space at [sRGB].
• The combined picture is saved in JPEG format. If [RAW] is selected for image
quality, it will instead be recorded in RAW + JPEG format.
HDR2
3f 2.0EV Each time you take a photo, the camera will vary
exposure over a series of shots. The shots are not
combined to create a single picture. The shots can
however be combined using HDR software on a
computer or other device.
3f 2.0EV
Number of
shots Exposure
range
5f 2.0EV
7f 2.0EV
3f 3.0EV
5f 3.0EV
4
Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.
• The camera will return to the shooting display. An c
icon will be displayed.
• The drive mode will be fi xed at T (sequential high).
c icon
ISO
200
1023
1:02:03
P
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
250 F5.6 0.0
T
30p
30p
4K
YFYF
100
%
HDR
153
EN
Menu functions (Shooting menu)
4
5
Take pictures.
• Each time you press the shutter button, the camera will take the selected number of
shots.
• In [HDR1] and [HDR2] modes, the camera will automatically combine the shots into a
single picture.
• Exposure compensation is available in modes P, A, and S.
• In mode M, the camera takes the values selected for aperture and shutter speed as a
base for HDR photography.
• Use a tripod or take similar measures to fi x the camera in place.
• The image displayed in the monitor or viewfi nder during shooting differs from the fi nal
HDR picture.
• Noise may appear in the fi nal picture when a slower shutter speed is selected in [HDR1]
or [HDR2] mode.
• The following cannot be used:
fl ash photography, bracketing, multiple exposure, interval-timer photography, keystone
compensation, the live ND fi ler, fi sheye correction, and High Res Shot.
%
• [HDR] can be assigned to a button. You then need only press the button to enable it.
g “Assigning functions to buttons (Button Function)” (P. 116)
154
EN
Menu functions (Shooting menu)
4
Recording multiple exposures in a single image
(Multiple Exposure)
Take two shots and combine them into a single picture. Alternatively, you can take a
shot and combine it with an existing picture stored on the memory card.
The combined image is recorded at current image quality settings. Only RAW pictures
can be selected for multiple exposures that include an existing image.
If you record a multiple exposure with RAW selected for [KK], you can then select
it for subsequent multiple exposures using [Overlay], allowing you to create multiple
exposures combining three or more photographs.
• This option is available in P, A, S, M, and B modes.
1
Select [Multiple Exposure] in X Shooting Menu 2 and press the Q button.
2
Use FG to select the item and press I.
• Use FG to select the setting and press the Q button. Auto Gain
Number of Frames
Overlay
Off
Off
Off
Multiple Exposure
100
%
Back Set
Number of
Frames [Off]: Do not create additional multiple exposures.
[2f]: Create a multiple exposure from 2 pictures.
Auto Gain [On]: Halve the brightness of each picture in the multiple exposure.
[Off]: Do not adjust brightness the brightness of the pictures in the
multiple exposure.
Overlay
[On]: Shoot a multiple exposure that includes an existing RAW image
stored on the memory card.
[Off]: Create a multiple exposure from the next 2 pictures taken.
• [Overlay] is only available when [2f] is selected for [Number of
Frames].
3
If [On] is selected for [Overlay], you will be
prompted to choose a picture for the multiple
exposure.
• Highlight a picture using the arrow pad (FGHI) and
press the Q button.
• Only RAW images can be selected.
100
%
RAW RAW RAW
RAW
RAW RAW RAW
Overlay
Back Set
4
Press the Q button in the multiple exposure menu to save the selected
settings.
• The shooting menu will be displayed.
155
EN
Menu functions (Shooting menu)
4
5
Press the MENU button to exit the menus.
• A a icon will be displayed.
• If [Overlay] is selected, the chosen photograph will be
visible superimposed on the view through the lens.
a icon
1023
1:02:03
P
100
%
250 F5.6
ISO-A
200
0.0
6
Take pictures.
• The fi rst shot (or if [Overlay] is selected, the previously-chosen photograph) will be
visible superimposed on the view through the lens as you compose the next shot.
• The a icon turns green.
• Normally, a multiple exposure will be created after the second shot is taken.
• Pressing the button allows you to retake the fi rst shot.
• If [On] is selected for [Overlay], you can take additional pictures that will be overlaid
on the previously-chosen photograph.
7
Press the MENU button or press the q button to end multiple exposure
photography.
• If you end multiple exposure photography by pressing the MENU button, [Off] will be
selected for [Number of Frames] in the multiple exposure menu.
• The a icon clears from the display when multiple exposure photography ends.
• The camera will not enter sleep mode during multiple exposure photography.
• Pictures taken with other cameras cannot be used for multiple exposures.
• RAW pictures taken using High Res Shot cannot be used for multiple exposures.
• The RAW pictures listed in the image-selection display when [On] is selected for [Overlay]
are those processed using the settings in effect at the time the photograph was taken.
• Exit multiple exposure mode before adjusting shooting settings. Some settings cannot be
adjusted while multiple exposure mode is in effect.
• Performing any of the following operations after the fi rst shot is taken ends multiple
exposure photography:
turning the camera off, pressing the q or MENU button, choosing a different shooting
mode, or connecting cables of any type. Multiple exposure is also canceled when the
battery is exhausted.
• The image-selection display for [Overlay] shows the JPEG copies of photographs taken
with RAW + JPEG selected for image quality.
• Live composite photography ([LIVE COMP]) is not available in mode B.
• The following are not available in multiple exposure mode:
HDR, bracketing, interval-timer photography, keystone compensation, the live ND fi ler,
fi sheye correction, and High Res Shot.
• Pictures taken with RAW selected for [KK] can also be overlaid during playback.
156
EN
Menu functions (Shooting menu)
4
Keystone correction and perspective control (Keystone Comp.)
Keystone distortion due to the infl uence of lens focal length and proximity to the subject
can be corrected, or enhanced to exaggerate the effects of perspective. Keystone
compensation can be previewed in the monitor during shooting. The corrected image is
created from a smaller crop, slightly increasing the effective zoom ratio.
• This option is available in P, A, S, M, and B modes.
1
Select [Keystone Comp.] in X Shooting Menu 2, and press the Q button.
2
Highlight [On], and press the Q button.
3
Press the MENU button to exit the menus.
• The camera will switch to the keystone compensation
display. A slider and z icon be displayed. Keystone compensation
P
250250 F5.6
100
%
4
Frame the shot and adjust keystone compensation while viewing your subject
in the display.
• Rotate the front dial to make horizontal adjustments and the rear dial to make vertical
adjustments.
• Frame the shot and adjust keystone compensation while viewing your subject in the
display.
• Use the arrow pad (FGHI) to position the crop. The direction in which the crop
can be moved is shown by an arrow ( ).
• To cancel changes, press and hold the Q button.
5
To adjust aperture, shutter speed, and other shooting settings, press the
INFO button.
• Standard shooting indicators will be displayed.
• A z icon is displayed while keystone compensation is enabled. The icon is displayed
in green if adjustments have been made to keystone compensation settings.
• To return to the keystone compensation display shown in Step 4, press the INFO
button repeatedly.
6
Take pictures.
• Pictures may seem “grainy” depending on the amount of compensation performed. The
amount of compensation also determines the amount the picture will be enlarged when
cropped and whether the crop can be moved.
• Depending on the amount of compensation, you may be unable to reposition the crop.
• Depending on the amount of compensation performed, the selected AF target may not be
visible in the display. If the AF target is outside the frame, its direction is indicated by a g,
h, i, or j icon in the display.
157
EN
Menu functions (Shooting menu)
4
• Pictures taken with [RAW] for image quality are recorded in RAW + JPEG format.
• The following cannot be used:
live composite photography, burst photography, bracketing, HDR, multiple exposure,
the live ND fi ler, fi sh-eye correction, the digital teleconverter, movie recording, [C-AF],
[C-AFb], [C-AF+TR], and [C-AF+TRb] AF modes, [e-Portrait] and art fi lter picture
modes, the custom self-timer, and High Res Shot.
• Lens converters may not produced the desired results.
• Be sure to provide [K Image Stabilizer] data for lenses that are not part of the Four
Thirds or Micro Four Thirds family (P. 97).
• Where applicable, keystone compensation will be performed using the focal length
supplied for [K Image Stabilizer] (P. 97) or [Lens Info Settings] (P. 239).
%
• [Keystone Comp.] can be assigned to a button. You then need only press the button to
enable keystone compensation. g “Assigning functions to buttons (Button Function)”
(P. 116)
Setting anti-shock/silent shooting (Anti-Shock r/Silent s)
By setting anti-shock (P. 80)/silent shooting (P. 81), you can select anti-shock or
silent shooting when using sequential shooting/self-timer (P. 78).
1
Select [Anti-Shock r/Silent s] in X Shooting Menu 2 and press the Q
button.
2
Use FG to select the item and press I.
• Use FG to select the setting and press the Q button.
Anti-Shock r
Choose the delay between the shutter button being pressed all the
way down and the shutter being released in anti-shock mode. Use
this mode to suppress small vibrations caused by the operation
of the shutter. Anti-shock mode is available in both sequential
shooting and self-timer modes (P. 78). Select [Off] to disable anti-
shock mode when it is not in use.
Silent s
Choose the delay between the shutter button being pressed all
the way down and the shutter being released in silent mode. Use
this option in settings in which the sound of the shutter would
be unwelcome. Silent mode supports both the self-timer and
sequential shooting (P. 78). Select [Off] to disable silent mode
when it is not in use.
Noise Reduction s
Select [Auto] to reduce image “noise” in long exposures during
silent photography. The sound of the shutter may be audible when
noise reduction is active.
Silent s Mode
Settings
Choose whether to enable [8], [AF Illuminator], or [Flash Mode] in
silent mode.
Select [Allow] to use current settings for the selected item, [Not
Allow] to ignore current settings and disable the selected item.
158
EN
Menu functions (Shooting menu)
4
Setting high resolution shooting (High Res Shot)
By specifying the setting for [High Res Shot] (P. 83), high resolution shooting can
be activated by selecting h from options for sequential shooting/self-timer mode
(P. 78).
1
Select [High Res Shot] in X Shooting Menu 2 and press the Q button.
2
Use FG to select the item and press I.
• Use FG to select the setting and press the Q button.
High Res Shot
Choose how long the camera waits to begin shooting after the
shutter button is pressed all the way down. Use this option to
prevent blur caused by the camera moving when the shutter button
is pressed. Select [Off] to disable High Res Shot.
#Charge Time Choose how the long the camera waits for the fl ash to charge for
High Res Shots taken with the fl ash. You need not specify a value
when using an external fl ash.
Shooting Method
[Tripod]: Take photos with the camera on a tripod or otherwise
secured. RAW pictures are recorded at a size of 80 megapixels
(10368×7776).
• The fl ash sync speed is 1/50 s.
• The maximum value for [K ISO] is 1600.
[Handheld]: Take hand-held shots. The camera takes slightly
longer to record pictures. RAW pictures are recorded at a size of
50 megapixels (8160×6120).
• The fl ash is disabled.
• The maximum value for [K ISO] is 6400.
• Electronic shutter is used for high resolution shooting.
159
EN
Menu functions (Shooting menu)
4
Slowing the Shutter in Bright Light (Live ND Shooting)
The camera makes a series of exposures and combines to create a single photo that
appears to have been taken at a slow shutter speed.
• This option is available in modes S and M.
• Changing exposure compensation or shutter speed resets the [LV Simulation] display.
1
Highlight [Live ND Shooting] in X Shooting Menu 2
and press the Q button.
1
2
2
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
100
%Shooting Menu 2
Keystone Comp.
Multiple Exposure
HDR
Bracketing
High Res Shot
Live ND Shooting
Back Set
Anti-Shock r/Silent s
2
Highlight [On] using the FG buttons and press the
I button.
1
2
2
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
100
%Shooting Menu 2
Keystone Comp.
Multiple Exposure
HDR
Bracketing
High Res Shot
Live ND Shooting
Back Set
Anti-Shock r/Silent s
Off
On
3
Use FG to select the item and press I.
• Use FG to select the setting and press the Q button. 1EV
Off
100
%
LV Simulation
ND Number
Live ND Shooting
Back Set
ND Number
Choose an ND fi lter type; the camera will convert it to an exposure
value and reduce exposure by that amount. Options are available in
increments of 1 EV:
[ND2 (1EV)], [ND4 (2EV)], [ND8 (3EV)], [ND16 (4EV)], [ND32 (5EV)]
LV Simulation
Choose whether to preview the effect of the selected fi lter at the
current shutter speed.
[On]: The effects of shutter speed are shown in the display.
[Off]: Use the standard shooting display.
4
To take pictures using the live ND fi lter, highlight
[On] and press the Q button, or select [Off] to
proceed without enabling the live ND fi lter.
• X Shooting Menu 2 will be displayed.
1
2
2
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
100
%Shooting Menu 2
Keystone Comp.
Multiple Exposure
HDR
Bracketing
High Res Shot
Live ND Shooting
Back Set
Anti-Shock r/Silent s
Off
On
160
EN
Menu functions (Shooting menu)
4
5
Press the MENU button to exit the menus.
• If you selected [On] for [Live ND Shooting], live ND fi lter photography will now start.
• An icon appears in the display when the live ND fi lter is
enabled.
• To end live ND fi lter photography, select [Off] in the [Live
ND Shooting] display shown in Step 2.
Live ND shooting
ISO-A
200
1023
1:02:03
S
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
30 F5.6 0.0
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
30p
30p
4K
YFYF
ND8
LVLV
100
%
6
Adjust shutter speed while previewing the results in
the display.
• Adjust shutter speed using the rear dial.
• The slowest shutter speed available varies with the ND
fi lter selected.
[ND2 (1EV)]: 1/30 s
[ND4 (2EV)]: 1/15 s
[ND8 (3EV)]: 1/8 s
[ND16 (4EV)]: 1/4 s
[ND32 (5EV)]: 1/2 s
ISO-A
200
1023
1:02:03
S
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
30 F5.6 0.0
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
30p
30p
4K
YFYF
ND8
LVLV
100
%
Shutter speed
• If [On] is selected for [LV Simulation], the effects of changes to shutter speed can be
previewed in the display.
7
Take pictures.
• The camera requires a length of time equivalent to the selected shutter speed to
produce [LV Simulation] results similar to the fi nal image.
• The upper limit for [K ISO] during live ND photography is ISO 800. This also applies
when [AUTO] is selected for [K ISO].
• Enabling the live ND fi lter sets the drive mode to ♥o.
• The following cannot be used:
HDR, High Res Shot, multiple exposure, keystone compensation, bracketing, interval-
timer photography, K fl icker scan, fl ickerless photography, and fi sheye correction.
• Unlike physical ND fi lters, the live ND fi lter does not reduce the amount of light reaching
the image sensor, and consequently very bright subjects may be overexposed.
%
• [Live ND Shooting] can be assigned to a button. You then need only press the button
to toggle [Live ND Shooting] [On] or [Off]. g “Assigning functions to buttons (Button
Function)” (P. 116)
• To adjust live ND fi lter settings, hold the button to which [Live ND Shooting] is assigned
and rotate the front or rear dial.
161
EN
Menu functions (Video menu)
4
Using the Video Menu
Movie recording functions are set in the Video Menu.
1
2
On
123
min
Video Menu
Back Set
nButton/Dial/Lever
nAF/IS Settings
nSpecification Settings
nMode Settings
nDisplay Settings
Movie R
nHDMI Output
Option Description g
n Mode Settings Adjust settings for movie recording. —
n Mode Choose a movie record mode. 165
n Flicker Scan Select [On] to reduce fl icker caused by LED lighting.
Rotate the front or rear dial or use FG on the arrow
pad to choose the shutter speed at which fl icker
reduction applies.
166
n Specifi cation
Settings Adjust image quality for movies. —
nKChoose the image quality size and bit rate. 167
b ISO-Auto Set [Upper Limit / Default]: Choose the maximum and
standard ISO sensitivity values available to auto ISO
sensitivity control when [AUTO] is selected for [n ISO]
in [n Mode] (movie exposure mode) [M].
[b ISO-Auto]: [AUTO] is available for [n ISO] when
[M] is selected for [n Mode] (movie exposure mode).
Auto ISO sensitivity control settings can be adjusted
using [Upper Limit / Default].
75
n Noise Filter Select a noise reduction level for recording high-
sensitivity movies. —
n WB Choose a white balance mode for movie recording. 94
n All xFine-tune white balance across the board.
[All Set]: Fine-tune white balance for all modes.
[All Reset]: Reset fi ne-tuning for all modes to default
values.
96
nW Keep Warm
Color Choose [On] to preserve warm colors in movies shot
under incandescent lighting when [AUTO] is selected for
white balance.
94,
96
n Picture Mode Choose [On] to enable selection of a picture mode
specifi cally for use when recording movies. 106
162
EN
Menu functions (Video menu)
4
Option Description g
n AF/IS Settings Choose focus and image stabilization settings for use
when recording movies. —
n AF Mode Choose the AF mode for movie recording. 64, 91
n C-AF Speed Choose how quickly the camera responds to changes
to the distance to subject when [C-AF] or [C-AF+TR] is
selected for focus mode. —
n C-AF Sensitivity Choose how rapidly the camera responds to changes
in the distance to the subject while focusing with [C-AF]
or [C-AF+TR] selected for [n AF Mode]. This can help
autofocus track a quickly-moving subject or prevent the
camera refocusing when an object passes between the
subject and the camera.
• Choose from three levels of tracking sensitivity.
• Select +1 for increased sensitivity. Choose this option
for subjects that are moving toward or away from
the camera or changing speed unpredictably or for
subjects that suddenly enter the frame.
• Select −1 for reduced sensitivity. Choose this option
to prevent the camera refocusing when the subject
is briefl y obscured by other objects or to prevent the
camera focusing on the background when you are
unable to keep the AF target positioned over a quickly-
moving subject.
—
n Image Stabilizer Adjust image stabilization settings for movie recording. 97
n IS Level Choose the amount of image stabilization applied.
[+1]: Choose for static hand-held shots.
[±0]: Recommended in most situations.
[−1]: Choose for hand-held panning, tilting, or tracking
shots.
—
163
EN
Menu functions (Video menu)
4
Option Description g
n Button/Dial/Lever Choose the roles played by camera buttons, dials, and
levers in movie mode. —
n Button Function Choose the roles played by camera buttons in movie
mode. 116
n Dial Function Choose the roles played by front and rear dials in movie
mode. 168
n Fn Lever
Function Choose the functions that can be selected using the
Fn lever in movie mode. The Fn lever switches to the
function set with [n Dial Function] when set to [mode1].
To choose the function selected using the Fn lever,
highlight [mode2], press I, and choose from AF mode,
AF target mode, and AF target selection. This setting
has no effect when [mode3] is selected for [K Fn Lever
Function] (P. 185) or when [Power 1] or [Power 2] is
selected for [Fn Lever/Power Lever] (P. 185).
—
n Shutter Function Choose the role played by shutter button in movie mode.
When set to [w], pressing the shutter button initiates
autofocus. Still image photography is not available.
When set to [R REC], movie recording can be started
or stopped by pressing the shutter button all the way
down. The R button cannot be used for starting or
stopping movie recording with this setting.
—
n Elec. Zoom
Speed Choose the zoom speed for power zoom lenses. This
can be used for slow zooms on your subject and other
effects. Choose from [Low], [Normal], and [High]. —
164
EN
Menu functions (Video menu)
4
Option Description g
n Display Settings Adjust display settings for movie mode. —
n Control Settings Choose whether live controls (P. 225) and the live
super control panel (P. 88) are displayed in movie
mode. For setting not to display, select the item and
press the Q button to clear the check mark.
—
n Info Settings Choose the information displayed during recording in
movie mode. For setting not to display, select the item
and press the Q button to clear the check mark. —
Time Code Settings Choose how time codes are recorded in movie mode.
Set [Time Code Mode] to [Drop Frame] to record time
codes corrected for errors with respect to recording time,
and to [Non-DF] (no drop frame) to record uncorrected
time codes.
Set [Count Up] to [Rec Run] to run time codes during
recording only, and to [Free Run] to run time codes even
while recording is stopped, including when the camera
is turned off.
In [Starting Time], set a starting time for the time code.
Set [Current Time] to set the time code for the current
frame to 00. To set to 00:00:00:00, select [Reset]. You
can also set time codes using [Manual Input].
—
8 Display Pattern Choose whether the battery level is displayed as a
percentage (“%”) or as minutes remaining (“min”) in
movie mode and during movie recording. —
a View Assist The display can be adjusted for ease of viewing when a
movie-only picture mode option ([k Flat] or [l OM-
Log400]) is selected. Select [On] to adjust the display
hues for ease of viewing.
—
Movie RAudio will not be recorded in a movie when set to [Off]. 169
n HDMI Output Adjust output settings for movies recorded with the
camera connected with an external device via HDMI. —
Output Mode Choose the video output mode. When set to [Monitor
Mode], image and camera information are output. The
camera information is not displayed on the camera
screen.
When set to [Record Mode], only image is output. The
camera information is displayed on the camera screen.
—
REC Bit If set to [On], the REC trigger is sent from the camera to
the connected external device. —
Time Code If set to [On], the time code is sent from the camera to
the connected external device.
• The recording by the external device that uses the
time code as the REC trigger may be stopped in the
following cases.
- When recording an ART movie, etc., under heavy
processing load
- When switching the display between the monitor
and viewfi nder
—
165
EN
Menu functions (Video menu)
4
Choosing an Exposure Mode (n Mode (Movie Exposure Modes))
You can create movies that take advantage of the effects available in P, A, S, and M
modes. This option takes effect when the mode dial is rotated to n.
1
Select [n Mode Settings] in n Video Menu and press the Q button.
2
Select [n Mode] (movie exposure modes) and press I.
3
Use FG to select an option and press the Q button.
POptimal aperture is set automatically according to the brightness of the subject.
Use the front dial or rear dial to adjust exposure compensation.
ADepiction of background is changed by setting the aperture.
Use the front dial to adjust exposure compensation and rear dial to adjust aperture.
SShutter speed affects how the subject appears. Use the front dial to adjust exposure
compensation and rear dial to adjust shutter speed.
Shutter speed can be set to values between 1/24 s and 1/32000 s.
M
Freely adjust both aperture and shutter speed.
Use the front dial to select aperture value and the rear dial to select shutter speed.
• Choose from shutter speeds of 1/24–1/32000 s. Values of ISO 200–6400 are
available using the [n ISO] manual sensitivity control options.
• The display shows the difference between the exposure produced by the selected
aperture and shutter speed and the optimal exposure metered by the camera. The
display will fl ash if the difference exceeds ±3 EV.
• The option chosen for [n Specifi cation Settings] > [b ISO-Auto Set] (P. 161)
takes effect.
• Blurred frames caused by such factors as the subject moving while the shutter is open
can be reduced by selecting the fastest available shutter speed.
• The low end of the shutter speed changes according to the frame rate of the movie record
mode.
• Excessive camera shake may not be compensated enough.
• When the inside of the camera becomes hot, shooting is automatically stopped to protect
the camera.
166
EN
Menu functions (Video menu)
4
Reducing Flicker Under LED Lighting (n Flicker Scan)
Banding may occur in movies fi lmed under LED lighting. Use [n Flicker Scan] to
optimize shutter speed while viewing banding in the display.
This option is in [n Mode] (movie exposure modes) [S] and [M].
• The range of available shutter speeds is reduced.
1
Select [S] or [M] for [n Mode] (movie exposure modes; P. 165).
2
Highlight [n Mode Settings] in the video menu and press the Q button.
3
Highlight [n Flicker Scan] and press I.
4
Highlight [On] using the FG buttons and press the Q button.
5
Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the
menus.
• A P
icon
is displayed when fl icker scan is
enabled.
n
123
min
250.0
P
P icon
6
Choose a shutter speed while viewing the display.
• Choose a shutter speed using the front or rear dial or
the FG buttons. If desired, the shutter speed can be
selected by keeping FG pressed.
• You can also rotate the front dial to adjust shutter speed
in the exposure increments selected for [EV Step] in
G Custom Menu T.
• Continue adjusting shutter speed until banding is no
longer visible in the display.
n
123
min
128.6
P
Shutter speed
• Press the INFO button; the display will change and the
P icon
will no longer
be displayed. You can adjust aperture and exposure compensation. Do so using the
front or rear dial or the arrow pad.
• Press the INFO button repeatedly to return to the fl icker scan display.
7
Begin fi lming when settings are complete.
• Focus peaking, the LV super control panel, and live controls are not available in the fl icker
scan display. To view these items, fi rst press the INFO button to exit the fl icker scan
display.
%
• [n Flicker Scan] can be assigned to a button. You then need only press the button to
enable fl icker scan. g “Assigning functions to buttons (Button Function)” (P. 116)
167
EN
Menu functions (Video menu)
4
Frame Size, Rate, and Compression (nK)
You can set combinations of movie image size and bit rate. The settings can be
selected from options of movie record mode (P. 101).
1
Select [n Specifi cation Settings] in n Video Menu and press the Q button.
2
Select [nK] and press I.
3
Use FG to select the item and press I.
• Use FG to select the setting and press the Q button.
Image size Sets the image size to [C4K] (Custom only), [4K], [FHD] (Full HD), or
[HD].
Bit rate
Sets the bit rate to [A-I] (All-Intra), [SF] (Super Fine), [F] (Fine), or [N]
(Normal).
• When [4K] or [C4K] is set for the image size, you cannot select the
bit rate.
Frame rate
Sets the frame rate to [60p], [50p], [30p], [25p], or [24p].
• [60p] and [50p] are not available in the following situations.
- When [FHD] (Full HD) is set for the image size and [A-I] (All Intra)
is set for the bit rate.
- When [C4K] or [4K] is set for the image size.
• If the image size is set to [C4K], the frame rate is locked to 24p.
• When shooting movies that will be viewed on a television, choose a
frame rate that matches the video standard used in the device, as
otherwise the movie may not play back smoothly. Video standards
vary by country or region: some use NTSC, others PAL.
- When shooting for display on NTSC devices, choose 60p (30p)
- When shooting for display on PAL devices, choose 50p (25p)
Slow or Fast
Motion
Sets slow or fast motion.
Available settings differ depending on the set frame rate.
• Slow and fast motions cannot be used in some image quality modes.
168
EN
Menu functions (Video menu)
4
Assigning Roles to the Front and Rear Dials (n Dial Function)
Choose the roles played by the front and rear dials in n (movie) mode. You can
reverse the roles of the dials or reassign them for ease of use or as required by
shooting conditions. If [mode1] is selected for [n Fn Lever Function], the roles played
by the dials will vary with the position of the Fn lever. Different assignments can be
made for each [n Mode] (movie exposure mode).
The roles assigned to the dials using this item take effect in n (movie) mode. In P,
A, S, M, and B (still photography) modes, the dials perform the roles selected in the
G custom menu.
Role Function
Exposure mode
PASM
Shutter Choose the shutter speed. — — 
FNo. Adjust aperture. — —
FAdjust exposure compensation. 
ISO Adjust ISO sensitivity. — — —
WB Adjust white balance. 
CWB Kelvin Choose a color temperature when CWB
(custom) is selected for white balance. 
RVOL Adjust the recording level. 
PVOL Adjust headphone volume. 
Off None. 
1
Highlight [n Button/Dial/Lever] in the n video menu and press I on the
arrow pad.
2
Highlight [n Dial Function] using the FG buttons and press the I button.
3
Highlight the desired mode and press the I button.
• Choose a dial using the HI buttons and use the FG buttons to choose a role.
• Press the INFO button to move between lever positions.
• Press the Q button when settings are complete.
169
EN
Menu functions (Video menu)
4
Sound Recording Options (Movie R)
Adjust settings for recording sound during fi lming. You can also access settings for use
when an external microphone or recorder is connected.
1
Select [Movie R] in n Video Menu and press the Q button.
2
Select [On] and press I.
3
Use FG to select the item and press I.
• Use FG to select the setting and press the Q button.
Recording Volume
Adjust microphone sensitivity. Choose separate values for the
built-in stereo microphone and external microphones.
[Built-In R]: Adjust the sensitivity of the camera’s built-in stereo
microphone.
[MIC R]: Adjust the sensitivity of external microphones connected
to the microphone jack.
R Volume Limiter Choose the maximum volume at which the camera will record
sound. Use this option to automatically reduce the level of sounds
above a certain volume.
Wind Noise
Reduction Reduce wind noise during audio recording.
Recording Rate Choose an audio recording format.
[96kHz/24bit]: High-quality audio.
[48kHz/16bit]: Standard-quality audio.
R Plug-in Power
Adjust settings for use with condenser microphones and other
devices that draw power from the camera.
[Off]: For devices that do not require power from the camera
(general-purpose dynamic microphones).
[On]: For devices that require power from the camera (condenser
microphones).
Headphone Volume Adjust the volume of audio output to the headphones.
• Operation sounds of the lens and camera may be recorded in a movie. To prevent it from
recording, reduce the operation sounds by setting [n AF Mode] (P. 64) to [S-AF], [MF],
or [PreMF], or by minimizing the button operations of the camera.
• Sound is not recorded:
with high-speed or slow- or fast-motion movies or when k (diorama) is selected for
picture mode.
• When [Movie R] is set to [Off], O is displayed.
• Audio can only be played on devices that support the option selected for [Recording
Rate].
170
EN
Menu functions (Playback menu)
4
Using the Playback Menu
Playback Menu
R (P. 170)
Edit (P. 170)
Print Order (P. 134)
Reset Protect (P. 175)
Reset share Order (P. 175)
Copy All (P. 175)
TWi-Fi Connect (P. 247)
1
2
On
100
%Playback Menu
Reset Protect
Print Order
Edit
R
Reset share Order
Copy All
TWi-Fi Connect
Back Set
Automatically Rotating Portrait-Orientation Pictures for Playback
(R)
If set to [On], images in portrait orientation are automatically rotated to be displayed in
the correct orientation on the playback display.
Retouching Pictures (Edit)
Create retouched copies of pictures. In the case of RAW pictures, you can adjust the
settings in effect at the time the picture was taken, such as white balance and picture
mode (art fi lters included). With JPEG pictures, you can make simple edits such as
cropping and resizing.
The images to be edited can be chosen from those on the card currently selected for
playback. g “Setting the card to record to (Card Slot Settings)” (P. 237)
1
Select [Edit] in the q Playback Menu and press the Q button.
2
Use FG to select [Sel. Image] and press the Q button.
3
Use HI to select the image to be edited and press the Q button.
• [RAW Data Edit] is displayed if a RAW image is selected, and [JPEG Edit] if a JPEG
image is selected. For images recorded in RAW+JPEG format, both [RAW Data Edit]
and [JPEG Edit] are displayed. Select the desired option from them.
4
Select [RAW Data Edit] or [JPEG Edit] and press the Q button.
RAW Data
Edit
Creates a JPEG copy of a RAW image according to the selected settings.
Current
Retouch pictures and save the resulting copies in JPEG
format. Adjust the camera settings before choosing this
option. Some settings such as exposure compensation are
not applied.
Custom1 Press R and adjust settings while previewing the results
in the display. The settings are saved as [Custom1] or
[Custom2].
Custom2
ART BKT The camera creates multiple JPEG copies of each image,
one for each art fi lter selected. Select one or more fi lters
and apply them to one or more images.
171
EN
Menu functions (Playback menu)
4
JPEG Edit
The [JPEG Edit] menu contains the following options.
Shadow Adj. Brighten back-lit subjects.
Redeye Fix Reduce “red-eye” in pictures taken with a fl ash.
PCrop pictures. Size the crop with the front or rear dial
and position it with the arrow pad.
Aspect Change the aspect ratio from the standard 4:3 to [3:2],
[16:9], [1:1], or [3:4]. After choosing an aspect ratio, use
the arrow pad to position the crop.
Black & White Create a black-and-white copy of the current picture.
Sepia Create a sepia copy of the current picture.
Saturation Adjust the vividness of colors. The results can be
previewed in the display.
Q
Create a resized copy 1280 × 960, 640 × 480, or 320 ×
240 pixels in size. Pictures with an aspect ratio other
than the standard 4:3 are resized to dimensions as close
as possible to the selected option.
e-Portrait Smooth complexions. The desired effect may not be
achieved if no faces are detected.
• Red-eye reduction may not produce the desired results with some pictures.
• Retouch is not available:
with pictures that were taken with another camera or edited on a computer or if the
space available on the memory card is insuffi cient.
5
Press the Q button when settings are complete.
• The selected settings will be applied.
6
Press the Q button again.
• Highlight [Yes] using the FG buttons and press the Q
button to save the retouched copy.
RAW Data Edit
100
%
Back Set
Yes
No
• To create additional copies from the same original RAW image, highlight [Reset] and
press the Q button. To exit without creating more copies, highlight [No] and press the Q
button.
• Selecting [Reset] displays the retouch menu. Repeat the process from Step 4.
• You can also edit selected pictures during playback.
q button Display a picture you want to retouch Press the Q button to view
options [RAW Data Edit] or [JPEG Edit]
• Red-eye correction may not work depending on the image.
• The image cannot be resized (Q) to the larger size than the original size.
• [P] (trimming) and [Aspect] can only be used to edit images with an aspect ratio of 4:3
(standard).
• When [ART] is selected for picture mode, [Color Space] (P. 114) will be locked at [sRGB].
172
EN
Menu functions (Playback menu)
4
Combining Pictures (Image Overlay)
Overlay existing RAW photos and to create a new picture. Up to 3 pictures can be
included in the overlay.
The results can be modifi ed by adjusting brightness (gain) separately for each picture.
• The overlay is saved in the format currently selected for image quality. Overlays created
with [RAW] selected for image quality are saved in RAW format and in JPEG format using
the image quality option selected for [K2] (P. 194).
• Overlays saved in RAW format can in turn be combined with other RAW images to create
overlays containing 4 or more pictures.
1
Select [Edit] in the q Playback Menu and press the Q button.
2
Use FG to select [Image Overlay] and press the Q button.
3
Select the number of images to be overlaid and press the Q button.
4
Use FGHI to select the RAW images to be
overlaid.
• Selected pictures are marked with a v. To deselect,
press the Q button again.
• The overlaid image will be displayed if images of the
number specifi ed in step 3 are selected.
5
Adjust the gain for each image to be overlaid.
• Use HI to select an image and FG to adjust gain.
• Gain can be adjusted in the range 0.1 – 2.0. Check the
results in the monitor.
6
Press the Q button to display the confi rmation
dialog.
• Select [Yes] and press the Q button.
RAW RAW RAW
RAW
RAW RAW RAW
100
%Image Overlay
Back Set
×1.5×1.5×0.3 ×0.5
100
%Image Overlay
Back Set
173
EN
Menu functions (Playback menu)
4
Creating Movie Stills (In-Movie Image Capture)
Save a still copy of a selected frame.
• This option is available only with [4K] movies recorded with the camera.
1
Select [Edit] in the q Playback Menu and press the Q button.
2
Use FG to select [Sel. Image] and press the Q button.
3
Use HI to select a movie and press the Q button.
4
Select [Movie Edit] and press the Q button.
5
Use FG to select [In-Movie Image Capture] and press the Q button.
6
Use HI to select a frame to be saved as a still image and press the Q
button.
• The camera will save a still copy of the selected frame.
• Use the F button to go back 2 seconds and the G button to skip ahead 2 seconds.
174
EN
Menu functions (Playback menu)
4
Trimming movies (Movie Trimming)
Cut selected footage from movies. Movies can be trimmed repeatedly to create fi les
containing only footage you want to preserve.
• This option is available only with movies recorded with the camera.
1
Select [Edit] in the q Playback Menu and press the Q button.
2
Use FG to select [Sel. Image] and press the Q button.
3
Use HI to select a movie and press the Q button.
4
Select [Movie Edit] and press the Q button.
5
Use FG to select [Movie Trimming] and press the Q button.
• You will be prompted to choose how you want to save the edited movie.
[New File]: Save the trimmed movie in a new fi le.
[Overwrite]: Overwrite the existing movie.
[No]: Exit without trimming the movie.
• If the image is protected, you cannot select [Overwrite].
6
Highlight the desired option and press the Q button.
• You will be presented with an edit display.
7
Trim the movie.
• Use the F button to skip to the fi rst frame and the G button to skip to the last frame.
• Using the front or rear dial, highlight the fi rst frame of the footage you want to delete
and press the Q button.
• Using the front or rear dial, highlight the last frame of the footage you want to delete
and press the Q button.
8
Highlight [Yes] and press the Q button.
• The edited movie will be saved.
• To select different footage, highlight [No] and press the Q button.
• If you selected [Overwrite], you will be prompted to choose whether to trim additional
footage from the movie. To trim additional footage, highlight [Continue] and press the
Q button.
175
EN
Menu functions (Playback menu)
4
Removing Protection from All Pictures (Reset Protect)
Protections of multiple images can be canceled at a time.
1
Select [Reset Protect] in the q Playback Menu and press the Q button.
• When there are cards in both slots 1 and 2, card slot selection appears. Select a card
slot and press the Q button.
2
Select [Yes] and press the Q button.
Cancelling a share order (Reset share Order)
Cancel share orders that are set on images.
1
Select [Reset share Order] in the q Playback Menu and press the Q
button.
• When there are cards in both slots 1 and 2, card slot selection appears. Select a card
slot and press the Q button.
2
Select [Yes] and press the Q button.
Copying All Pictures (Copy All)
All images can be copied between the cards inserted in the camera (card slot 1 and 2).
1
Select [Copy All] in the q Playback Menu and press the Q button.
2
Select an option and press the Q button.
7All images are copied from the card in card slot 1 to the card in card slot 2.
8All images are copied from the card in card slot 2 to the card in card slot 1.
3
Select [Yes] and press the Q button.
• Copying ends when the destination card is full.
176
EN
Menu functions (Setup menu)
4
Using the setup menu
Adjust basic camera settings. Examples include language
selection and monitor brightness. The setup menu also
contains options used during the initial setup process.
1
2
j±0 k±0
Off
100
%
English
s
W
X Settings
Card Setup
Rec View
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings
Firmware
Back Set
Setup Menu
Option Description g
Card Setup Format the card and delete all images. 177
X Settings
(Date/time setting) Set the camera clock. 33
W (Changing the
display language) Choose a language for camera menus and guides. 35
s (Monitor
brightness adjustment) You can adjust the
brightness and color
temperature of the
monitor. Color temperature
adjustment is only
applied to the monitor
display during playback.
Use HI to highlight j
(color temperature) or k
(brightness) and FG to
adjust the value.
-
2
j
+1
k
s
100
%
Vivid Natural
SetBack —
Press the INFO button to switch the saturation of the
monitor between [Natural] and [Vivid] settings.
Rec View Choose whether pictures are automatically displayed
in the monitor after they are taken and if so, for how
long. This is useful for a brief check of the picture you
have taken. You can shoot the next shot by pressing the
shutter button halfway even while the captured image is
displayed on the monitor.
[0.3sec] – [20sec]: Choose how long (in seconds) pictures
are displayed in the monitor after shooting.
[Off]: The captured image is not displayed on the monitor.
[Auto q]: After shooting, the camera displays the latest
picture and then enters playback mode. This is useful for
erasing a picture after checking it.
—
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Settings Adjust settings for connection to Wi-Fi/Bluetooth®-
compatible smartphones using the camera’s wireless
function. 178
Firmware View the fi rmware versions of the camera and connected
accessories. Check the versions when you inquire about
the camera or accessories or when you download the
software.
—
177
EN
Menu functions (Setup menu)
4
Formatting the card (Card Setup)
Cards must be formatted with this camera before fi rst use or after being used with
other cameras or computers.
All data stored on the card, including protected images, is erased when the card is
formatted.
When formatting a used card, confi rm there are no images that you still want to keep
on the card. g “Usable cards” (P. 284)
1
Select [Card Setup] in the e Setup Menu and press
the Q button.
• When there are cards in both slots 1 and 2, card slot
selection appears. Select a card slot and press the Q
button.
• If there is data on the card, menu items appear. Select
[Format] and press the Q button.
100
%Card Setup
All Erase
Format
Back Set
2
Select [Yes] and press the Q button.
• Formatting is performed.
Deleting all images (Card Setup)
All images on a card can be deleted at a time. Protected images are not deleted.
1
Select [Card Setup] in the e Setup Menu and press
the Q button.
• When there are cards in both slots 1 and 2, card slot
selection appears. Select a card slot and press the Q
button.
2
Select [All Erase] and press the Q button.
100
%Card Setup
All Erase
Format
Back Set
3
Select [Yes] and press the Q button.
• All images are deleted.
178
EN
Menu functions (Setup menu)
4
Wireless LAN Options (Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings)
Adjust settings for connection to wireless networks. Take pictures and view pictures
using a computer, or leave the camera off and view pictures on your smartphone while
on the road. For information on establishing a connection and using these features,
see “Connecting to Smartphones via Wi-Fi” (P. 245) and “Connecting to Computers
via Wi-Fi” (P. 256).
Availability Disable Wi-Fi and Bluetooth®. Disable Wi-Fi and Bluetooth®,
for example in settings in which their use is prohibited, without
changing network settings (P. 255).
Connection Password Change the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth® password.
Power-off Standby Choose whether the camera will connect to smartphones while
off.
RAW+JPEG h
In the case of pictures recorded with [RAW+JPEG] for image
quality, you can choose to share only the JPEG copies, only the
RAW copies, or both the JPEG and RAW copies (P. 133).
Reset Settings Restore defaults for [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings].
Wi-Fi MAC Address Display the camera MAC address, which is sometimes needed
when adjusting wireless network settings.
179
EN
Menu functions (My menu)
4
Using “My Menu”
You can use “My Menu” to create a personalized menu tab containing only items you
select. “My Menu” can contain up to 5 pages of 7 items each. You can delete items or
change the page or item order.
At purchase, “My Menu” contains no items.
1
Press the MENU button to display the menus.
2
Highlight an item for inclusion in “My Menu”.
• Items that can be added to “My Menu” are indicated by
a P icon at the top right corner of the display.
Item can be added to
“My Menu”
1
2
1
4:3
Off
100
%
Y
F
o
Off
Back Set
Shooting Menu 1
KK
Picture Mode
Reset / Custom Modes
Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse
j/Y
Image Aspect
Digital Tele-converter
3
Press the R (movie) button.
R (movie) button
• You will prompted to choose a page. Use FG on the
arrow pad to choose the “My Menu” page to which the
item will be added.
1
2
1
Cancel
Select My Menu to add.
4:3
Off
100
%
Y
F
o
Off
Picture Mode
Reset / Custom Modes
KK
Set
Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse
j/Y
Image Aspect
Digital Tele-converter
f1
f2
f3
f4
f5
180
EN
Menu functions (My menu)
4
4
Press the Q button to add the item to the selected
page.
• The camera will display a message stating that the item
has been added to “My Menu”.
1
2
1
4:3
Off
100
%
Y
F
o
Off
Picture Mode
Reset / Custom Modes
KK
Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse
j/Y
Image Aspect
Digital Tele-converter
Added to My Menu.
• Items that have been added to “My Menu” are indicated
by a yellow P.
• The next available page will be displayed once the
seventh item is added to the current page.
• Items marked with a P can be removed from “My
Menu” by pressing the R button. A confi rmation dialog
will be displayed; to proceed, highlight [Yes] and press
the Q button.
1
2
1
4:3
Off
100
%
Y
F
o
Off
Back Set
Shooting Menu 1
KK
Picture Mode
Reset / Custom Modes
Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse
j/Y
Image Aspect
Digital Tele-converter
• Items saved to “My Menu” are added to the P (“My
Menu”) tab.
1
2
f2
f3
f4
f5
f1
f1YF
100
%My Menu 1
KK
Back Set
P (“My Menu”) tab
5
To access "My Menu", select the P (“My Menu”) tab.
Managing “My Menu”
You can reorder items in “My Menu”, move them between pages, or remove them from
“My Menu” altogether.
1
Press the MENU button to display the menus.
2
Display the “My Menu” page you want to edit and
press the R (movie) button.
R (movie) button
• The options below will be displayed.
[Rearrange Order]: Change the order of items or pages.
Use the arrow pad (FGHI) to choose the new
location.
[Remove this item]: Remove the highlighted item from
“My Menu”. Highlight [Yes] and press the Q button.
[Remove this P tab]: Remove from “My Menu” all
items on the current page. Highlight [Yes] and press the
Q button.
1
2
f2
f3
f4
f5
f1
f1YF
100
%My Menu 1
KK
On
Half Way Rls With IS
Frame Rate Normal
USB Mode Auto
sRGB
Color Space
Back Set
Rearrange Order
Remove this item
Remove this f tab
181
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Using the custom menus
Camera settings can be customized using the G Custom Menu.
Custom Menu
J/K/L/IAF/MF (P. 181)
1
2
A2
A3
A4
B1
B2
C1
C2
A1
Custom Menu
mode2
±0
S3/C4/M3/F3
Off
S-AF
100
%
AF Scanner
KAEL/AFL
KAF+MF
KAF Mode
KC-AF Sensitivity
KC-AF Center Start
KC-AF Center Priority
Back Set
J/KButton/Dial/Lever (P. 185)
N/ORelease/j/Image Stabilizer (P. 186)
P/Q/R/SDisp/8/PC (P. 187)
T/U/VExp/ISO/BULB/p (P. 191)
W#Custom (P. 193)
XK/WB/Color (P. 194)
Y/ZRecord/Erase (P. 195)
aEVF (P. 196)
b/cK Utility (P. 198)
J AF/MF
Option Description g
K AF Mode
Choose the AF mode for still image shooting.
64, 91
K AF+MF You can rotate the lens focus ring to adjust focus manually
after focusing with autofocus. 200
K AEL/AFL Choose how the camera sets focus and exposure when the
shutter button or AEL/AFL button is pressed. 201
AF Scanner Choose the type of AF scan* performed in autofocus mode
when the camera is unable to focus or the scene lacks
contrast.
* Scans whole range from minimum range to infi nity for
focus point when the camera cannot focus on the subject
or the contrast is not clear.
• The selected option takes effect when [C-AF], [C-AF+TR],
[C-AFb], or [C-AF+TRb] is chosen for [K AF Mode]
(P. 64).
• This item is for still photography.
[mode1]: AF Scanner is not activated.
[mode2]: An AF scan is performed only once at the start of
the focus operation.
[mode3]: AF Scanner is activated.
—
K C-AF
Sensitivity Choose how rapidly the camera responds to changes in
the distance to the subject while focusing with [C-AF],
[C-AFb], [C-AF+TR], or [C-AF+TRb] selected for
[K AF Mode]. This can help autofocus track a quickly-
moving subject or prevent the camera refocusing when an
object passes between the subject and the camera.
203
MENU G J
182
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Option Description g
K C-AF Center
Start When used in combination with an AF-target mode other
than single target, [C-AF], [C-AFb], [C-AF+TR], and
[C-AF+TRb] focus on the center of the selected group
only during the initial scan. During later scans, the camera
will focus using the surrounding targets. Combining this
option with an AF-target mode that covers a wide area
makes it easier to focus on erratically-moving subjects.
204
K C-AF Center
Priority When focusing using group- or custom-target AF in [C-AF]
and [C-AFb] modes, the camera always assigns priority
to the center target in the selected group for a repeated
series of focus operations. Only if the camera is unable to
focus using the center focus target will it focus using the
surrounding targets in the selected focus group. This helps
you track subjects that are moving quickly but relatively
predictably. C-AF center priority is recommended in most
situations.
205
K AF/MF
Option Description g
KNMode
Settings Choose the target modes displayed during AF-target mode
selection. Hiding unused modes speeds target-mode
selection. To hide an item, highlight it and press the Q
button to remove the check (v).
69, 71
AF Area Pointer In autofocus mode, the position of the subject on which the
camera has focused is shown by a green focus target. This
item controls the display of the focus target.
[Off]: The focus target is not displayed.
[On1]: The focus target is displayed only briefl y after the
camera focuses.
[On2]: After the camera focuses,
the focus target will be displayed
while the shutter button is
pressed halfway.
• To enable cluster AF targeting
when q (all targets) is
selected and [S-AF], [S-AFb],
[C-AF], or [C-AFb] is chosen for [K AF Mode]
(P. 64) or [C-AF] is selected for [n AF Mode], select
[On2] for [AF Area Pointer]. The camera will display AF
targets for all areas that are in focus.
—
N Set Home Choose the home position AF mode, AF target selection
mode, and AF target mode. Press the Q button to select
the desired options in the [N Set Home] display. 206
MENU G K
100
%
183
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Option Description g
N Select Screen
Settings Choose the roles played by the front and rear dials or arrow
pad during AF target selection. 207
N Loop Settings Choose whether AF-target selection “wraps around” the
edges of the display. You can also choose whether you
have the option of selecting q (all targets) before AF-
target selection “wraps around” to the opposite border of the
display.
• Wrap is disabled in movie mode and when [FAF] or
[FAFb] is selected for [K AF Mode].
208
t Target Mode
Settings Choose the number of AF targets available and how far the
AF target moves during AF-target selection. 209
K Orientation
Linked N
The camera can be confi gured to change the AF-target
position and AF-target mode automatically when it detects
that it has been rotated between landscape (wide) or portrait
(tall) orientations.
210
L AF/MF
Option Description g
AF Targeting Pad If [On] is selected, the AF target can be positioned by
tapping the monitor during viewfi nder photography. Tap the
monitor and slide your fi nger to position the AF target.
• When set to [On], drag operation can be disabled or
enabled by double-tapping the monitor.
• [AF Targeting Pad] can also be used with zoom frame AF
(P. 73).
—
AF Limiter Limits the AF area when turned [On]. 211
AF Illuminator Select [Off] to disable the AF illuminator. To use the AF
illuminator during silent photography, you will need to
change the option selected for [Silent s Mode Settings]
(P. 157).
—
I Face Priority You can select the face priority or eye priority AF mode. 92
AF Focus Adj. Focal location adjustment for phase-difference AF can be
fi ne tuned within a range of ±20 steps.
• Normally there is no need to fi ne-tune autofocus using this
item. Fine-tuning focus may prevent the camera focusing
normally.
212
MENU G L
184
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
I AF/MF
Option Description g
Starry Sky AF
Setting [Accuracy]: Prioritize focus accuracy over speed. Use a
tripod.
[Speed]: Prioritize focus speed over accuracy.
64
Preset MF
distance Choose the Preset MF focus position. Numerical value and
unit (m, ft) can be set. The distance is approximate and not
exact. —
MF Assist You can automatically switch to zoom or peaking in manual
focus mode by rotating the focus ring. 215
MF Clutch Disable the manual focus clutch. This can prevent autofocus
being disabled by the clutch engaging accidentally.
[Operative]: The camera responds to the position of the lens
focus ring.
[Inoperative]: The camera focuses according to the option
selected for [AF Mode], regardless of the position of the
lens focus ring. Manual focus is not available even when the
focus ring is in the manual focus position.
286
Focus Ring You can customize how the lens adjusts to the focal point by
selecting the rotational direction of the focus ring. —
Bulb/Time
Focusing You can change the focus position during exposure by using
manual focus (MF). When set to [Off], rotation of the focus
ring is disabled. 216
Reset Lens When set to [Off], the focus position of the lens is not reset
even when the power is turned off. When set to [On], the
focus of power zoom lenses is also reset.
• Regardless of the option selected, the focus position
will be reset when the camera is turned off if [PreMF]
(P. 64) is selected for [AF Mode].
—
MENU G I
185
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
J Button/Dial/Lever
Option Description g
K Button
Function Other roles can be assigned to buttons in place of their
existing functions. 116
S Center Button Choose the operation performed by pressing the multi
selector. 217
T Direction Key Choose the operation performed by tilting the multi selector. 217
K Dial Function You can change the function of the front dial and rear dial. 218
Dial Direction Choose the direction in which the dial is rotated to adjust
shutter speed or aperture. Change the program shift
direction in which the dial is rotated. —
K Fn Lever
Function Choose the function performed by the Fn lever. 219
Fn Lever/Power
Lever Use the Fn lever as a power switch.
[Fn]: Follows settings for the Fn lever function.
[Power 1]: The power turns on when the Fn lever is in
position 1, and off when in position 2.
[Power 2]: The power turns on when the Fn lever is in
position 2, and off when in position 1.
When [Power 1] or [Power 2] is set, the ON/OFF lever
(power lever), [K Fn Lever Function] and [n Fn Lever
Function] are disabled.
—
K Button/Dial/Lever
Option Description g
K Elec. Zoom
Speed Choose the speed at which power zoom lenses zoom in or
out when the zoom ring is rotated. Adjust zoom speed if it is
so quick that you fi nd it hard to frame your subject. Choose
from [Low], [Normal], and [High].
—
qR Function Choose the role played by the R button during playback.
[h]: Create or modify a “share order” by marking pictures
for upload to a smartphone.
[H]: Select multiple pictures.
—
9 Lock If [On] is selected, FGHI and Q button operations for
PBH (Power Battery Holder) are disabled. —
v Lock Select [On] to disable the v button. 16
MENU G J
MENU G K
186
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
N Release/j/Image Stabilizer
Option Description g
S-AF Release
Priority If [On] is selected, the shutter can be released even when
the camera is not in focus. This option can be set separately
for S-AF and C-AF modes (P. 64).
• Regardless of the option selected, [S-AF Release Priority]
is used when [FAF] is selected for AF mode.
• This item is for still photography.
—
C-AF Release
Priority
jL Settings Choose frame advance rates and shot limits for [j],
[♦j], and [♥j] modes. You can also adjust Pro Capture
settings, including the frame advance rate, number of
frames buffered, and the shot limit. Figures for sequential
shooting speed are the approximate maximums.
• This item is for still photography.
220
jH Settings
Flicker Reduction Reduce fl icker in photos taken under fl uorescent or other
artifi cial lighting.
• This item is for still photography.
[ Anti-Flicker LV]: Reduce fl icker during live view under
some kinds of lighting, including fl uorescent lamps. If [Auto]
does not have the desired effect, select [50 Hz] or [60 Hz]
according to the frequency of the local power supply.
[ Anti-Flicker Shooting]: The camera automatically detects
the fl icker frequency and times the shutter release
accordingly.
222
O Release/j/Image Stabilizer
Option Description g
K Image
Stabilizer Adjust image stabilization settings for still photography. 97
j Image
Stabilizer Choose whether the camera prioritizes frame rate or image
stabilization during burst photography.
• [j Image Stabilizer] is fi xed at [Fps Priority] in q (Pro
Capture Low) and p (Pro Capture High) modes.
[Fps Priority]: Shooting speed gets priority over image
stabilization. The sensor will not be reset to the center
during sequential shooting.
[IS Priority]: Image stabilization gets priority over shooting
speed. The sensor will be reset to the center per frame of
sequential shooting. The shooting speed will drop slightly.
—
Half Way Rls
With IS When set to [Off], the IS (Image Stabilization) function while
the shutter button is pressed halfway will not be activated. —
Lens I.S. Priority Select [On] to give priority to lens on-board image
stabilization when shooting with third-party lenses. [S-IS1]
will be used when [S-IS AUTO] is selected for [K Image
Stabilizer] (P. 97).
• This option has no effect on lenses that are equipped with
an image stabilization switch.
—
MENU G N
MENU G O
187
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
P Disp/8/PC
Option Description g
K Control
Settings Use this option to hide live controls (P. 225) or the LV
super control panel (P. 90) for each shooting mode so
that they cannot be displayed via the INFO button. To hide
an item, highlight it and press the Q button to remove the
check mark.
224
G/Info Settings Choose the information displayed when the INFO button
is pressed.
[q Info]: Choose the information displayed in full frame
playback.
[qa Info]: Choose the information displayed in magnifi ed
playback.
[LV-Info]: Choose the information displayed when the
camera is in shooting mode.
[ LV OFF-Info]: Choose a shooting display.
[G Settings]: Choose the information displayed in index
and calendar playback.
226,
228
Picture Mode
Settings Choose the picture modes (P. 106) available for selection.
To hide an item, highlight it and press the Q button to
remove the check mark. —
j/Y Settings Choose the sequential shooting/self-timer modes (P. 78)
available for selection. To hide an item, highlight it and press
the Q button to remove the check mark. —
Multi Function
Settings Choose the multi function options (P. 124) available for
selection. To hide an item, highlight it and press the Q
button to remove the check mark. —
MENU G P
188
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Q Disp/8/PC
Option Description g
Live View Boost Adjust brightness for ease of viewing when lighting is poor.
Settings can be adjusted separately for mode M, bulb
photography, live composite photography, and the like.
[Off]: Preview exposure in live view. Exposure can be
previewed before shooting.
• This option does not apply during bulb or time
photography.
[On1]: Exposure preview disabled; brightness is adjusted for
ease of viewing. The brightness of the preview differs from
the fi nal photograph.
[On2]: As for [On1] but brighter. Choose when framing shots
of the night sky or the like.
• The brightness of the preview differs from the fi nal
photograph. Subject motion may also appear slightly jerky.
• Press I on the arrow pad and choose from the following:
- [Quality Priority]: Prioritize display quality.
- [Frame Rate Priority]: Prioritize display speed.
—
Art LV Mode [mode1]: The fi lter effect is always displayed.
[mode2]: Priority is given to smooth display while the shutter
button is pressed halfway. The quality of art fi lter effect
previews may be affected.
—
Frame Rate [Normal]: The normal display rate. Select this option in most
circumstances.
[High]: Smooths motion even when the subject is moving
quickly. Fast-moving subjects are easier to track. [Normal]
will be selected automatically if the camera’s internal
temperature rises during shooting.
—
LV Close Up
Settings [LV Close Up Mode]: When set to [mode1], pressing the
button halfway in the magnifi ed live view returns to the
magnifi ed frame display. When set to [mode2], pressing the
button halfway in the magnifi ed live view switches to the
Zoom AF display.
[Live View Boost]: If [On] is selected, the camera will adjust
display brightness for ease of viewing during focus zoom.
When set to [Off], the magnifi ed area is displayed with the
brightness of live view before magnifi cation. This is useful to
check the focus when shooting in backlit locations.
• This item is available when [Off] is selected for [Live View
Boost] in G Custom Menu Q.
—
qa Default
Setting Choose the starting zoom ratio for playback zoom (close-up
playback). 229
MENU G Q
189
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Option Description g
z Settings [z Lock]: Select [On] to maintain the aperture at the
selected value even when releasing the button.
[Live View Boost]: If [On] is selected, the camera will adjust
display brightness for ease of viewing during depth-of-fi eld
preview (P. 117).
• This item is available when [Off] is selected for [Live View
Boost] in G Custom Menu Q.
—
R Disp/8/PC
Option Description g
Grid Settings Adjust settings for the framing grid.
[Display Color]: Adjust guide color and transparency. The
camera can store up to two combinations of settings.
[Displayed Grid]: Select the type of guides displayed.
Choose from:
[w], [x], [1], [y], [X], and [x]
• When [x] is selected, the guides are adjusted for a 16:9
movie frame when movies are shot in still photography
mode. Depending on the option selected for [nK], the
guides may be displayed with an aspect ratio of 17:9.
[Apply Settings to EVF]: Choose whether the option
selected for [Displayed Grid] is refl ected in the viewfi nder
display. The option selected for [EVF Grid Settings] in
G Custom Menu a (P. 197) has no effect.
—
Peaking Settings Highlight objects using color outlines. This makes objects
that are in focus easier to see during manual focus and the
like.
[Peaking Color]: Choose the focus peaking color.
[Highlight Intensity]: Choose the focus peaking level.
[Image Brightness Adj.]: Adjust background brightness to
make focus peaking easier to see.
• When [On] is selected for [Image Brightness Adj.], the
live view display may be brighter or darker than the fi nal
photograph.
—
Histogram
Settings [Highlight]: Choose the lower bound for the highlight display.
[Shadow]: Choose the upper bound for the shadow display. 226
Mode Guide Select [On] to display a help for the selected mode when
the mode dial is rotated to a new setting. 41
Selfi e Assist If [On] is selected, the camera will display a mirror image of
the view through the lens when the monitor is in the selfi e
position. 229
MENU G R
190
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
S Disp/8/PC
Option Description g
8 (Beep sound) [On]: A beep sounds after successful autofocus operations.
The beep sounds only when the camera fi rst focuses using
[C-AF].
[Off]: A beep does not sound after successful autofocus
operations.
—
HDMI [Output Size]: Selecting the digital video signal format for
connecting to a TV via an HDMI cable.
[HDMI Control]: Select [On] to allow the camera to be
operated using remotes for TVs that support HDMI control.
This option takes effect when pictures are displayed on
a TV. When [On] is selected, the camera can be used for
playback only.
[Output Frame Rate]: Select the output frame rate from [50p
Priority] or [60p Priority] for using the camera connected to
a TV with an HDMI cable.
230
USB Mode Choose how the camera functions when connected to
external devices via USB. 231,
275,
277,
278
MENU G S
191
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
T Exp/ISO/BULB/p 
Option Description g
EV Step Choose the size of the increments used when adjusting
shutter speed, aperture, exposure compensation, and other
exposure-related settings. —
ISO Step Choose the size of the increments used when adjusting ISO
sensitivity. —
K ISO-Auto Set Adjust [AUTO] ISO sensitivity settings for still photography.
[Upper Limit/Default]: Choose the maximum and default ISO
sensitivity used when [AUTO] is selected for ISO. Select
[Upper Limit] to choose the maximum sensitivity, [Default] to
choose the default sensitivity. The maximum is 6400.
The maximum ISO sensitivity automatically changes:
• to ISO 800 when the live ND fi lter is enabled,
• to ISO 1600 when [Shooting Method] > [Tripod] is
selected for High Res Shot, and
• to ISO 1600 when [Dramatic Tone] or [Watercolor] is
selected for picture mode.
[Lowest S/S Setting]: Choose the shutter speed at which the
camera starts raising ISO sensitivity automatically in modes
P and A. Choose [Auto] to let the camera choose a shutter
speed automatically.
—
K ISO-Auto Choose the shooting modes in which [AUTO] ISO sensitivity
takes effect.
[P/A/S]: [K ISO] > [AUTO] takes effect only in modes
P, A, and S. If [AUTO] is in effect when mode M or B is
selected, [K ISO] will be set to ISO 200.
[All]: [K ISO] > [AUTO] takes effect only in modes P, A,
S, and M. If you select mode B after choosing [AUTO],
[K ISO] will be set to ISO 200.
—
K Noise Filter Choose the amount of noise reduction performed at high
ISO sensitivities. —
K Low ISO
Processing Choose the type of processing applied to photographs
taken at low ISO sensitivities.
[Drive Priority]: Image processing is adapted so as not to
curtail the number of pictures that can be taken in a single
burst.
[Detail Priority]: Image processing prioritizes image quality.
—
MENU G T
192
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Option Description g
Noise Reduct. This function reduces the noise that is generated during
long exposures.
• The time required for noise reduction is shown in the
display.
• [Off] is selected automatically during sequential shooting.
• This function may not work effectively with some shooting
conditions or subjects.
[Auto]: Noise reduction is performed at slow shutter speeds,
or when the internal temperature of the camera has risen.
[On]: Noise reduction is performed with every shot.
[Off]: Noise reduction off.
—
U Exp/ISO/BULB/p 
Option Description g
Bulb/Time Timer Choose the maximum exposure for bulb and time
photography. 52
Live Composite
Timer Choose the maximum exposure time for composite
photography. 54
Bulb/Time Monitor Choose the brightness of the monitor when shooting in B
(bulb) mode. —
Live Bulb Choose the display interval during shooting. The number of
update times is limited. Choose [Off] to disable the display.
232
Live Time 232
Composite
Settings Set an exposure time to be the reference in composite
photography. 233
K Flicker Scan Reduce fl icker under LED lighting. 234
MENU G U
193
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
V Exp/ISO/BULB/p 
Option Description g
Metering Choose a metering mode according to the scene. 77
AEL Metering Choose the metering method used to meter exposure when
exposure is locked using the AEL/AFL button. This allows
you to use one metering method when exposure is locked
by pressing the shutter button halfway and another when
exposure is locked by pressing the AEL/AFL button.
• This item is for still photography.
[Auto]: Exposure is metered using the method selected for
[Metering] (P. 77).
—
N Spot Metering Choose whether the [Spot], [Spot Hilight], and [Spot
Shadow] spot metering options meter the selected AF
target.
• [I Face Priority] is automatically set to [Face Priority Off].
• The selected option takes effect when M (single target)
or o (small target) is selected as the AF-target mode
(P. 69).
• The camera zooms in on the selected AF target during
focus zoom (P. 73).
• This item is for still photography.
—
Exposure Shift Adjust correct exposure separately for each metering mode. 235
W #Custom
Option Description g
#X-Sync. Choose the fastest shutter speed available when a fl ash is
used. 236
#Slow Limit Choose the slowest shutter speed available when a fl ash
is used. 236
x+FWhen set to [On], the exposure compensation value is
added to the fl ash compensation value. 68, 105
#+WB Adjust white balance for use with a fl ash.
[Off]: The camera uses the value currently selected for white
balance.
[W]: The camera uses auto white balance ([Auto]).
[n]: The camera uses fl ash white balance ([n]).
—
#RC Mode Wireless remote-control fl ash units can be used with the
fl ash unit for wireless remote-control fl ash photography. 288
MENU G V
MENU G W
194
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
X K/WB/Color
Option Description g
K Set You can select the JPEG image quality mode from
combinations of three image sizes and three compression
rates.
1) Use HI to select a
combination ([K1] –
[K4]) and use FG to
change.
2) Press the Q button.
1
SF
Y
2
F
Y
3
N
Y
4
N
X
Yarge
100
%
Pixel Count
K Set
Back Set
Compression
rate
Image size
100,
142,
236
Pixel Count Choose the pixel count for [X]- and [W]-size images.
1) Select [Xiddle] or [Wmall]
and press I.
2) Choose a pixel count and
press the Q button.
W
mall
X
iddle
1280×960
100
%
3200×2400
Pixel Count
Back Set
100,
142,
236,
316
Shading Comp. Choose [On] to correct peripheral illumination according to
the type of lens.
• Compensation is not available for teleconverters or
extension tubes.
• Noise may be visible at the edges of photographs taken at
high ISO sensitivities.
—
K WB Choose a white balance mode for still photography. You can
also fi ne-tune the white balance for each mode. 94
K All xFine-tune white balance across the board.
• This item is for still photography.
[All Set]: Fine-tune white balance for all modes.
[All Reset]: Reset fi ne-tuning for all modes to default values.
96
KW Keep Warm
Color Select [On] to preserve “warm” colors in pictures taken with
[AUTO] white balance under incandescent lighting.
• This item is for still photography. 94, 96
Color Space You can select a format to ensure that colors are correctly
reproduced when shot images are regenerated on a monitor
or using a printer. 114
MENU G X
195
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Y Record/Erase
Option Description g
Card Slot Settings Choose the card used to record photographs or movies. 237
File Name [Auto]: Even when a new card is inserted, the fi le numbers
are retained from the previous card. File numbering
continues from the last number used or from the highest
number available on the card.
[Reset]: When you insert a new card, the folder numbers
starts at 100 and the fi le name starts at 0001. If a card
containing images is inserted, the fi le numbers start at the
number following the highest fi le number on the card.
—
Edit Filename Choose how image fi les are named by editing the portion of
the fi lename highlighted below in gray.
sRGB: Pmdd0000.jpg Pmdd
AdobeRGB: _mdd0000.jpg mdd
• Select [Off] to use the default prefi xes.
—
dpi Settings Choose the print resolution. —
Copyright
Settings* Add the names of the photographer and copyright holder to
new photographs. Names can be up to 63 characters long.
[Copyright Info.]: Select [On] to include the names of the
photographer and copyright holder in the Exif data for new
photographs.
[Artist Name]: Enter the name of the photographer.
[Copyright Name]: Enter the name of the copyright holder.
1) Select characters from 1 and press the Q button.
The selected characters appear in 2.
2) Repeat Step 1 to complete the name, then highlight
[END] and press the Q button.
• To delete a character, press the INFO button to
place the cursor in the name area 2, highlight
the character, and press .
!”#$%& ()*+, - . /
01234567
’
89: ; <=>?
@
ABCDEFGH I J KLMNO
PQRSTUVWX Y Z [\]^_
o
abcde f gh i j k lmn
END
pq r s t uvwx yz |}
ABCDE
`
{~
05/63
100
%Copyright Name
Cancel SetDelete
2
1
* OLYMPUS does not accept liability for damages arising
from disputes involving the use of [Copyright Settings].
Use at your own risk.
—
Lens Info Settings Save lens info for up to 10 lenses that do not automatically
supply info to the camera. 239
MENU G Y
196
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Z Record/Erase
Option Description g
Quick Erase If [On] is selected, pressing the button in the playback
display will immediately delete the current image. —
RAW+JPEG Erase Choose the operation performed when pictures recorded at
settings of RAW+JPEG are deleted using [Erase].
• Both the RAW and JPEG copies are deleted when
selected images are deleted or when [All Erase] (P. 177)
is selected.
[JPEG]: Only the JPEG copy is erased.
[RAW]: Only the RAW copy is erased.
[RAW+JPEG]: Both copies are erased.
100,
132,
142
Priority Set Choose the default selection ([Yes] or [No]) for confi rmation
dialogs. —
a EVF
Option Description g
EVF Auto Switch [Off]: The viewfi nder display does not light automatically
when you put your eye to the viewfi nder. Press the u
button to switch between the viewfi nder and monitor
displays.
[On1]: The viewfi nder display lights automatically when
you put your eye to the viewfi nder. Pressing the u button
displays [EVF Auto Switch] options.
[On2]: Putting your eye to the viewfi nder turns the
viewfi nder display on only if the monitor is closed. Pressing
the u button displays [EVF Auto Switch] options.
38
EVF Adjust Adjust viewfi nder brightness and hue.
Brightness is automatically adjusted when [EVF Auto
Luminance] is set to [On]. The contrast of the information
display is also adjusted automatically.
—
EVF Style Choose the viewfi nder display style. 240
V Info Settings Choose the information that can be viewed by pressing the
INFO button in the viewfi nder display. It takes effect when
[Style 1] or [Style 2] is selected for [EVF Style]. 241
MENU G Z
MENU G a
197
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Option Description g
EVF Grid Settings Choose the type and color of framing grid displayed in the
viewfi nder when [Off] is selected for [Grid Settings] > [Apply
Settings to EVF] in G Custom Menu R and [Style 1] or
[Style 2] is selected for [EVF Style]. Choose the framing grid
from [w], [x], [1], [y], [X] or [x].
• When [x] is selected, the guides are adjusted for a 16:9
movie frame when movies are shot in still photography
mode. Depending on the option selected for [nK], the
guides may be displayed with an aspect ratio of 17:9.
—
V Half Way Level Choose whether the level gauge can be displayed in the
viewfi nder by pressing the shutter button halfway when
[Style 1] or [Style 2] is selected for [EVF Style].
[On]: The level gauge is displayed in the viewfi nder while
the shutter button is pressed halfway. The level gauge
appears in place of the exposure bar.
[Off]: The level gauge is not displayed.
—
S-OVF Select [On] to increase the dynamic range of the viewfi nder
display, increasing the amount of detail visible in highlights
and shadows in a manner similar to optical viewfi nders.
Backlit subjects and the like are easier to see.
• is displayed in the viewfi nder when [S-OVF] starts.
• The display is not adjusted for settings such as white
balance, exposure compensation, and picture mode.
—
198
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
b K Utility
Option Description g
Pixel Mapping The pixel mapping feature allows the camera to check
and adjust the image pickup device and image processing
functions. 295
Press-and-hold
Time Choose the length of time buttons must pressed to activate
the “button hold” option. 241
Level Adjust You can calibrate the angle of the level gauge.
[Reset]: Reset the gauge to factory default settings.
[Adjust]: Choose the current camera angle as the 0 position.
—
Touchscreen
Settings Activate the touch screen. Choose [Off] to disable the touch
screen. —
Menu Recall Set [Recall] to display the cursor at the last position of
operation when you display a menu. The cursor position will
be retained even when you turn off the camera. —
Fisheye
Compensation Correct fi sheye distortion when shooting with fi sheye
lenses. 242
c K Utility
Option Description g
Battery Settings [Battery Priority]: Choose which battery is used fi rst. When
[Body Battery] is selected, the battery in the body takes
priority. When [PBH Battery] is selected, the battery in the
PBH (Power Battery Holder) takes priority.
[Battery Status]: View the status of the batteries inserted in
the camera.
—
Backlit LCD Choose the length of time before the monitor backlight dims
when no operations are performed. Dimming the backlight
reduces the drain on the battery.
• Choose from [Hold], [8sec], [30sec], and [1min]. The
backlight will not dim if [Hold] is selected.
—
MENU G b
MENU G c
199
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Option Description g
Sleep Choose the delay before the camera enters sleep mode
when no operations are performed. In sleep mode, camera
operations are suspended and the monitor turns off.
• Choose from [Off], [1min], [3min], and [5min].
• The camera will not enter sleep mode if [Off] is selected.
• Normal operation can be restored by pressing the shutter
button halfway or by using the buttons or multi selector.
• The camera will not enter sleep mode:
while a multiple exposure is in progress or while
connected to an HDMI device, smartphone, or via Wi-Fi
or USB to a computer
32
Auto Power Off The camera will turn off automatically if no operations are
performed for a set time after it has entered sleep mode.
This option is used to choose the delay before the camera
turns off automatically.
• Choose from [Off], [5min], [30min], [1h], and [4h].
• The camera will not turn off automatically if [Off] is
selected.
• To reactivate the camera after it has turned off
automatically, turn the camera on using the ON/OFF
lever.
32
Quick Sleep Mode If [On] is selected, the camera will enter power-saving mode
more quickly when the live view display in the monitor is
off. [Backlit LCD] and [Sleep] can be set to shorter intervals
than normal. q is displayed in the monitor while power-
saving is in effect.
• Power saving is not available:
during live view photography, while the viewfi nder is on,
while multiple exposure or interval timer photography
is in progress, or while connected to an HDMI device,
smartphone, or via Wi-Fi or USB to a computer
—
Certifi cation Display certifi cation icons. —
200
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Combined Auto and Manual Focus (K AF+MF)
MENU G J [K AF+MF]
After focusing using autofocus, you can adjust focus manually by keeping the shutter
button pressed halfway and rotating the focus ring. Switch from auto to manual focus at
will or fi ne-tune focus manually after focusing with autofocus.
• The procedure varies with the AF mode selected.
• [Off] is selected by default.
On
Enable manual focus adjustment in autofocus mode. b is displayed next to
[S-AF], [C-AF], [C-AF+TR], or [FAF].
• When [S-AFb] is selected, you can keep the shutter button pressed halfway
after focusing using single AF and adjust focus manually. Alternatively, you can
switch to manual focus by rotating the focus ring while the camera is focusing.
Focus can also be adjusted manually while the shutter is open and during burst
photography in [Sequential Low] mode.
• When [C-AFb] or [C-AF+TRb] is selected, you can switch to manual focus
by rotating the focus ring while the camera is focusing in continuous AF and
continuous tracking AF modes. Press the shutter button halfway a second time to
refocus using autofocus. Focus can also be adjusted manually while the shutter is
open and during burst photography in [Sequential Low] mode.
• When [FAFb] is selected, you can focus manually after focusing or before
initiating focus using autofocus.
Off Manual focus adjustment disabled during autofocus.
• Autofocus with manual focus is also available when autofocus is assigned to other camera
controls. g G Custom Menu J > [K AEL/AFL] (P. 201)
• The lens focus ring can be used to interrupt autofocus only when M.ZUIKO PRO (Micro
Four Thirds PRO) lenses are used. For information on other lenses, visit the OLYMPUS
website.
• In
B (bulb) mode, manual focus is controlled by the option selected for [Bulb/Time
Focusing].
201
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Setting Focus and Exposure with the AEL/AFL Button
(K AEL/AFL)
MENU G J [K AEL/AFL]
Choose how the camera sets focus and exposure when the shutter button or AEL/
AFL button is pressed. The camera normally focuses and locks exposure when the
shutter button is pressed halfway, but this can be changed according to the subject or
shooting conditions.
S-AF
Choose the focus or metering operation performed using the shutter or
AEL/AFL button (P. 202).
C-AF
MF
FAF
Half Way AF
Choose whether the camera focuses when the shutter is pressed halfway.
[Operative]: Pressing the shutter button halfway initiates autofocus
regardless of whether autofocus is currently assigned to the AEL/AFL
button. In [C-AF] mode, the last button pressed is used to maintain focus.
This option has no effect in [MF] or [FAF] mode.
[Inoperative]: Pressing the shutter button halfway will not initiate autofocus if
autofocus is currently assigned to the AEL/AFL button.
Face Priority
AF
Choose whether the AEL/AFL and shutter buttons perform the same or
different functions when faces are detected.
If [On] is selected, the camera will focus on faces or eyes when the AEL/
AFL button is pressed.
If [Off] is selected, the camera will instead focus on the current AF target.
202
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
The table below shows how this setting interacts with [Half Way AF].
• “1” indicates the operation performed when [Half Way AF] is enabled, “2” the operation
performed when it is disabled.
AEL/AFL mode
Shutter button pressed AEL/AFL button
Halfway All the way down Kept pressed
AF AE AF AE AF AE
S-AF
mode1 S-AF Locks — — — Locks
mode2 S-AF — — Locks — Locks
mode3 1: S-AF
2: — Locks — — S-AF —
C-AF
mode1 C-AF Locks Ends — — Locks
mode2 C-AF — Ends Locks — Locks
mode3 1: C-AF
2: — Locks Ends — C-AF —
mode4 1: C-AF
2: — — Ends Locks C-AF —
MF
mode1 — Locks — — — Locks
mode2 — — — Locks — Locks
mode3 — Locks — — S-AF —
FAF *
mode1 FAF Locks — — — Locks
mode2 — Locks — — FAF —
mode3 — Locks — — FAF start/
end —
* The behavior of [FAF] is affected by the option selected for [Starry Sky AF Setting]
(P. 184).
203
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
C-AF Tracking Sensitivity (K C-AF Sensitivity)
MENU G J [K C-AF Sensitivity]
Choose how rapidly the camera responds to changes in the distance to the subject
while focusing with [C-AF], [C-AFb], [C-AF+TR], or [C-AF+TRb] selected for
[K AF Mode]. This can help autofocus track a quickly-moving subject or prevent the
camera refocusing when an object passes between the subject and the camera.
• Choose from fi ve levels of tracking sensitivity.
• The higher the value, the higher the sensitivity. Choose positive values for subjects that
suddenly enter the frame, that are moving rapidly away from the camera, or that change
speed or stop suddenly while moving toward or away from the camera.
• The lower the value, the lower the sensitivity. Choose negative values to prevent the
camera refocusing when the subject is briefl y obscured by other objects or to prevent the
camera focusing on the background when you are unable to keep the subject in the AF
target.
1
Highlight [K C-AF Sensitivity] in G Custom Menu
J and press the Q button.
1
2
A2
A3
A4
B1
B2
C1
C2
A1
A1
A1. AF/MF
mode2
±0
S3/C4/M3/F3
Off
S-AF
100
%
AF Scanner
KAEL/AFL
KAF+MF
KAF Mode
KC-AF Sensitivity
KC-AF Center Start
KC-AF Center Priority
Back Set
2
Highlight a setting using the FG buttons and
press the Q button.
• G Custom Menu J will be displayed.
1
2
A2
A3
A4
B1
B2
C1
C2
A1
A1
A1. AF/MF
mode2
±0
S3/C4/M3/F3
Off
S-AF
100
%
AF Scanner
KAEL/AFL
KAF+MF
KAF Mode
KC-AF Sensitivity
KC-AF Center Start
KC-AF Center Priority
Back Set
+2
+1
0
±0
-
1
-
2
High
Low
3
Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.
204
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
C-AF Starting Focus Target (K C-AF Center Start)
MENU G J [K C-AF Center Start]
When used in combination with an AF-target mode other than single target, [C-AF],
[C-AFb], [C-AF+TR], and [C-AF+TRb] focus on the center of the selected
group only during the initial scan. During later scans, the camera will focus using the
surrounding targets. Combining this option with an AF-target mode that covers a wide
area makes it easier to focus on erratically-moving subjects.
1
Highlight [K C-AF Center Start] in G Custom
Menu J and press the Q button.
1
2
A2
A3
A4
B1
B2
C1
C2
A1
A1
A1. AF/MF
mode2
±0
S3/C4/M3/F3
Off
S-AF
100
%
AF Scanner
KAEL/AFL
KAF+MF
KAF Mode
KC-AF Sensitivity
KC-AF Center Start
KC-AF Center Priority
Back Set
2
Using the FG buttons, highlight the AF target
modes to which [K C-AF Center Start] will apply
and then press the Q button.
• Selected modes are marked with a check (v). To
deselect, press the Q button again.
N
q
r
s
u
v
H
w
100
%KC-AF Center Start
Back
3
Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.
• This option is not available when [K C-AF Center Priority] (P. 205) is enabled.
205
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
C-AF Center Target Priority (K C-AF Center Priority)
MENU G J [K C-AF Center Priority]
When focusing using group-target AF in [C-AF] and [C-AFb] modes, the camera
always assigns priority to the center target in the selected group for a repeated series
of focus operations. Only if the camera is unable to focus using the center focus target
will it focus using the surrounding targets in the selected focus group. This helps
you track subjects that are moving quickly but relatively predictably. Center priority is
recommended in most situations.
1
Highlight [K C-AF Center Priority] in G Custom
Menu J and press the Q button.
1
2
A2
A3
A4
B1
B2
C1
C2
A1
A1
A1. AF/MF
mode2
±0
S3/C4/M3/F3
Off
S-AF
100
%
AF Scanner
KAEL/AFL
KAF+MF
KAF Mode
KC-AF Sensitivity
KC-AF Center Start
KC-AF Center Priority
Back Set
2
Using the FG buttons, highlight the AF target
modes to which [K C-AF Center Priority] will apply
and then press the Q button.
• Selected modes are marked with a check (v). To
deselect, press the Q button again.
r
N
s
u
v
w
H
x
100
%KC-AF Center Priority
Back
3
Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.
206
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Choosing the AF Home Position (N Set Home)
MENU G K [N Set Home]
Choose the home position for the [N Home] feature. The [N Home] feature lets
you recall a previously-saved “home position” for autofocus at the touch of a button.
This item is used to choose the home position. To access [N Home], assign it to a
control using [K Button Function] (P. 116). You also have the option of assigning it
to the multi selector using [S Center Button] (P. 217). If [K Orientation Linked N]
(P. 210) is active, the camera will store separate home positions for landscape (wide)
and portrait (tall) orientations. p appears in the AF-target selection display when the
current home position is selected.
• This item is for still photography.
AF Mode Choose the home position autofocus mode. [FAF] and [FAFb]
cannot be assigned home positions.
AF Target Mode Choose the home position AF target mode. Only options selected for
[KNMode Settings] (P. 182) are available.
AF Target Point Choose the home position focus target.
1
Highlight [N Set Home] in G Custom Menu K
and press the Q button.
1
2
A2
A3
A4
B1
B2
C1
C2
A1
A2
A2. AF/MF
On1
AF Area Pointer
tTarget Mode Settings
KOrientation Linked N
NSet Home
KNMode Settings
NSelect Screen Settings
NLoop Settings
100
%
Back Set
2
Highlight a setting you wish to store with the home
position and press the Q button.
• Selected items are marked with a check (v). Items
marked with a v are included in the home position.
N
S-AF
100
%
AF Target Mode
AF Mode
AF Target Point
NSet Home
HBack
3
Press I on the arrow pad to display options for the
highlighted setting.
• Choose settings for the home position.
• When [K Orientation Linked N] is active, you will
be prompted to select landscape or portrait (camera
rotated left/camera rotated right) orientation before
pressing the I button to display options.
N
S-AF
100
%
Back Set
AF Target Mode
AF Mode
AF Target Point
NSet Home
MF
C-AF
C-AF+TR
S-AF
Preset MF
4
Press the Q button to save changes when settings are complete.
• The camera will return to the “N Set Home” display.
5
Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit when settings are complete.
207
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
AF-Target Selection (N Select Screen Settings)
MENU G K [N Select Screen Settings]
Choose the roles played by the front and rear dials or arrow pad during AF target
selection. The controls used can be selected according to how the camera is used or
personal taste. You can choose up to two combinations.
• This item applies during both still photography and movie recording.
• If you select [Set 2], the options in the [N Select Screen Settings] menu will be checked
(v). [Set 2] can be recalled by pressing the INFO button in the AF-target selection
display.
Available Controls
Front dial, rear dial, FG on the arrow pad, the HI buttons.
Available Roles
[6Pos]: Position the AF target (P. 72).
[NMode]: Choose the AF target mode (e.g., all, small, or group) (P. 69).
[I]: Adjust settings for face/eye detection AF (P. 92).
208
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Enabling AF-Target Selection Wrap (N Loop Settings)
MENU G K [N Loop Settings]
You can choose whether AF-target selection “wraps around” the edges of the display.
You can also choose whether you have the option of selecting q (all targets) before
AF-target selection “wraps around” to the opposite border of the display.
N Loop
Selection
[Off]: Wrap disabled. Target selection stays within the borders of the
display.
[Loop 1]: If you continue to press the
multi selector in the same direction after
reaching the border of the display, the
target in the same row or column on the
opposite border will be selected.
“Loop 1”
[Loop 2]: If you continue to press the
multi selector in the same direction after
reaching the border of the display, the
target in the next row or column on the
opposite border will be selected.
“Loop 2”
Via q
[No]: Target selection does not pass through q (all targets) before
wrapping around.
[Yes]: If [Loop 1] or [Loop 2] is chosen for [N Loop Selection], target
selection will pass through q (all targets) before wrapping around to
the opposite border.
• Hiding q (all targets) in [KNMode Settings] fi xes [Via q] at
[No].
• [N Loop Settings] is fi xed at [Off] during movie recording and when [FAF] is selected
for focus mode.
209
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
AF Target Size and Positioning (t Target Mode Settings)
MENU G K [t Target Mode Settings]
Choose the number of AF targets available and how far the AF target moves during AF-
target selection. Targets can be larger than group targets or sized for subjects whose
motion can be predicted. You can also increase the distance between available targets
for faster target selection. The camera can store up to four different combinations of
settings.
• If the AF-target or step size is altered from the default value, checks (v) will appear next
to the custom target options in [KNMode Settings] (P. 182).
• This item is for still photography.
Size Choose the target size. Target width and height can be set separately. Choose
from options of 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, and 11.
Step Choose the number of steps the target moves during target selection. The
horizontal and vertical step sizes can be set separately; choose from steps of 1,
2, and 3.
210
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Matching AF-Target Selection to Camera Orientation
(K Orientation Linked N)
MENU G K [K Orientation Linked N]
The camera can be confi gured to change the AF-target position and AF-target mode
automatically when it detects that it has been rotated between landscape (wide)
or portrait (tall) orientations. Rotating the camera changes the composition and
consequently also the position of the subject in the frame. The camera can store the
AF target mode and AF target position separately according to camera orientation.
When this option is active, [N Set Home] (P. 206) can be used to store separate
home positions for landscape and portrait orientations.
AF Target Mode Choose separate AF target modes (e.g., all, small, or group) for
landscape and portrait orientations.
AF Target Point Choose separate AF targets for landscape and portrait orientations.
1
Highlight [K Orientation Linked N] in G Custom
Menu K and press I on the arrow pad.
1
2
A2
A3
A4
B1
B2
C1
C2
A1
A2
A2. AF/MF
On1
100
%
AF Area Pointer
tTarget Mode Settings
KOrientation Linked N
NSet Home
KNMode Settings
NSelect Screen Settings
NLoop Settings
Back Set
2
Highlight a setting you wish saved separately and
press the Q button.
• Selected items are marked with a check (v).
H
100
%
AF Target Point
AF Target Mode
KOrientation Linked N
Back
3
Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit when settings are complete.
• Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.
4
Choose the AF target mode or target position with the camera fi rst in one
orientation and then the other.
• Separate settings are stored for landscape orientation, portrait orientation with the
camera rotated to the right, and portrait orientation with the camera rotated to the left.
211
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Lens Focus Range (AF Limiter)
MENU G L [AF Limiter]
Choose the range in which the camera will focus using autofocus. This is effective in
situations in which an obstacle presents itself between the subject and the camera
during the focus operation, causing drastic changes in focus. You can also use it to
prevent the camera focusing on foreground objects when shooting through a fence,
window, or the like.
Distance settings Choose the range of focus distances available. The camera can store
up to three settings for different situations. Distances are approximate
and intended as guides only.
Release Priority The shutter can still be released if the camera is unable to focus when
[On] is selected for [AF Limiter].
%
• [AF Limiter] can be assigned to a button. You then need only press the button to limit
focus range. Hold the button and rotate a dial to choose from the three stored settings.
g “Assigning functions to buttons (Button Function)” (P. 116)
• AF Limiter is not available in the following cases.
- When the focus limiter is enabled on the lens
- When using focus bracketing
- While in the movie mode or recording a movie
- When [FAF] or [FAFb] is selected for focus mode
212
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Fine-Tuning Autofocus (AF Focus Adj.)
MENU G L [AF Focus Adj.]
Fine-tune phase-detection autofocus. Focus can be fi ne-tuned by up to ±20 steps.
• Normally there is no need to fi ne-tune autofocus using this item. Fine-tuning focus may
prevent the camera focusing normally.
• Focus fi ne-tuning has no effect in [S-AF] and [S-AFb] modes.
• This item is for still photography.
Off Fine-tuning disabled.
Default Data Fine-tune focus for all lenses.
Lens Data
Save fi ne-tuning values on a lens-by-lens basis. The camera can store
fi ne-tuning values for up to 20 lenses. Focus for individual lenses can
be fi ne-tuned in specifi c areas of the frame. In the case of zoom lenses,
separate values can be stored for long and short focal lengths.
1
Highlight [AF Focus Adj.] in G Custom Menu L
and press I on the arrow pad.
1
2
A2
A3
A4
B1
B2
C1
C2
A1
A3
A3. AF/MF
On
Off
Off
Face Priority
AF Illuminator
AF Limiter
Off
AF Targeting Pad
AF Focus Adj.
100
%
Off
Back Set
2
Highlight [Default Data] or [Lens Data] and press
the I button.
• If you selected [Default Data], proceed to Step 5.
• To disable fi ne-tuning, highlight [Off] and press the Q
button.
1
2
A2
A3
A4
B1
B2
C1
C2
A1
A3
A3. AF/MF
On
Off
Off
100
%
Off
Off
Face Priority
AF Illuminator
AF Limiter
AF Targeting Pad
AF Focus Adj.
Back Set
Off
Default Data
Lens Data
3
Highlight [Create Lens Data Set] and press the Q
button.
• You will be prompted to choose the area of the frame for
which focus will be fi ne-tuned.
100
%
Back Set
Data List
Create Lens Data Set
4
Use the FGHI buttons to choose an area of the
frame and then press the Q button.
• With zoom lenses, you can press the INFO button to
choose between long (telephoto) and short (wide) focal
lengths.
50-200 F2.8-3.5
100
%
±00
±00
±0
±0
±0
±0
±00
±00
±0
±0
±0
±0
±00
±00
±00
±00
±0
±0
±00
±00
±00
±00
±0
±0
±0
±0
±00
±00
±0
±0
±0
±0
±00
±00
±00
±00
±0
±0
±00
±00
±0
±0
±00
±00
±00
±00
±0
±0
±00
±00
Tel e
Wide
Back Set
213
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
5
Choose a fi ne-tuning value using the FG buttons and press the Q button.
• The selected value will be saved. If you chose [Default Data], the options shown in
Step 2 will be displayed.
• If you chose [Lens Data], the dialog shown in Step 3 will be displayed. The display
will show the name of the lens for which the fi ne-tuning value was saved.
• Rotate the front dial to zoom in and check focus.
• Before pressing the Q button, press the shutter button to take a test shot and check
focus.
• To save another fi ne-tuning value for the current lens, press the I button and repeat
the process from Step 4.
6
To fi ne-tune focus for the same lens but in a
different area of the frame, highlight the lens name
using the FG buttons and press the I button.
• Repeat the process from Step 4.
1 50-200 F2.8-3.5
100
%Data List
Create Lens Data Set
Back Set
7
When the process is complete, press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the
menus.
Deleting Saved Values
1
Highlight [AF Focus Adj.] in G Custom Menu L
and press I on the arrow pad.
1
2
A2
A3
A4
B1
B2
C1
C2
A1
A3
A3. AF/MF
On
Off
Off
Face Priority
AF Illuminator
AF Limiter
Off
AF Targeting Pad
AF Focus Adj.
100
%
Off
Back Set
2
Highlight [Lens Data] using the FG buttons and
press the I button.
1
2
A2
A3
A4
B1
B2
C1
C2
A1
A3
A3. AF/MF
On
Off
Off
100
%
Off
Off
Face Priority
AF Illuminator
AF Limiter
AF Targeting Pad
AF Focus Adj.
Back Set
Off
Default Data
Lens Data
3
Use the FG buttons to highlight the name of the
lens you wish to delete from the fi ne-tuning list and
then press the I button.
1 50-200 F2.8-3.5
100
%Data List
Create Lens Data Set
Back Set
214
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
4
Highlight [Delete] using the FG buttons and press
the I button.
• A confi rmation dialog will be displayed.
1 50-200 F2.8-3.5
100
%
Back Set
Data List
Create Lens Data Set
Check
Delete
5
Highlight [Yes] using the FG buttons and press
the Q button.
• The dialog shown in Step 3 will be displayed. Confi rm
that the lens name has been deleted.
100
%Delete Lens Data Set
Yes
No
Back Set
• To disable AF fi ne-tuning without deleting the entries for the current lens, select [Off] for
[AF Focus Adj.].
$
• The camera can store multiple values for each lens.
Enabling Fine-Tuning
Display the lens data list and place checks (v) next to the items you wish to use.
215
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Manual Focus Assist (MF Assist)
MENU G I [MF Assist]
This is a focus assist function for MF. When the focus ring is rotated, the edge of the
subject is enhanced or a portion of the screen display is magnifi ed. When you stop
operating the focus ring, the screen returns to the original display.
• This item applies during both still photography and movie recording.
Magnify Magnifi es a portion of the screen. The portion to be magnifi ed can be
set in advance using AF target. g “Choosing a Focus Target (AF
Target Point)” (P. 72)
Peaking Displays clearly defi ned outlines with edge enhancement. You can
select the enhancement color and intensity. g G Custom Menu R >
[Peaking Settings] (P. 189)
• Rotate the front or rear dial to zoom in or out during focus zoom.
• [Peaking] can be displayed using button operations. The display is switched every time
the button is pressed. Focus peaking must fi rst be assigned to a button using [Button
Function] (P. 116).
• Press the INFO button to change the color and intensity when Peaking is displayed.
• When Peaking is in use, the edges of small subjects tend to be enhanced more strongly.
This is no guarantee of accurate focusing.
• Focus zoom is not available during movie recording or when [C-AFb] or [C-AF+TRb]
is selected for focus mode.
216
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Adjusting Focus During Exposures (Bulb/Time Focusing)
MENU G I [Bulb/Time Focusing]
You can adjust focus manually while shooting in B (bulb) mode. This allows you to
defocus during the exposure or focus at the end of the exposure.
1
Highlight [Bulb/Time Focusing] in G Custom Menu
I and press the Q button.
1
2
A2
A3
A4
B1
B2
C1
C2
A1
A4
A4. AF/MF
Operative
On
Focus Ring
MF Clutch
Speed
Starry Sky AF Setting
MF Assist
Preset MF distance
Bulb/Time Focusing
On
Reset Lens
100
%
Back Set
2
Highlight an option using the FG buttons.
[Off]: The focus position cannot be adjusted manually during an exposure.
[On]: The focus position can be adjusted manually during an exposure.
3
Press the Q button to select the highlighted option.
• G Custom Menu I will be displayed.
4
Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.
217
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Multi Selector Press (S Center Button)
MENU G J [S Center Button]
Choose the operation performed by pressing the multi selector. The multi selector can
then function as a button.
Off No role assigned. Pressing the multi selector has no effect.
N (AF target selection)
Press the multi selector to adjust settings for AF target selection,
AF target mode, or face priority AF. The arrow pad or front and
rear dials can be used according to the setting selected for
[N Select Screen Settings] (P. 207) in G Custom Menu K.
• This item applies during both still photography and movie
recording.
N Home (AF area
HOME)
The multi selector performs the function selected for [K Button
Function] > [N Home] (P. 118).
• This option applies in still photography modes only.
Multi Selector Tilt (T Direction Key)
MENU G J [T Direction Key]
Choose the operation performed by tilting the multi selector. The multi selector is
normally used to position the AF target, but this function can be disabled to prevent
unintended operation.
• This item applies during both still photography and movie recording.
Off Pressing the multi selector up, down, left, or right has no effect.
N (AF-target position) The multi selector can be used to position the AF-target
(P. 72).
218
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Assigning Roles to the Front and Rear Dials (K Dial Function)
MENU G J [K Dial Function]
Choose the roles performed by the front and rear dials. You can also choose the
function selected using the Fn lever (P. 219). You can also choose the operations
performed during playback or when menus are displayed.
• This item is for still photography. The functions assigned using [n Button/Dial/Lever] >
[n Dial Function] (P. 163) in the n video menu take effect in n (movie) mode.
The roles that can be performed by the dials in photo shooting and q playback
modes are listed below.
Role Function Shooting mode
PASMB
Ps Program shift (P. 45). ————
Shutter Choose the shutter speed. — — 
*
FNo. Adjust aperture. — —
FAdjust exposure compensation. 
xAdjust fl ash compensation. 
ISO Adjust ISO sensitivity. 
WB Adjust white balance. 
CWB Kelvin Choose a color temperature when
CWB (custom) is selected for white
balance.

Off None. 
A/Value Move the cursor up or down or
highlight values or options while menus
are displayed. —
BMove the cursor left or right while
menus are displayed.
Ga (index/playback
zoom) Zoom in or out or switch to the index
display during playback. —
Prev/Next View the next or previous image during
playback.
* Switch between bulb, time, and live composite.
219
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Customizing the Fn Lever (K Fn Lever Function)
MENU G J [K Fn Lever Function]
Choose the role played by the Fn lever.
• This item is for still photography. The functions assigned to controls using this item are
available only in modes P, A, S, M, and B (still photography modes). The functions
assigned using [n Button/Dial/Lever] > [n Fn Lever Function] (P. 163) in the n video
menu take effect in n (movie) mode.
mode1 Switch the functions of the front and rear dials. The functions for Positions 1
and 2 conform to the setting selected for [K Dial Function] (P. 218).
mode2 Switch between two groups of settings previously selected for [AF Mode],
[AF Target Mode], and [AF Target Point].
• You can choose the options selected by pressing I on the arrow pad.
mode3
Toggle the shooting mode. You can switch to n (movie) mode without
rotating the mode dial.
• The Fn lever cannot be used to perform the function assigned using
[n Fn Lever Function].
Off The Fn lever function is turned off.
• The Fn lever cannot be used to perform the selected function when [Power 1] or
[Power 2] is selected for [Fn Lever/Power Lever] (P. 185) in G Custom Menu J.
220
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Burst Shooting Options (jL Settings/jH Settings)
MENU G N [jL Settings]/[jH Settings]
Adjust settings for sequential shooting modes, including the maximum frame advance
rate and number of shots per burst. Shooting ends if the maximum number of shots is
reached while the shutter button is pressed all the way down.
Choose the advance rate and number of shots per burst for S (sequential low) and T
(sequential high) modes.
jL Settings
(sequential low
options)
Choose the frame rate and maximum number of shots per burst for
S (sequential low), ♦S (anti-shock sequential low), and ♥S (silent
sequential low) modes. You can also adjust settings for q (Pro Capture
Low) mode (P. 81).
• S and ♦S modes:
[Max fps]: 1–10 fps
[Frame Count Limiter]: 2–99, Off (no limit)
• ♥S mode:
[Max fps]: 1–10, 15, or 18 fps
[Frame Count Limiter]: 2–99, Off (no limit)
• q mode:
[Max fps]: 10, 15, or 18 fps
[Pre-shutter Frames]: 0–35
[Frame Count Limiter]: 2–99, Off (no limit)
Includes shots captured before recording begins.
jH Settings
(sequential high
options)
Choose the frame rate and maximum number of shots per burst for T
(sequential high) and ♥T (silent sequential high) modes. You can also
adjust settings for p (Pro Capture High) mode (P. 82).
• T mode:
[Max fps]: 10–15 fps
[Frame Count Limiter]: 2–99, Off (no limit)
• ♥T mode:
[Max fps]: 15, 20, 30, or 60 fps
[Frame Count Limiter]: 2–99, Off (no limit)
• p mode:
[Max fps]: 15, 20, 30, or 60 fps
[Pre-shutter Frames]: 0–35
[Frame Count Limiter]: 2–99, Off (no limit)
Includes shots captured before recording begins.
221
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
1
Highlight [jL Settings] or [jH Settings] in
G Custom Menu N and press the Q button.
1
2
A2
A3
A4
B1
B2
C1
C2
A1
C1
On
Off
100
%
Flicker Reduction
Back Set
C1. Release/j/Image Stabilizer
jH Settings
jL Settings
C-AF Release Priority
S-AF Release Priority
2
Highlight an option using the FG buttons and
press the I button.
• The camera will display options for the selected item.
1
2
A2
A3
A4
B1
B2
C1
C2
A1
C1
On
Off
100
%
Flicker Reduction
Back Set
C1. Release/j/Image Stabilizer
jH Settings
jL Settings
C-AF Release Priority
S-AF Release Priority
J
j/j
Ɔj
3
Choose a setting for [Max fps].
• Highlight [Max fps] using the FG buttons and press
the I button.
• Highlight an option using the FG buttons and press
the Q button.
Ɔ
j
Off
10fps
100
%
Frame Count Limiter
Max fps
Back Set
4
Choose a setting for [Pre-shutter Frames].
• This option will only be available if you selected [J] in
Step 2.
• Highlight [Pre-shutter Frames] using the FG buttons
and press the I button.
• Highlight an option using the FG buttons and press
the Q button.
15
Off
18fps
15
J
100
%
Pre-shutter Frames
Max fps
Frame Count Limiter
Back Set
Pro Capture options
5
Choose the maximum number of shots per burst
([Frame Count Limiter]).
• Highlight [Frame Count Limiter] using the FG buttons
and press the I button.
• To keep shooting as long as the shutter release button
is pressed all the way down, select [Off].
• To choose a maximum number of shots, highlight
the current setting and press the I button to display
options. Highlight digits using the HI buttons and use
the FG buttons to change.
Ɔ
j
Off
10fps
100
%
Frame Count Limiter
Max fps
Back Set
• The maximum number of shots per burst includes shots captured while the shutter
button is pressed halfway. g “Shooting without a release time lag (Pro Capture
shooting)” (P. 81)
• Press the Q button to save changes to settings.
6
Press the Q button.
• G Custom Menu N will be displayed.
7
Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.
222
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Reducing Flicker (Flicker Reduction)
MENU G N [Flicker Reduction]
When shooting under fl uorescent or other artifi cial workplace or outdoor lighting, you
may notice fl icker in the live view display or uneven exposure in photos taken at fast
shutter speeds. This item reduces these effects.
Reducing Flicker in Live View (Anti-Flicker LV)
Reduce fl icker under fl uorescent lighting and the like. Choose this option if fl icker
makes the display diffi cult to view.
Auto The camera detects and reduces fl icker.
50Hz Reduce fl icker under workplace or outdoor lighting powered by alternating
current with a frequency of 50 Hz.
60Hz Reduce fl icker under workplace or outdoor lighting powered by alternating
current with a frequency of 60 Hz.
Off Flicker reduction off.
• This option is not available when [On] is selected for [Anti-Flicker Shooting]
(P. 223).
1
Highlight [Flicker Reduction] in G Custom Menu N
and press the Q button.
1
2
A2
A3
A4
B1
B2
C1
C2
A1
C1
On
Off
Flicker Reduction
100
%
Back Set
C1. Release/j/Image Stabilizer
jH Settings
jL Settings
C-AF Release Priority
S-AF Release Priority
2
Highlight [Anti-Flicker LV] using the FG buttons
and press the I button.
• [Anti-Flicker LV] options will be displayed.
100
%
Anti-Flicker Shooting
Anti-Flicker LV Auto
Off
Flicker Reduction
Back Set
3
Highlight an option using the FG buttons and
press the Q button.
• [Flicker Reduction] options will be displayed.
100
%Anti-Flicker LV
Auto
Automatically reduces flicker.
Back Set
4
Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.
223
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Reducing Flicker in Photographs (Anti-Flicker Shooting)
You may notice uneven exposure in photos taken under fl ickering light. When this
option is enabled, the camera will detect the fl icker frequency and adjust the timing
of the shutter release accordingly. This feature applies to photos taken with the
mechanical shutter.
1
Highlight [Flicker Reduction] in G Custom Menu N
and press the Q button.
1
2
A2
A3
A4
B1
B2
C1
C2
A1
C1
On
Off
Flicker Reduction
100
%
Back Set
C1. Release/j/Image Stabilizer
jH Settings
jL Settings
C-AF Release Priority
S-AF Release Priority
2
Highlight [Anti-Flicker Shooting] using the FG
buttons and press the I button.
• [Anti-Flicker Shooting] options will be displayed.
100
%
Anti-Flicker Shooting
Anti-Flicker LV Auto
Off
Flicker Reduction
Back Set
3
Highlight [On] or [Off] using the FG buttons and
press the Q button.
• [Flicker Reduction] options will be displayed.
100
%Anti-Flicker Shooting
On
Effects of flicker such as uneven
exposures and colors will be
reduced.The shutter release time
lag may become longer.
Valid when using mechanical shutter.
Back Set
4
Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.
• A u icon appears in the display when [On] is selected. u icon
ISO-A
200
1023
1:02:03
P
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
250 F5.6
FLK
0.0
30p
30p
4K
YFYF
100
%
• This option does not take effect in modes that use the electronic shutter, including silent
modes, High Res Shot, and Pro Capture modes.
• The camera may be unable to detect fl icker at some settings. Normal release timing will
be used if fl icker is not detected.
• Normal release timing is used at slow shutter speeds.
• Enabling fl icker reduction may cause release lag, slowing the frame advance rate during
burst photography.
224
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Choosing the control panel displays (K Control Settings)
MENU G P [K Control Settings]
Choose the control panel displays available in each shooting mode. Use this option
to hide on-screen controls (live controls and the LV super control panel) so that they
cannot be displayed via the INFO button.
1
Highlight [K Control Settings] in G Custom Menu
P and press the Q button.
1
2
D2
D3
D4
E1
E2
E3
F
D1
D1
100
%D1. Disp/8/PC
j/Y Settings
Multi Function Settings
Picture Mode Settings
G/Info Settings
KControl Settings
Back Set
2
Highlight items using the FG buttons and press the
Q button.
• Selected items are marked with a check (v). Selected
items will be displayed.
H
100
%KControl Settings
Back
Live SCP
Live Control
3
Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.
• For movie mode, set with [n Control Settings] of [n Display Settings] (P. 164).
Displaying On-Screen Controls
• At default settings, live controls are hidden during still photography. To toggle between live
controls and the LV super control panel, you must fi rst place a check (v) next to both
[Live Control] and [Live SCP] in the [K Control Settings] display.
1
Press the Q button during live view in P, A, S, M, or B mode.
• The LV super control panel will be displayed.
ISO-A
200
1023
1:02:03
P
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
250 F5.6 0.0
30p
30p
4K
YFYF
100
%
Q
sRGB
Natural
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
M-IS
±
0
A
±
0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
P
250
1023
1:02:03
F5.6
p
#
±
0.0
#
o
S-IS Auto
30p
30p
4K
Y
F
Y
F
S
-
AF
100
%
Off
KRecommended ISO
225
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
2
Press the INFO button to display live controls.
• The on-screen controls displayed change each time the INFO is pressed.
sRGB
Natural
S
Normal
WB
Auto
ISO
Auto
M-IS
±
0
A
±
0
±
0
±
0
±
0
G
±
0
P
250
1023
1:02:03
F5.6
p
#
±
0.0
#
o
S-IS Auto
30p
30p
4K
Y
F
Y
F
S
-
AF
100
%
Off
KRecommended ISO
INFO
P
#
ISO
AUTO
ISO
AUTO
100
%
AUTO
200 250 320L64 L100 400
pp
OFFOFF
250 F5.6 0.0
##
--
++
ISO-A
200 S-AF
S-AF
Recommend
3
After adjusting settings, press the Q button to exit the on-screen controls.
• Pressing the Q button will in future display the last on-screen controls used.
• The INFO button cannot be used to toggle on-screen controls if it can be used to display
options for the item currently selected in the live control display. Select a different item
before using the INFO button to toggle the display.
Live control
WB
AUTO
WB
AUTO
P
4:3
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
AUTO
O1>
5NU
100
%
oo
30p
30p
4K
YF
WB Auto
OFF
WKeep Warm Color o
Settings
Functions
Available settings
Image stabilizer* ...................................P. 97
Picture mode* .............................P. 106, 142
White balance* .....................................P. 94
Sequential shooting/Self-timer........P. 78, 98
Aspect ratio...........................................P. 98
KK (image quality)*
Still image .....................................P. 100
Movie ............................................P. 101
n mode (movie exposure mode)* .....P. 165
Flash mode ...........................................P. 86
Flash intensity control .........................P. 105
Metering mode......................................P. 77
AF mode*..............................................P. 64
ISO sensitivity* ...............................P. 75, 91
Face priority* ........................................P. 92
Movie sound record*...........................P. 169
* Available in movie mode
• Some functions cannot be used depending on the shooting mode.
• When the controls in [KControl Settings] is set to [Live Control], you can use live control
even in P, A, S, M, B modes (P. 224).
1
Press the Q button to display the live control.
• Press the Q button again to hide live control.
2
Use FG to move the cursor to the desired function, then use HI to select
it and press the Q button.
• The setting is confi rmed if you leave the camera as-is for 8 seconds.
226
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Adding information displays (G/Info Settings)
MENU G P [G/Info Settings]
q Info (Playback information displays)
Use [q Info] to add the following playback information displays. The added displays
are displayed by repeatedly pressing the INFO button during playback. You can also
choose to not show displays that appear at the default setting.
15
100
%
15
Shadow Highlight
100
%
1515
100
%
1x
Histogram display Highlight & Shadow
display Light box display
Highlight & Shadow display
Areas above the upper limit of brightness for the image are shown in red, those below the
lower limit in blue. g G Custom Menu R > [Histogram Settings] (P. 189)
Light box display
Compare two images side-by-side. Press the Q button to select the base image.
• The base image is displayed on the right. Use the front dial to select an image and press
the Q to move the image to the left. The image to be compared to the image on the left
can be selected on the right. To choose a different base image, highlight the right frame
and press the Q.
• To change the zoom ratio, turn the rear dial. Press the ISO button and then FGHI to
scroll the zoomed-in area, and rotate the front dial to select between images.
100
%
53
2x
100
%
2x
100
%
53 54
2x
ISO
ISO
ISO
ISO
ISO
ISO
227
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
qa Info (Magnifi ed playback information display)
The magnifi ed playback information displays can be set with [qa Info]. If [a]
(Magnify) is assigned to a button with Button Function (P. 116) in advance, the set
displays can be switched by repeatedly pressing the a button during playback. You
can also choose to not show displays that appear at the default setting.
aaa
a
2020.02.15 12:30:00 15
100
%
100-0015
4:3
YFYF
15
100
%
2x
100
%
2x
100
%
2x
15
LV-Info (Shooting information displays)
Choose the info shown in the live view shooting display.
g
“Switching the information
display” (P. 39)
To add highlights and shadows to the [LV-Info] display, press I on the arrow pad to
place a check next to [Custom1] or [Custom2]. The added displays are displayed by
repeatedly pressing the INFO button during shooting. You can also choose to not
show displays that appear at the default setting.
To choose the information displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway, select
[LV-Info], highlight [Image Only] and press the I button.
On Shooting info is displayed while the shutter button is pressed halfway.
Off Shooting info is not displayed while the shutter button is pressed halfway.
LV OFF-Info (Shooting information displays)
Choose a shooting display (P. 40).
228
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
G Settings (Index/calendar display)
You can change the number of frames to be displayed on the index display and set
to not display the screens that are set to be displayed by default with [G Settings].
Screens with a check can be selected on the playback screen using the rear dial.
Q
Q
q
p
q
p
Index display
q
p
4 frames
2
020.02.15 12:30:00 20
1
00
%
9, 25, or 100 frames
2020.02.15 12:30:00 20
100
%
2020.02.15 12:30:00 20
100
%
Single-frame
playback
2020.02.15 12:30:00 15
100
%
100-0015
4:3
YFYF
Calendar display
2020.2
Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat
100
%
1
8765432
1514131211109
22212019181716
3126 27 28 29 30
54321
27 28 2926252423
229
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Choosing the Playback Zoom Ratio (qa Default Setting)
MENU G Q [qa Default Setting]
Choose the starting zoom ratio for playback zoom (close-up playback).
Recently Zoom in to the most recently selected zoom ratio.
Equally Value Images are displayed at a zoom ratio of 1:1. A icon appears in the
monitor.
×2, ×3, ×5, ×7,
×10, ×14 Choose the starting zoom ratio.
Selfi e Assist (Selfi e Assist)
MENU G R [Selfi e Assist]
Choose the display used when the monitor is reversed for self-portraits.
• This item applies during both still photography and movie recording.
On When reversed for self-portraits, the monitor shows a mirror image of the view
through the lens.
Off The display does not change when the monitor is reversed.
1
Select [On] for [Selfi e Assist] in G Custom Menu R.
2
Turn the monitor towards you.
230
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Viewing camera images on TV (HDMI)
MENU G S [HDMI]
Use the separately sold cable with the camera to playback recorded images on your
TV. This function is available during shooting. Connect the camera to an HD TV using
an HDMI cable to view high-quality images on a TV screen.
HDMI cable
(Connect to the HDMI connector on
the TV.)
HDMI connector
Type D
Type A
Connect the TV and camera and switch the input source of the TV.
• If [On] is selected for [HDMI Control] (P. 282), the camera monitor will turn off when an
HDMI cable is connected.
• For details on changing the input source of the TV, refer to the TV’s instruction manual.
• Depending on the TV’s settings, the displayed images and information may become
cropped.
• If the camera is connected via an HDMI cable, you will be able to choose the digital video
signal type. Choose a format that matches the input format selected with the TV.
C4K The signal is output in 4K digital cinema (4096 × 2160) format.
4K If possible, the signal is output in 4K (3840 × 2160).
1080p If possible, the signal is output in Full HD (1080p).
720p If possible, the signal is output in HD (720p).
480p/576p The signal is output in 480p/576p format.
• Do not connect the camera to other HDMI output devices. Doing so may damage the
camera.
• HDMI output is disabled while the camera is connected to a computer via USB.
• When [Record Mode] is selected for [Output Mode] (P. 164), movies will be output at the
resolution selected during recording. The images cannot be displayed on the connected
TV if the TV does not support the record mode.
• 1080p output will be used in place of [4K] or [C4K] while the camera is being used to take
photographs.
Using the TV remote control
The camera can be operated by a TV remote control when connected to a TV that
supports HDMI control. g “Using a TV Remote (HDMI Control)” (P. 282)
The camera monitor turns off.
• You can operate the camera by following the operation guide displayed on the TV.
• During single-frame playback, you can display or hide the information display by
pressing the “Red” button, and display or hide the index display by pressing the
“Green” button.
• Some televisions may not support all features.
231
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Choosing a USB Connection Mode (USB Mode)
MENU G S [USB Mode]
Choose how the camera functions when connected to external devices via USB.
Auto You will be prompted to choose a connection mode each time a USB
cable is connected.
Storage The camera functions as an external storage device. The data on the
camera memory card can be copied to the computer.
MTP The pictures on the memory card can be viewed or copied to the
computer using standard software supplied with Windows.
M PC RAW
Employing computer controls available via Olympus Workspace, process
pictures using the camera’s high-speed image processing engine. You
can also edit RAW pictures stored on memory cards inserted in the
camera. Be sure to install and launch the latest version of Olympus
Workspace on your computer (P. 274).
• RAW processing is not available with pictures taken with other cameras
or when the camera battery is low.
0The camera can be controlled from the computer, while pictures shot
using OLYMPUS Capture can be downloaded as they are taken. For
more information, see “Connecting to Computers via USB” (P. 274).
USB PD The camera can be powered by external devices connected via USB.
For more information, see “Powering the Camera via USB (USB Power
Delivery)” (P. 278).
232
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Live Bulb Update Frequency (Live Bulb)
MENU G U [Live Bulb]
Choose the frequency with which the display is updated during live bulb photography
in mode B (bulb). The display will be refreshed at the selected interval while live bulb
photography is in progress, allowing you to view the results in the display.
• [Live Bulb] options can also be displayed by pressing the MENU button during [BULB] or
[LIVE BULB] photography.
Live Time Update Frequency (Live Time)
MENU G U [Live Time]
Choose the frequency with which the display is updated during live time photography
in mode B (bulb). The display will be refreshed at the selected interval while live time
photography is in progress, allowing you to view the results in the display.
• [Live Time] options can also be displayed by pressing the MENU button during [TIME] or
[LIVE TIME] photography.
233
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Choosing the Shutter Speed (Composite Settings)
MENU G U [Composite Settings]
The exposure time for each exposure made during live composite photography can be
chosen in advance using the menus.
1
Highlight [Composite Settings] in G Custom Menu
U and press the Q button.
1
2
D2
D3
D4
E1
E2
E3
F
D1
E2
E2. Exp/ISO/BULB/p
Live Bulb
Bulb/Time Monitor
Live Composite Timer
–7
3h
Bulb/Time Timer 8min
Live Time 0.5sec
Composite Settings
Off
KFlicker Scan Off
100
%
Back Set
2
Highlight an option using the FG buttons.
• Choose an exposure time of from 1/2 to 60 s.
100
%Composite Settings
1sec
Exposure time per image.
Exposure time and aperture
will determine your base exposure.
Back Set
3
Press the Q button to select the highlighted option.
• G Custom Menu U will be displayed.
4
Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.
• The maximum exposure time can be selected using [Live Composite Timer] in G Custom
Menu U (P. 192). The default setting is [3h].
• This item applies during still photography in B (bulb) mode. See page 54 for more
information on composite photography.
• [Composite Settings] options can also be displayed by pressing the MENU button in
[LIVE COMP] mode.
234
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Reducing Flicker Under LED Lighting (K Flicker Scan)
MENU G U [K Flicker Scan]
Banding may occur in photographs taken under LED lighting. Use [K Flicker Scan] to
optimize shutter speed while viewing banding in the display.
• This item is for still photography.
• This item can be used in S, M, and silent mode and with High Res Shot and Pro Capture
shooting.
• The range of available shutter speeds is reduced.
1
Choose shooting and drive modes.
• Choose shooting mode S or M.
• Choose one of the following drive modes:
- Silent mode (♥o, ♥S, ♥T, ♥X, ♥Z, or ♥c)
- High Res Shot (h)
- Pro Capture (q or p)
2
Highlight [K Flicker Scan] in G Custom Menu U
and press the Q button.
1
2
D2
D3
D4
E1
E2
E3
F
D1
E2
Off
100
%E2. Exp/ISO/BULB/p
Live Bulb
Bulb/Time Monitor
Live Composite Timer
–7
3h
Bulb/Time Timer 8min
Live Time 0.5sec
Composite Settings
Off
KFlicker Scan
Back Set
3
Highlight [On] using the FG buttons and press the
Q button.
• The camera will return to the previous menu.
1
2
D2
D3
D4
E1
E2
E3
F
D1
E2
100
%E2. Exp/ISO/BULB/p
Live Bulb
Bulb/Time Monitor
Live Composite Timer
–7
3h
Bulb/Time Timer 8min
Live Time 0.5sec
Composite Settings
Off
KFlicker Scan Off
Back Set
Off
On
4
Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the
menus.
• The camera will exit to the shooting display. A P
icon
will be displayed.
S
128.6
P
100
%
P icon
235
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
5
Choose a shutter speed while viewing the display.
• Choose a shutter speed using the front or rear dial or the FG buttons. If desired,
the shutter speed can be selected by keeping FG pressed.
• You can also rotate the front dial to adjust shutter speed in the exposure increments
selected for [EV Step] in G Custom Menu T.
• Continue adjusting shutter speed until banding is no longer visible in the display.
• Press the INFO button; the display will change and the
P
icon will no longer
be displayed. You can adjust aperture and exposure compensation. Do so using the
front or rear dial or the arrow pad.
• Press the INFO button repeatedly to return to the fl icker scan display.
6
Take pictures once settings have been adjusted to your satisfaction.
• Focus peaking, the LV super control panel, and live controls are not available in the fl icker
scan display. To view these items, fi rst press the INFO button to exit the fl icker scan
display.
%
• [K Flicker Scan] can be assigned to a button. You then need only press the button to
enable fl icker scan. g “Assigning functions to buttons (Button Function)” (P. 116)
Fine-Tuning Exposure (Exposure Shift)
MENU G V [Exposure Shift]
Fine-tune exposure. Use this option if you want the results of auto exposure to be
consistently brighter or darker.
• This item applies during both still photography and movie recording.
• Fine-tuning is not normally required. Use only as necessary. In normal circumstances,
exposure can be adjusted using exposure compensation (P. 68).
• Fine-tuning exposure reduces the amount of exposure compensation available in the
direction (+ or −) exposure was fi ne-tuned.
• Exposure fi ne-tuning can be applied to the following metering methods.
Metering Fine-tuning amount
p (digital ESP)
−1 to +1 EV in steps of 1/6 EV
B (center-weighted averaging)
C (spot)
236
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Shutter speeds when the fl ash fi res (#X-Sync./#Slow Limit)
MENU G W [#X-Sync.]/[#Slow Limit]
You can set shutter speed conditions for when the fl ash fi res.
• This item is for still photography.
Shooting
mode Flash fi ring shutter speed Upper limit Lower limit
PThe camera automatically sets the
shutter speed. [#X-Sync.]
setting
[#Slow Limit]
setting
A
SThe set shutter speed No lower limit
M
Combinations of JPEG image sizes and compression rates
(K Set)
MENU G X [K Set]
You can set the JPEG image quality by combining image size and compression rate.
• This item is for still photography.
Image size Compression rate
Application
Name Pixel Count SF
(Super Fine) F
(Fine) N
(Normal)
Y (Large) 5184×3888* YSF* YF* YN* Select for the print
size
X (Middle) 3200×2400* XSF XFXN*
1920×1440
W (Small) 1280×960 WSF WFWNFor small prints and
use on a website
1024×768
* Default
237
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Setting the card to record to (Card Slot Settings)
MENU G Y [Card Slot Settings]
When there are cards in both slots 1 and 2, you can select which card to record still
images and movies to.
1
Highlight [Card Slot Settings] in G Custom Menu Y and press the Q button.
2
Use FG to select the item and press I.
• Use FG to select the setting and press the Q button.
K Save Settings Choose the recording method for still images. g “Setting the
saving method for shooting data (K Save Settings)” (P. 99)
K Save Slot Choose the card used to record photographs. This option takes
effect when [Standard] or [Auto Switch] is selected for [K Save
Settings].
n Save Slot Choose the card used to record movies.
q Slot Choose the card used for still image playback when [K Save
Settings] is set to [Dual Independent 1], [Dual Independent 3],
[Dual Same 1], or [Dual Same 3].
Assign Save Folder Choose the destination folder.
• This option is also available when only one card is inserted.
• Settings other than [n Save Slot] and [Assign Save Folder] can only be accessed in still
photography modes.
%
• You can also choose a card for playback using the q button. Hold the q button and
rotate the front or rear dial to switch cards while playback is in progress. This does not
change the option selected for [q Slot].
• When [z] (Auto Switch) is selected for [K Save Settings], the camera will automatically
switch between the last picture on the fi rst card and the fi rst picture on the second card.
• In n (movie) mode, the slot selected for [n Save Slot] also serves as the [q Slot].
238
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Assign Save Folder
1
Select [Assign Save Folder] and press I.
2
Select [Assign] and press I.
3
Select a folder and press the Q button.
• If you select [New Folder], specify the 3-digit folder number and press the Q button.
• If you select [Existing Folder], use FG to select the
existing folder and press the Q button.
The fi rst 2 frames and the last frame in the selected
folder are displayed.
Existing Folder
100OLYMP 5671
101OLYMP 30
200OLYMP 49
202OLYMP 125
305OLYMP 3250
420OLYMP 108
500OLYMP 427
100
%
Back Set
239
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Saving lens info (Lens Info Settings)
MENU G Y [Lens Info Settings]
The camera can store information for up to 10 lenses that do not conform to the Micro
Four Thirds or Four Thirds system standards. These data also supply the focal length
used for the image stabilization and keystone compensation features.
• This item applies during both still photography and movie recording.
1
Select [Create Lens Information] for [Lens Info Settings] in G Custom Menu
Y.
2
Select [Lens Name] and enter a lens name. After entering a name, highlight
[END] and press the Q button.
3
Use FGHI to choose the [Focal Length].
4
Use FGHI to choose the [Aperture Value].
5
Select [Set] and press the Q button.
• The lens will be added to the lens info menu.
• When a lens that does not supply info automatically is attached, the info used is indicated
by checks (v). Highlight lenses to which you want to add checks (v) and press the Q
button.
%
• [Lens Info Settings] can be assigned to a button. The button can then be used to recall
lens info, for example after lenses are exchanged. g “Assigning functions to buttons
(Button Function)” (P. 116)
240
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Selecting the display style of the viewfi nder (EVF Style)
MENU G a [EVF Style]
Style 1/2: Similar to fi lm camera viewfi nder displays.
Style 3: The same as the monitor display.
1:02:03
1023
250 F5.6
ISO-A
200
P
100
%
WB
AUTO
0.0
ISO-A
200
1023
1:02:03
P
250 F5.6
100
%
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
30p
4K
0.0
YFYF
Style 1/ Style 2 Style 3
Viewfi nder display when shooting using the viewfi nder (Style 1/Style 2)
1:02:03
1023
250 F5.6 +2.0
WB
AUTO
Sh-3 Mid+2 Hi+6
ISO-A
200
100
%P
AEL
C1
#
G
1:02:03
1023
250 F5.6 +2.0
WB
AUTO
Sh-3 Mid+2 Hi+6
ISO-A
200
#
100
%P
AEL
C1
w
1
w
1
G
+2.0
WB
AUTO
ISO-A
200
●
REC
00:12
PC
G
2345 6 7 8 9
0efg kjihl
op
m
n
1
bcdaq
1 OVF simulation *1 .....................P. 197
2 Flash ...............................................P. 84
(blinks: charging in progress, lights up:
charging completed)
3 AF confi rmation mark......................P. 42
4 Custom mode .........................P. 57, 142
5 AE lock....................................P. 77, 201
6 Live view boost .............................P. 188
7 Highlight & shadow control ...........P. 115
8 White balance .................................P. 94
9 ISO sensitivity ...........................P. 75, 91
0 Battery level ....................................P. 32
a Card write indicator ...................P. 21, 27
b Wireless LAN connection
status ....................................P. 245, 256
c Active Bluetooth® connection ......P. 246
d Active connection to computer (Wi-Fi)
......................................................P. 256
e Shooting mode.........................P. 41 –60
f Pro Capture active ..........................P. 81
g Preview .........................................P. 117
h Shutter speed ..........................P. 44 – 50
i Aperture value ........................ P. 44 – 50
j Exposure compensation value........P. 68
k Top: Flash intensity control ...........P. 105
Bottom: Exposure compensation ....P. 68
l Card slot settings
Top: n Save slot ..........................P. 237
Bottom: K Save settings ..............P. 99
m Available recording time ...............P. 317
n Number of storable still pictures ...P. 316
o Level gauge *2 .................................P. 40
p Active connection to computer (USB) *3
......................................................P. 274
q Recording time (displayed during
recording)........................................P. 59
*1 Displayed in the viewfi nder only. g G Custom Menu a > [S-OVF] (P. 197)
*2 Displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway. g G Custom Menu a >
[V Half Way Level] (P. 197)
*3 Displayed only if a computer is currently selected in the [0] menu as the sole
destination for new pictures (P. 275).
241
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Viewfi nder Info Display Options (V Info Settings)
MENU G a [V Info Settings]
Choose the information that can be viewed by pressing the INFO button in the
viewfi nder display. Just as you can with the monitor, you can display a histogram or
level gauge in the viewfi nder by pressing the INFO button. This item is used to choose
the types of display available. It takes effect when [Style 1] or [Style 2] is selected for
[EVF Style].
• This item is for still photography. The option selected for [n Info Settings] takes effect in
n mode (P. 164).
Basic Information The camera displays icons and the like showing camera settings.
Custom1/
Custom2
In addition to the base display, you can opt to view or hide:
[&]: A histogram superimposed on the display in the viewfi nder.
[Highlight&Shadow]: Tints applied to over- and under-exposed areas.
[Level Gauge]: The level gauge.
• Items marked with checks (v) appear in the viewfi nder display.
• To choose the custom displays available in the viewfi nder, highlight [Custom1] or
[Custom2] and press I on the arrow pad.
Button Hold Options (Press-and-hold Time)
MENU G b [Press-and-hold Time]
Choose how long buttons must be pressed to perform resets and other similar
functions for various features. For ease of use, button hold times can be set separately
for different features.
• This item applies during both still photography and movie recording.
Available Features
• End LV a
• Reset LV a Frame
• End H (movie teleconverter zoom
frame display)
• Reset H Frame (movie teleconverter
zoom frame position)
• Reset F
• Reset x (fl ash compensation)
• Reset W (highlight and shadow control)
• Reset c (color creator)
• Reset N
• Call EVF Auto Switch
• End qa
• End D
• Reset D
• Switch G Lock (touch controls)
• Call BKT Settings
• End Flicker Scan
242
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
Correcting Fisheye Distortion (Fisheye Compensation)
MENU G b [Fisheye Compensation]
Correct distortion caused by fi sheye lenses to give photos the appearance of pictures
taken with a wide-angle lens. The amount of correction can be selected from three
different levels. You can also opt simultaneously to correct distortion in photos taken
under water.
• This option is available in P, A, S, M, and B modes.
• This option is only available with compatible fi sheye lenses.
As of November 2019, it could be used with the M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 8mm f1.8 Fisheye
PRO.
Angle When fi sheye correction is performed, the picture is cropped to
eliminate blacked-out areas. Choose from three different crops.
j/i Correction Choose whether to correct distortion in photos taken under water in
addition to the correction performed using [Angle].
1
Highlight [Fisheye Compensation] in G Custom
Menu b and press the Q button.
1
2
H1
H2
I
J1
J2
G
J1
100
%J1. KUtility
Back Set
Level Adjust
Press-and-hold Time
Pixel Mapping
Touchscreen Settings
Menu Recall
Fisheye Compensation Off
On
Recall
2
Highlight [On] using the FG buttons and press the
I button.
• [Angle] and [j/i Correction] will be displayed.
1
2
H1
H2
I
J1
J2
G
J1
Off
100
%J1. KUtility
Back Set
Fisheye Compensation
Level Adjust
Press-and-hold Time
Pixel Mapping
Touchscreen Settings
Menu Recall
On
Recall
Off
On
3
Highlight an item using the FG buttons and press
the I button.
• Highlight an option using the FG buttons and press
the Q button.
• If you are not taking photos under water, choose [Off]
for [j/i Correction].
• [Fisheye Compensation] options will be displayed.
1
Off
100
%
j/i Correction
Angle
Fisheye Compensation
Back Set
243
EN
Menu functions (Custom menus)
4
4
Press the Q button repeatedly to exit to the G Custom Menu b.
• After confi rming that [On] is selected for [Fisheye Compensation], press the MENU
button to exit the menus.
• When fi sheye compensation is enabled, a A icon will
be displayed together with the selected crop.
Fisheye compensation
ISO-A
200
1023
1:02:03
P
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
250 F5.6 0.0
30p
30p
4K
1
YFYF
100
%
5
Take pictures.
• Pictures taken with [RAW] selected for image quality are recorded in RAW + JPEG format.
Fisheye compensation is not applied to the RAW image.
• Focus peaking is not available in the fi sheye compensation display.
• AF-target selection is restricted to single- and small-target modes.
• The following cannot be used:
live composite photography, burst photography, bracketing, HDR, multiple exposure,
the live ND fi ler, keystone compensation, the digital teleconverter, movie recording,
[C-AF], [C-AFb], [C-AF+TR], and [C-AF+TRb] AF modes, [e-Portrait] and art fi lter
picture modes, the custom self-timer, and High Res Shot.
%
• [Fisheye Compensation] can be assigned to a button. You then need only press the button
to enable fi sheye correction. g “Assigning functions to buttons (Button Function)”
(P. 116)
244
EN
Connecting the Camera to External Devices
5
5
A number of tasks can be accomplished by connecting the camera to an external
device such as a computer or smartphone. Choose a connection type and software
according to your goals.
Precautions for Using Wi-Fi and Bluetooth®
Disable wireless LAN and Bluetooth® in countries, regions, or locations in which their
use is prohibited.
The camera is equipped with wireless LAN and Bluetooth®. Use of these features in
countries outside the region of purchase may violate local wireless regulations.
Some countries and regions may prohibit the acquisition of location data without
prior governmental permission. In some Olympus sales areas, the camera may
consequently ship with location data displays disabled.
Each country and region has its own laws and regulations. Check them before traveling
and observe them while abroad. Olympus assumes no liability for any failure on the
part of the user to observe local laws and regulations.
Disable Wi-Fi on airplanes and in other locations where their use is prohibited.
g “Disabling Wi-Fi/Bluetooth®” (P. 255, 271)
• Wireless transmissions are vulnerable to interception by third parties. Use wireless
features with this in mind.
• The wireless transceiver is located in the camera grip. Keep it as far away as practicable
from metal objects.
• When transporting the camera in a bag or other container, be aware that the contents
of the container or the materials of which it is constructed may interfere with wireless
transmissions, which can prevent the camera connecting to a smartphone.
• Wi-Fi connections increase the drain on the batteries. The connection may be lost during
use if the batteries are low.
• Devices such as microwave ovens and cordless phones that generate radio-frequency
emissions, magnetic fi elds, or static electricity may slow or otherwise interfere with
wireless data transmission.
• Some wireless LAN features are unavailable when the memory card write-protect switch
is in the “LOCK” position.
Connecting the Camera to External
Devices
245
EN
Connecting the Camera to External Devices
5
Connecting to Smartphones via Wi-Fi
Connect the camera and smartphone using a direct Wi-Fi link.
Installing Apps
To connect to the camera from your smartphone via Wi-Fi, use “OLYMPUS Image
Share” (OI.Share).
What You Can Do Using OLYMPUS Image Share
• Download pictures from the camera (P. 251)
• Take pictures remotely (P. 253)
• Save camera settings to your smartphone
• Update camera fi rmware
OLYMPUS Image Share is available for download from:
http://app.olympus-imaging.com/oishare/
In addition to OI.Share, Olympus offers the following apps for viewing sensor logs and
retouching pictures:
• OLYMPUS Image Track (OI.Track)
Use “OLYMPUS Image Track” (OI.Track) to view and manage fi eld sensor logs recorded
with the camera (P. 254).
OLYMPUS Image Track is available for download from:
http://app.olympus-imaging.com/oitrack/
• OLYMPUS Image Palette (OI.Palette)
Use “OLYMPUS Image Palette” (OI.Palette) to retouch pictures downloaded to the
smartphone. Supported are such features as art fi lters, the Color Creator, and cropping
pictures.
OLYMPUS Image Palette is available for download from:
http://app.olympus-imaging.com/oipalette/
246
EN
Connecting the Camera to External Devices
5
Connecting to Smartphones (Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings)
Adjust camera settings for connection to a smartphone. OI.Share (P. 245) is required.
Changes made using OI.Share apply to both Wi-Fi and Bluetooth®. Install the app on
the smartphone before proceeding.
Readying the Camera (Availability)
Enable Wi-Fi and Bluetooth® on the camera. Note that this is not necessary at default
settings, as Wi-Fi is enabled by default. The camera displays a w icon when Wi-Fi is
enabled.
1
Press the MENU button to display the menus.
2
Highlight [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] in the e setup
menu and press I on the arrow pad.
1
2
j±0 k±0
100
%
Off
English
s
W
X Settings
Card Setup
Rec View
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings
Firmware
Back Set
Setup Menu
3
Highlight [Availability] using the FG buttons and
press the I button. Connection Password
Power-off Standby
RAW+JPEG h
Availability On
Off
JPEG
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings
100
%
Wi-Fi MAC Address
Reset Settings
Back Set
4
Highlight [On] using the FG buttons and press the
Q button.
• [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] options will be displayed.
100
%
Back Set
Availability
On
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth is made available
for a connection.
5
Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.
• A V icon will be displayed. V icon
ISO-A
200
1023
1:02:03
P
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
250 F5.6 0.0
30p
30p
4K
YFYF
100
%
247
EN
Connecting the Camera to External Devices
5
Pairing the Camera and Smartphone
Follow the steps below when connecting the devices for the fi rst time.
• Adjust pairing settings using OI.Share, not the settings app that is part of the smartphone
operating system.
1
Launch the copy of the dedicated OI.Share app
previously installed on your smartphone.
2
Press the MENU button on the camera to display the camera menus.
3
Highlight [TWi-Fi Connect] in the q playback
menu and press I on the arrow pad.
• [TWi-Fi Connect] options will be displayed.
• This item is only available when [On] is selected for
[Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] > [Availability] in the camera
e setup menu.
1
2
On
100
%Playback Menu
Reset Protect
Print Order
Edit
R
Reset share Order
Copy All
TWi-Fi Connect
Back Set
4
Highlight [Device Connection] using the FG
buttons and press the Q button.
• A pairing guide will be displayed in the camera monitor.
100
%TWi-Fi Connect
Device Connection
Access Point Connection
Back Set
5
Press the Q button after reading each page of instructions.
• Stop when you reach the following display.
Bluetooth Name
Bluetooth Passcode
Wi-Fi SSID
Wi-Fi Password
: xxxxxxxxxxx
: 000000
: xxx-x-x-xxxxxxxx
: 00000000
3/3
100
%
ww
Scan the QR code, using
the Olympus Image Share
app.
Connection Setup
Disconnect
QR code
Wi-Fi SSID
Wi-Fi password
Bluetooth local name
Bluetooth passcode
• The display lists the Bluetooth local name and passcode, the Wi-Fi SSID and
password, and a QR code.
248
EN
Connecting the Camera to External Devices
5
6
Tap the camera icon at the bottom of the OI.Share
display.
• An [Easy Setup] tab will be displayed.
7
Following the instructions displayed by OI.Share,
scan the QR code to proceed with pairing.
• OI.Share will display a message when settings are
complete.
• If the smartphone is unable to read the QR code, you
will need to confi gure the device manually following the
instructions displayed by OI.Share.
- Bluetooth®: In the OI.Share Bluetooth® settings
dialog, select the local name displayed in the
camera monitor and enter the passcode.
- Wi-Fi: Display Wi-Fi settings in the smartphone
settings app and enter the SSID and password
displayed by the camera. For information on the
settings app, see the documentation for your
smartphone.
Bluetooth Name
Bluetooth Passcode
Wi-Fi SSID
Wi-Fi Password
: xxxxxxxxxxx
: 000000
: xxx-x-x-xxxxxxxx
: 00000000
3/3
100
%
ww
Scan the QR code, using
the Olympus Image Share
app.
Connection Setup
Disconnect
• w1 will be displayed when pairing is complete.
8
Once the devices are paired, tap [Import Photos]
in the smartphone OI.Share display to view the
pictures on the camera memory card.
• To end the connection, press the camera MENU button
or tap [Disconnect] in the monitor.
• You can also end the connection by turning the camera
off from inside the OI.Share display.
• You can change the connection password generated by the camera (P. 272).
249
EN
Connecting the Camera to External Devices
5
Connecting When the Camera Is Off (Power-off Standby)
The camera can be confi gured not to end the connection to the smartphone when
turned off. The smartphone can then access the camera and automatically download
pictures while the camera is off.
• Before proceeding, confi rm that:
- [On] is selected for [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] > [Availability] (P. 246),
- the camera and smartphone are paired (P. 247), and
- a memory card is inserted
• The camera performs network-related processing while powering down with [On]
(enabled) selected for [Power-off Standby]. It may therefore require additional time to
power on immediately after having been turned off.
Select When turning the camera off via the ON/OFF lever, you will be prompted to
choose whether the wireless connection to the smartphone remains active while
the camera is off.
Off Turning the camera off ends the wireless connection to the smartphone.
On The wireless connection to the smartphone remains active after the camera is
turned off. The smartphone can be used to download pictures from the camera or
view the pictures on the camera memory card.
1
Press the MENU button to display the menus.
2
Highlight [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] in the e setup
menu and press I on the arrow pad.
1
2
j±0 k±0
100
%
Off
English
s
W
X Settings
Card Setup
Rec View
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings
Firmware
Back Set
Setup Menu
3
Highlight [Power-off Standby] using the FG
buttons and press the I button. On
Off
100
%
JPEG
Connection Password
Power-off Standby
RAW+JPEG *1
Availability
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings
Wi-Fi MAC Address
Reset Settings
Back Set
4
Highlight an option using the FG buttons and
press the Q button.
100
%
Back Set
Power-off Standby
On
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth connection can be
initiated by a device even when
power is off.
5
Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.
250
EN
Connecting the Camera to External Devices
5
[Select]
If you select [Select] for [Power-off Standby], a confi rmation
dialog will be displayed the next time the camera is turned
off. Highlight an option using FG on the arrow pad and
press the Q button.
100
%
Set
Power-off Standby
Yes
No
Activate Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Power-off
Standby so images can be imported
while power is off?
Yes The camera will turn off, leaving the wireless connection to the smartphone active.
No The camera will end the connection to the smartphone before turning off.
• If no operations are performed about a minute after the confi rmation dialog is displayed,
the camera will end the wireless connection to the smartphone and turn off automatically.
• The connection will end automatically under the conditions listed below. The connection
will be re-enabled when next you turn the camera on.
- 12 hours pass with no data being exchanged with the smartphone.
- The memory card is removed and reinserted.
- The batteries are replaced.
251
EN
Connecting the Camera to External Devices
5
Copying Pictures to Smartphones
Pictures on the camera memory card can be downloaded to a smartphone using either
of the following methods:
• Use the smartphone to select pictures for download.
• Automatically download previously-selected pictures while the camera is off.
g “Selecting Pictures for Sharing (Share Order)” (P. 132)
These methods are described below.
Downloading Pictures Selected with OI.Share
Use the smartphone to view the pictures on the camera and select pictures for
download.
1
Connect to the camera using OI.Share (P. 247).
2
Tap [Import Photos] in OI.Share.
• OI.Share will list the images on the camera.
• The memory card can be selected using OI.Share.
3
Select pictures and tap the save button.
2020
/
02
/
15 (3)
2020
/
02
/
14 (10)
01:23 01:00
4K
252
EN
Connecting the Camera to External Devices
5
Auto Download
Pictures previously marked for sharing on the camera can be downloaded
automatically when the camera is off.
1
Mark pictures for sharing.
• Display pictures and mark them for sharing. See “Selecting Pictures for Sharing
(Share Order)” (P. 132) for more information.
2
Choose the operation performed when the camera is off.
• Choose an option for [Power-off Standby]. See “Connecting When the Camera Is Off
(Power-off Standby)” (P. 249) for more information.
• MENU button e (setup menu) [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] [Power-off
Standby] Highlight [On] or [Select] and press the Q button
3
Turn the camera off.
• The selected photos and movies will be uploaded to the smartphone automatically. If
you are using an iOS device, launch OI.Share on the smartphone before turning the
camera off.
• If [Select] is chosen for [Power-off Standby], a confi rmation dialog will be displayed
(P. 250). Highlight [Yes] and press the Q button.
• Up to 200 pictures on each slot can be marked for sharing at a time.
• iOS devices will not connect to the camera automatically via a router or other wireless
access point. Use OI.Share to download pictures.
• Some smartphones may end download on entering sleep mode. Confi gure the
smartphone to not enter sleep mode.
253
EN
Connecting the Camera to External Devices
5
Remote Photography Using a Smartphone
Use OI.Share to control the camera remotely and take pictures from a smartphone.
• Not all shooting options are available.
1
Connect to the camera using OI.Share (P. 247).
2
Tap [Remote Control] in OI.Share.
• Remote control options will be displayed.
3
Tap the shutter button to take pictures.
• The pictures will be saved to the memory card.
Shutter button
254
EN
Connecting the Camera to External Devices
5
Adding position information to images
You can add GPS tags to images that were taken while the GPS log was saving by
transferring the GPS log saved on the smartphone to the camera.
1
Before taking pictures with the camera, launch OI.Track on the smartphone to
begin saving the GPS log.
• Before starting a GPS track log, you will need to connect once via OI.Track and
synchronize the clock.
• You can use the phone or other apps while the GPS log is saving. Do not terminate
OI.Track.
2
Once you have fi nished taking pictures with the camera, end tracking in
OI.Share.
3
Tap the V icon in the camera monitor to connect to the smartphone.
• You can also connect by selecting [TWi-Fi Connect] in the q playback menu
(P. 247).
4
Upload the GPS log to the camera using OI.Track.
• The GPS log will be used to add location data to any pictures taken after you
launched OI.Track in Step 1.
• g is displayed on images to which position information has been added.
• Addition of location information can only be used with smartphones that have a GPS
function.
• Position information cannot be added to movies.
255
EN
Connecting the Camera to External Devices
5
Ending the Connection
End the connection to the smartphone. The camera uses Wi-Fi and Bluetooth® when
connecting to smartphones. The use of these features may be prohibited in some
countries or regions, in which case they should be disabled.
Ending the Current Connection
1
Use the [Power Off] slider in the OI.Share or
OI.Track settings dialog.
• Alternatively, you can press the camera MENU button
and tap [Disconnect] in the monitor.
100
%
w
1
w
1
Connect to a device.
Device Connection
Disconnect
DisconnectMENU button
E-M1MarkIII
2
Select [Off] for [Power-off Standby] to disable the “auto upload while off”
feature.
• MENU button e setup menu [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] [Power-off
Standby] [Off]
Disabling Wi-Fi/Bluetooth®
1
Press the MENU button to display the menus.
2
Highlight [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] in the e setup
menu and press I on the arrow pad.
1
2
j±0 k±0
100
%
Off
English
s
W
X Settings
Card Setup
Rec View
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings
Firmware
Back Set
Setup Menu
3
Highlight [Availability] using the FG buttons and
press the I button. Connection Password
Power-off Standby
RAW+JPEG h
Availability On
Off
JPEG
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings
100
%
Wi-Fi MAC Address
Reset Settings
Back Set
4
Highlight [Off] using the FG buttons and press the
Q button.
100
%
Back Set
Off
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth is completely
deactivated and a connection
cannot be initiated.
Availability
256
EN
Connecting the Camera to External Devices
5
Connecting to Computers via Wi-Fi
Connect the camera and computer via Wi-Fi. Using Wi-Fi, the camera can connect via
a router to a computer on a household network or the like.
Installing Software
Use “OLYMPUS Capture” to connect the camera and computer via Wi-Fi.
OLYMPUS Capture
Use “OLYMPUS Capture” to automatically download and view pictures taken with a
camera connected via Wi-Fi to the same network as the computer. To learn more or to
download the software, visit the website below. When downloading the software, be
prepared to provide the camera serial number.
http://app.olympus-imaging.com/olympuscapture/
Follow the on-screen instructions to install the software. System requirements and
installation instructions are available at the website above.
257
EN
Connecting the Camera to External Devices
5
Readying the Computer (Windows)
If Windows is unable to detect a camera connected via a router or access point, follow
the steps below to register the device manually.
Windows 8/Windows 10
1
Click the [Start] button on the computer desktop to display the Start menu.
2
Click (Settings) to display [Windows Settings]
options.
3
Click [Devices] to display options for [Bluetooth &
other devices].
4
Click [Add Bluetooth or other devices].
5
Click [+ Everything else].
• An [Add a device] window will open and [E-M1 Mark III] will be displayed after a short
pause.
6
Click [E-M1 Mark III].
• When a message is displayed stating the preparation is complete, click [Done].
Windows 7
1
Launch Windows Explorer and select “Network”.
• [E-M1 Mark III] will be displayed in Windows Explorer.
2
Right-click [E-M1 Mark III] and select [Install].
• A message will be displayed when device registration is complete.
• Check that the device is registered in the Device Manager.
258
EN
Connecting the Camera to External Devices
5
Pairing the Computer with the Camera (New Link)
The camera and computer must be paired in order to connect. Up to four computers
can be paired with the camera at a time. To pair a computer with the camera, connect it
via USB. Pairing need only be performed once per computer.
1
After confi rming that the camera is off, connect it to the computer using the
USB cable.
USB port
USB connector
Small connector
USB cable
• The locations of USB ports vary from computer to computer. See the documentation
provided with the computer for information on USB ports.
2
Turn the camera on.
• The camera will display a message prompting you to identify the device to which the
USB cable is connected.
• If the message is not displayed, select [Auto] for [USB Mode] (P. 190) in G Custom
Menu S.
• If the batteries are very low, the camera will not display a message when connecting
to a computer. Be sure the batteries are charged.
3
Highlight [0] using FG on the arrow pad and
press the Q button.
100
%
USB
0
MTP
USB PD
PC RAW
Exit
Set
Storage
4
Launch the copy of “OLYMPUS Capture” installed
on the computer.
• After starting up, “OLYMPUS Capture” will prompt you
to choose the connection type. USB Connection Wi-Fi Connection
Create new link
259
EN
Connecting the Camera to External Devices
5
5
Click the [+] to the right of [Create new link].
• If nothing happens, reconnect the camera.
USB Connection Wi-Fi Connection
Create new link
+
• Enter the name that will be used on the camera to identify
the computer. The default is the computer’s “Computer
Name”.
• The name used on the camera can be up to 15
characters long.
Create new link
Pair camera with this PC?
PC Name:
CancelSettings
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
6
Click [Settings] in “OLYMPUS Capture”.
• When a message is displayed stating that pairing is
complete, disconnect the camera as instructed. Create new link
Pair camera with this PC?
PC Name:
CancelSettings
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
[Settings]
• Repeat the above steps to pair the camera with each additional computer.
• The pairing information stored on the camera can be viewed and deleted using
“OLYMPUS Capture”.
260
EN
Connecting the Camera to External Devices
5
Adjusting Wi-Fi Settings (TWi-Fi Connect)
Adjust settings for connection to the network to which the paired computer belongs.
Before the camera can connect to the computer via Wi-Fi, it must be confi gured for
connection to the network via the Wi-Fi router or access point. Multiple network profi les
can be stored on the camera and recalled as desired. [TWi-Fi Connect] settings can
be adjusted via the following methods:
Connect by WPS
Confi gure the camera for automatic connection (P. 262).
To connect using a WPS router or access point, simply press the
device’s WPS button.
[PBC Method]: Connect using only the router WPS button. The
camera connects automatically when the button is pressed.
[PIN Method]: The camera connects in PIN mode. Enter the camera
PIN on the router to connect.
Connect from
Access Point List
Choose the network from a list (P. 266).
The camera will search for available networks; to connect, select a
network from the list and enter the network password.
Connect manually Adjust connection settings manually (P. 264).
To connect, enter the network name (SSID) and other settings.
• WPS connections require a WPS-compatible router or access point.
• Connecting via WPS in PIN mode requires that the router itself be connected to a
administrator computer from which the PIN can be entered.
• Manual connection requires that you have information on the network to which you are
connecting.
• The camera can connect via routers or access points of the following types:
- Standard: IEEE802.11a/b/g/n/ac
- Band: 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz
- Security: WPA2
• The camera can store settings for up to eight networks. The camera will automatically
connect to networks to which it has previously connected.
• Each new connection after the eighth overwrites settings for the connection that has been
left unused for the longest period of time.
• Adding a network profi le for an access point with the same MAC address as existing
profi le overwrites the settings for the existing profi le.
• For information on using routers or access points, see the documentation provided with
the device.
• Network profi les are not reset when you select [
Full
] for
[Reset / Custom Modes]
(P. 141) > [Reset]
in
W
Shooting Menu 1. To reset network settings, use [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Settings] (P. 273) > [Reset Settings] in the e setup menu.
261
EN
Connecting the Camera to External Devices
5
Enabling Camera Wi-Fi (Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings)
Before connecting to a network via Wi-Fi, you will need to enable Wi-Fi on the camera.
Note that this is not necessary at default settings, as Wi-Fi is enabled by default.
Proceed to page 262.
1
Press the MENU button to display the menus.
2
Highlight [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] in the e setup
menu and press I on the arrow pad.
1
2
j±0 k±0
100
%
Off
English
s
W
X Settings
Card Setup
Rec View
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings
Firmware
Back Set
Setup Menu
3
Highlight [Availability] using the FG buttons and
press the I button. Connection Password
Power-off Standby
RAW+JPEG h
Availability On
Off
JPEG
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings
100
%
Wi-Fi MAC Address
Reset Settings
Back Set
4
Highlight [On] using the FG buttons and press the
Q button.
• [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] options will be displayed.
100
%
Back Set
Availability
On
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth is made available
for a connection.
5
Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.
262
EN
Connecting the Camera to External Devices
5
Connecting via WPS (Connect by WPS)
Connect using the WPS feature on the router or access point.
1
Press the MENU button on the camera to display the camera menus.
2
Highlight [TWi-Fi Connect] in the q playback
menu and press I on the arrow pad.
• [TWi-Fi Connect] options will be displayed.
• This item is only available when [On] is selected for
[Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] > [Availability] in the camera
e setup menu.
1
2
On
100
%Playback Menu
Reset Protect
Print Order
Edit
R
Reset share Order
Copy All
TWi-Fi Connect
Back Set
3
Highlight [Access Point Connection] using the FG
buttons and press the Q button.
• [Access Point Connection] options will be displayed.
100
%TWi-Fi Connect
Device Connection
Access Point Connection
Back Set
4
Highlight [Connect by WPS] using the FG buttons
and press the Q button.
100
%
ww
Access Point Connection
Connect from Access Point List
Connect by WPS
Connect manually
Back Set
5
Highlight an option using the FG buttons and
press the Q button.
• If you selected [PBC Method], press the WPS button on
the router or access point.
• Press the camera Q button to start the connection.
• Some time may be required for connection after the
button is pressed.
100
%
ww
Connect by WPS
PBC Method
PIN Method
Connect by pressing WPS button
on the access point.
Back Set
• If you selected [PIN Method], the camera will display
a PIN; enter it on the router or access point. Press the
camera Q button when the router is ready to connect.
100
%
12345678
ww
PIN Method
Connect
Enter PIN code displayed above
on the access point.
Connection starts
after you press Q.
Back
263
EN
Connecting the Camera to External Devices
5
6
If the camera is able to connect, the network will
be displayed with a check (v) next to the network
name.
• If the camera has been paired with more than one
computer, you will be prompted to choose a computer
before the network is displayed. Highlight the desired
computer using the FG buttons and press the Q
button.
• The camera can be used only with the selected
computer. To select a different computer, you must fi rst
terminate the current connection.
100
%
ww
SSID_001 w
Access Point Connection
R/
Close
Connect by WPS
Connect manually
Set
• If the connection fails, the camera will display a
message to that effect, followed by the options shown in
Step 5. Repeat Steps 5–6.
100
%
ww
Connection failed
7
Press the Q button to exit to the shooting display.
• The camera will return to the standard shooting display.
A w icon will be displayed in the monitor. w icon
ISO-A
200
1023
1:02:03
P
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
250 F5.6 0.0
30p
30p
4K
YFYF
ww
100
%
264
EN
Connecting the Camera to External Devices
5
Connecting Manually (Manual Connections)
Adjust network settings manually. You will need to provide:
SSID The network name (SSID).
Authentication The type of security used on the network.
Password The password for connection to a secured network.
IP Address Assign Choose whether the camera IP address is assigned automatically by
the network DHCP server.
IP Address
These fi elds are required when the IP address is assigned manually.
The settings used vary with the network.
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
DNS
1
Press the MENU button on the camera to display the camera menus.
2
Highlight [TWi-Fi Connect] in the q playback
menu and press I on the arrow pad.
• [TWi-Fi Connect] options will be displayed.
• This item is only available when [On] is selected for
[Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] > [Availability] in the camera
e setup menu.
1
2
On
100
%Playback Menu
Reset Protect
Print Order
Edit
R
Reset share Order
Copy All
TWi-Fi Connect
Back Set
3
Highlight [Access Point Connection] using the FG
buttons and press the Q button.
• [Access Point Connection] options will be displayed.
100
%TWi-Fi Connect
Device Connection
Access Point Connection
Back Set
4
Highlight [Connect manually] using the FG
buttons and press the Q button.
100
%
ww
Access Point Connection
Connect from Access Point List
Connect by WPS
Connect manually
Back Set
265
EN
Connecting the Camera to External Devices
5
5
Highlight items using the FG buttons and press
the Q button.
• Options for the selected item will be displayed.
SSID SSID_001
100
%
ww
Authentication
IP Address Assign
Start Connection
None
Auto(DHCP)
Connect manually
Cancel Set
SSID Enter the network SSID.
Authentication Select the type of security used on the network. Choose from
[None] and [WPA2].
Password
If you selected [WPA2] for [Authentication], enter the network
password.
IP Address Assign Choose from [Auto(DHCP)] and [Manual]. Automatic IP address
assignment requires a network with a DHCP server confi gured to
supply IP addresses automatically.
IP Address
These fi elds are required when [Manual] is selected for [IP
Address Assign].
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
DNS
6
Highlight [Start Connection] using the FG buttons
and press the Q button.
100
%
SSID SSID_001
ww
Connect manually
Cancel Set
Authentication
IP Address Assign
Start Connection
None
Auto(DHCP)
7
If the camera is able to connect, the network will
be displayed with a check (v) next to the network
name.
• If the camera has been paired with more than one computer,
you will be prompted to choose a computer before the
network is displayed. Highlight the desired computer using
the FG buttons and press the Q button.
• The camera can be used only with the selected
computer. To select a different computer, you must fi rst
terminate the current connection.
100
%
ww
SSID_001 w
Access Point Connection
R/Close
Connect by WPS
Connect manually
Set
• If the connection fails, the camera will display a
message to that effect, followed by the options shown in
Step 6. Repeat Steps 5–6.
100
%
ww
Connection failed
266
EN
Connecting the Camera to External Devices
5
8
Press the Q button to exit to the shooting display.
• Standard shooting indicators will be displayed. A w
icon will appear in the monitor.
w icon
ISO-A
200
1023
1:02:03
P
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
250 F5.6 0.0
30p
30p
4K
YFYF
ww
100
%
Choosing a Network from a List (Connect from Access Point List)
The camera will search for available networks and display them in a list from which you
can choose the network to which you wish to connect.
1
Press the MENU button on the camera to display the camera menus.
2
Highlight [TWi-Fi Connect] in the q playback
menu and press I on the arrow pad.
• [TWi-Fi Connect] options will be displayed.
• This item is only available when [On] is selected for
[Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] > [Availability] in the camera
e setup menu.
1
2
On
100
%Playback Menu
Reset Protect
Print Order
Edit
R
Reset share Order
Copy All
TWi-Fi Connect
Back Set
3
Highlight [Access Point Connection] using the FG
buttons and press the Q button.
• [Access Point Connection] options will be displayed.
100
%TWi-Fi Connect
Device Connection
Access Point Connection
Back Set
4
Highlight [Connect from Access Point List] using the
FG buttons and press the Q button.
• A list of available networks will be displayed.
100
%
ww
Access Point Connection
Connect from Access Point List
Connect by WPS
Connect manually
Back Set
5
Highlight the desired network using the FG
buttons and press the Q button.
• If the network is password-protected, you will be
prompted to enter a password. Enter the password and
press the Q button.
• Press the I button to display [Detail Settings] for the
highlighted network. You can enter an IP address and
adjust other settings manually.
• Press the R button to repeat the search and update the
network list.
SSID_001
100
%
w
ww
Connect from Access Point List
R/ ConnectBack
267
EN
Connecting the Camera to External Devices
5
6
If the camera is able to connect, the network will be displayed with a check
(v) next to the network name.
• Password-protected networks are indicated by a t icon.
• If the camera has been paired with more than one computer, you will be prompted to
choose a computer before the network is displayed. Highlight the desired computer
using the FG buttons and press the Q button.
• The camera can be used only with the selected computer. To select a different
computer, you must fi rst terminate the current connection.
• If the connection fails, the camera will display a
message to that effect, followed by the options shown in
Step 5. Repeat Steps 5–6.
100
%
ww
Connection failed
7
Press the Q button to exit to the shooting display.
• Standard shooting indicators will be displayed. A w
icon will appear in the monitor.
w icon
ISO-A
200
1023
1:02:03
P
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
250 F5.6 0.0
30p
30p
4K
YFYF
ww
100
%
$ Connecting to Previously-Selected Networks
• The camera will automatically reconnect to previously-selected networks when you
select [Access Point Connection] via the V icon. You will not be required to supply a
password.
• If multiple networks are available, the camera will connect fi rst to the most recently-used
network.
• Once the camera has connected, it will display a list of available networks with the current
network shown by a check mark v.
• To connect to a different network, highlight it in the list and press the Q button.
• If the camera has been paired with more than one computer on the network, you will be
prompted to choose a computer before the network list is displayed. Highlight the desired
computer using the FG buttons and press the Q button.
268
EN
Connecting the Camera to External Devices
5
Uploading Pictures as They Are Taken
Take pictures and upload them to a computer on the same network as the camera.
Before proceeding, connect the camera and computer as described in “Pairing the
Computer with the Camera (New Link)” (P. 258).
1
Launch “OLYMPUS Capture” on destination
computer.
• If prompted to choose a connection type, click [
Wi-Fi
Connection
].
• The computer will display the message, [Camera
connected] when the camera is detected.
USB Connection Wi-Fi Connection
Create new link
Exit
[Wi-Fi Connection]
• The camera will display the message shown at right
when a connection is established.
100
%PC connection started
Close
Camera is connected to PC.
Recorded images are automatically
transferred to PC.
2
Confi gure “OLYMPUS Capture” to automatically
download pictures as they are taken.
• Select the source card slot (1 or 2) and the type of
pictures (JPEG photos, RAW photos, or movies) to be
downloaded.
• Choose a destination for the downloaded pictures.
Select file types to export
Slot 1
Slot 2
Save in
Original
Files waiting
The “OLYMPUS Capture”
control window
3
Take pictures using camera controls.
• The pictures will be uploaded to the computer after they are saved to the camera
memory card.
• A p (“image upload”) icon will be displayed while
upload is in progress.
• The camera will upload only photos and movies
recorded while the camera and computer are
connected. Any pictures taken before Wi-Fi was
enabled on the camera will not be uploaded.
Image upload
ISO-A
200
1023
1:02:03
P
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
250 F5.6 0.0
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
30p
30p
4K
YFYF
w
p
w
p
100
%
269
EN
Connecting the Camera to External Devices
5
• While the camera is connected to a network:
- Sleep mode is disabled
- Interval-timer photography is not available
- Some restrictions apply to the options available during playback
• [PC connection ended] options will be displayed when the camera’s connection to the
network ends. Upload of any remaining data will resume when the connection is re-
established. Note, however, that remaining data will not be uploaded if:
- The Wi-Fi connection is ended using camera controls
- The camera is turned off
- The source memory card is removed
• The upload queue for each card can contain no more than 3000 pictures.
• If “OLYMPUS Capture” displays the message [This application is unable to fi nd a camera
in the camera control mode.], check:
- that the camera has been paired with the computer,
- that you selected the correct computer when connecting to the network, and
- that the camera is registered with the computer (Windows only). g “Readying the
Computer (Windows)” (P. 257)
270
EN
Connecting the Camera to External Devices
5
Ending the Connection
End the Wi-Fi connection. The use of Wi-Fi may be prohibited in some countries or
regions, in which case Wi-Fi should be disabled.
Ending the Current Connection
1
Tap V in the camera monitor.
ISO-A
200
1023
1:02:03
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
250 F5.6 0.0
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
30p
30p
4K
YFYF
P
100
%
• You will be prompted to confi rm whether you wish to
disconnect.
• The network SSID is shown in the display.
100
%
SSID: SSID_001
ww
Access Point Connection
Disconnect
Maintain
Wi-Fi is running
Back Set
2
Highlight [Disconnect] using FG on the arrow pad and press the Q button.
• The camera will terminate the connection and exit to the shooting display.
• A confi rmation dialog will be displayed if data remain to be uploaded. To terminate the
connection, highlight [Yes] and press the Q button.
3
To reconnect, tap V or select [TWi-Fi Connect] > [Access Point
Connection] in the q playback menu and press the Q button.
• The camera will automatically reconnect to previously-selected networks.
• To connect to a new network, highlight [Maintain] in Step 2 and press the Q button.
Choose from a list of available networks and adjust settings as described in “Choosing a
Network from a List (Connect from Access Point List)” (P. 266).
• If you turn the camera off while upload is in progress, you will be prompted to choose
whether to power the camera down and terminate the Wi-Fi connection immediately or to
power the camera down only after upload is complete.
271
EN
Connecting the Camera to External Devices
5
Disabling Wi-Fi/Bluetooth®
1
Press the MENU button to display the menus.
2
Highlight [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] in the e setup
menu and press I on the arrow pad.
• [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] options will be displayed.
1
2
j±0 k±0
100
%
Off
English
s
W
X Settings
Card Setup
Rec View
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings
Firmware
Back Set
Setup Menu
3
Highlight [Availability] using the FG buttons and
press the I button. Connection Password
Power-off Standby
RAW+JPEG h
Availability On
Off
JPEG
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings
100
%
Wi-Fi MAC Address
Reset Settings
Back Set
4
Highlight [Off] using the FG buttons and press the
Q button.
100
%
Back Set
Off
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth is completely
deactivated and a connection
cannot be initiated.
Availability
272
EN
Connecting the Camera to External Devices
5
Network Settings
Change the password used for Wi-Fi connections from a smartphone or restore default
Wi-Fi settings used for connection to a computer. The latter are not restored when a
camera reset is performed and can only be restored as described below.
Changing Passwords (Connection Password)
Generate new passwords for use when connecting to the camera from a smartphone
via Wi-Fi or Bluetooth®.
1
Press the MENU button to display the menus.
2
Highlight [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] in the e setup
menu and press I on the arrow pad.
• [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] options will be displayed.
1
2
j±0 k±0
100
%
Off
English
s
W
X Settings
Card Setup
Rec View
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings
Firmware
Back Set
Setup Menu
3
Highlight [Connection Password] using the FG
buttons and press the I button.
• The current password will be displayed.
On
Off
100
%
JPEG
Connection Password
Power-off Standby
RAW+JPEG h
Availability
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings
Wi-Fi MAC Address
Reset Settings
Back Set
4
Press the R (movie) button.
• The password changes each time the button is pressed.
• Both the Wi-Fi and Bluetooth® passwords change.
• Press the Q button to exit the [Connection Password] display.
5
Press the Q button again to exit the [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] menu.
• Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.
• After changing the password, you will need to update smartphone connection settings
(P. 246).
273
EN
Connecting the Camera to External Devices
5
Restoring Default Wi-Fi/Bluetooth® Settings (Reset Settings)
Restore default Wi-Fi and Bluetooth® settings. All settings, including those for
connection via a router and pairing information for the computers on the network, are
reset.
1
Press the MENU button to display the menus.
2
Highlight [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] in the e setup
menu and press I on the arrow pad.
• [Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] options will be displayed.
1
2
j±0 k±0
100
%
Off
English
s
W
X Settings
Card Setup
Rec View
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings
Firmware
Back Set
Setup Menu
3
Highlight [Reset Settings] using the FG buttons
and press the I button.
• [Reset Settings] options will be displayed.
On
Off
100
%
JPEG
Connection Password
Power-off Standby
RAW+JPEG h
Availability
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings
Wi-Fi MAC Address
Reset Settings
Back Set
4
Highlight [Yes] using the FG buttons and press
the Q button.
• Settings will be reset and the camera will exit to the
[Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings] display.
• Both the Wi-Fi and Bluetooth® passwords will be reset.
100
%
Back Set
Reset Settings
Reset all Wi-Fi and Bluetooth
settings?
Yes
No
5
Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.
274
EN
Connecting the Camera to External Devices
5
Connecting to Computers via USB
Connect the camera to a computer using the USB cable.
Compatible Computers
Connect the camera to the computer using the supplied USB cable.
• Note that even if the computer is equipped with USB connectors, operation is not
guaranteed with:
USB expansion ports, computers not running the operating system with which they
shipped, or homemade computers.
• The camera can be connected to computers that meet the following system requirements.
Windows: Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows 10
Mac: OS X versions 10.9 – 10.11, macOS versions v10.12 – v10.14
Installing Software
Install the following software to access the camera while it is connected directly to the
computer via USB.
OLYMPUS Capture
Use “OLYMPUS Capture” to automatically download and view pictures as they are
taken or control the camera remotely. To learn more or to download the software,
visit the website below. When downloading the software, be prepared to provide the
camera serial number.
http://app.olympus-imaging.com/olympuscapture/
Follow the on-screen instructions to install the software. System requirements and
installation instructions are available at the website above.
Olympus Workspace
This computer application is used to download, view, and manage photos and movies
recorded with the camera. When editing RAW data in the Olympus Workspace
(Ver. 1.1 or later), high-speed processing using the camera engine has been enabled.
It can also be used to update the camera fi rmware. The software can be downloaded
from the website below. Be prepared to provide the camera serial number when
downloading the software.
https://support.olympus-imaging.com/owdownload/
Follow the on-screen instructions to install the software. System requirements and
installation instructions are available at the website above.
275
EN
Connecting the Camera to External Devices
5
Uploading Pictures as They Are Taken (0)
Connect the camera to a computer via USB to upload pictures as they area taken.
You can take pictures using the controls on the camera body or while controlling the
camera remotely from the computer.
1
After confi rming that the camera is off, connect it to the computer using the
USB cable.
USB port
USB connector
Small connector
USB cable
• The locations of USB ports vary from computer to computer. See the documentation
provided with the computer for information on USB ports.
2
Turn the camera on.
• The camera will display a message prompting you to identify the device to which the
USB cable is connected.
• If the message is not displayed, select [Auto] for [USB Mode] (P. 190) in G Custom
Menu S.
• If the batteries are very low, the camera will not display a message when connecting
to a computer. Be sure the batteries are charged.
3
Highlight [0] using FG on the arrow pad and
press the Q button.
100
%
USB
0
MTP
USB PD
PC RAW
Exit
Set
Storage
4
Launch the copy of “OLYMPUS Capture” installed on the computer.
• When prompted to choose the connection type, click
[USB Connection].
USB Connection Wi-Fi Connection
Create new link
Exit
[USB Connection]
276
EN
Connecting the Camera to External Devices
5
5
Confi gure “OLYMPUS Capture” for download.
• Choose a destination for the downloaded pictures.
6
Take pictures using camera or computer controls.
• The pictures will be downloaded to the computer according to the options chosen.
• The computer cannot be used to change the camera shooting mode.
• The computer cannot be used to delete pictures from the memory cards inserted in the
camera.
• The camera display frame rate may drop if the view through the camera lens is displayed
simultaneously both on the computer and in the camera monitor.
• See online help for more information on using the software.
• The connection to the computer will end if you:
- exit “OLYMPUS Capture”,
- insert or remove memory cards, or
- turn the camera off.
Connecting the Camera for High-Speed RAW Processing
(M PC RAW)
1
After confi rming that the camera is off, connect it to the computer using the
USB cable.
2
Turn the camera on.
• The camera will display a message prompting you to identify the device to which the
USB cable is connected.
• If the message is not displayed, select [Auto] for [USB Mode] (P. 190) in G Custom
Menu S.
• If the batteries are very low, the camera will not display a message when connecting
to a computer. Be sure the batteries are charged.
3
Highlight [M PC RAW] using FG on the arrow
pad and press the Q button.
100
%
USB
0
MTP
USB PD
PC RAW
Exit
Set
Storage
4
Launch the copy of “Olympus Workspace” installed on the computer.
• Click the [USB RAW Data Edit] icon.
5
Choose the location containing the pictures to be processed.
• You can choose either a memory card inserted in the connected camera, or a folder
on the computer.
• Only RAW pictures in the chosen location taken with the connected camera or
another camera of the same model can be selected.
• After choosing the source, click [OK].
277
EN
Connecting the Camera to External Devices
5
6
Process RAW images.
• Adjustments can be made to the shooting settings available on the camera and RAW
pictures processed accordingly.
• The processed copies will be saved in JPEG format.
• Enabling USB RAW data editing cancels any changes previously made in the edit
window.
• USB RAW data editing is not available when two or more cameras are connected.
Copying Pictures to the Computer (Storage/MTP)
When connected to a computer, the camera can function as external storage in much
same way as a hard drive or other external storage device. Data can be copied from
the camera to the computer.
1
After confi rming that the camera is off, connect it to the computer using the
USB cable.
2
Turn the camera on.
• The camera will display a message prompting you to identify the device to which the
USB cable is connected.
• If the message is not displayed, select [Auto] for [USB Mode] (P. 190) in G Custom
Menu S.
• If the batteries are very low, the camera will not display a message when connecting
to a computer. Be sure the batteries are charged.
3
Highlight [Storage] or [MTP] using FG on the
arrow pad and press the Q button.
[Storage]: The camera functions as a card reader.
[MTP]: The camera functions as a portable device.
100
%
USB
0
MTP
USB PD
PC RAW
Exit
Set
Storage
4
The camera will connect to the computer as new storage device.
• Data transfer is not guaranteed in the following environments, even if your computer
is equipped with a USB port.
Computers with a USB port added by means of an extension card, etc., computers
without a factory-installed OS, or home-built computers
• Camera functions cannot be used while the camera is connected to the computer.
• If the computer fails to detect the camera, disconnect and reconnect the USB cable.
278
EN
Connecting the Camera to External Devices
5
Powering the Camera via USB (USB Power Delivery)
Mobile batteries or USB AC adapters conforming to the USB Power Delivery (USB PD)
standard can be used to power the camera. The devices must:
Standard: Conform to the USB Power Delivery (USB PD) standard
Output: Be rated for an output of 9 V 3 A, 15 V 2 A, or 15 V 3 A
• This feature cannot be used at battery levels of 10% or less.
• The camera cannot draw power via USB while an optional HLD-9 power battery holder is
attached (P. 24).
1
After confi rming that the camera is off, use the USB cable to connect it to the
device.
USB connector
Type C
Type CUSB port
Mobile battery or other USB
device
USB cable
• The supplied USB cable (CB-USB11) cannot be used for USB Power Delivery (USB
PD).
• The method used for connection varies from device to device. See the documentation
provided with the device for details.
• You may be unable to use USB Power Delivery (USB PD) with some USB devices.
See the manual supplied with the USB device.
2
Turn the camera on.
• The camera will display a message prompting you to identify the device to which the
USB cable is connected.
• If the message is not displayed, select [Auto] for [USB Mode] (P. 190) in G Custom
Menu S.
• If the batteries are very low, the display will remain blank when the camera is
connected to the USB device. Be sure the batteries are charged.
3
Highlight [USB PD] using FG on the arrow pad
and press the Q button.
• The camera will draw power from the connected USB
device.
USB
0
MTP
100
%
USB PD
PC RAW
Exit
Set
Storage
279
EN
Connecting the Camera to External Devices
5
Connecting to TVs or External Displays via HDMI
Pictures can be displayed on televisions connected to the camera via HDMI. Use the
television to display pictures to an audience. The TV remote can be used to control the
display while the television is connected to the camera. No app or other software is
required.
You can also fi lm movies while the camera is connected to an external monitor or video
recorder via HDMI.
• HDMI cables are available from third-party suppliers. Use an HDMI-certifi ed cable.
280
EN
Connecting the Camera to External Devices
5
Viewing Pictures on a TV (HDMI)
Photos and movies can be viewed on a high-defi nition TV connected directly to the
camera by means of an HDMI cable. A remote control can be used to operate the
display while it is connected to the camera.
HDMI Output
Choose the signal output to the HDMI device. You can adjust movie frame size and
frame rate to match TV specifi cations and the video standards supported in your
country or region. Match output settings to the input settings on the TV.
Output Size
The format for the video signal output via the HDMI connector can
be chosen from the options below.
• [C4K]: 4K Digital Cinema (4096 × 2160)
• [4K]: 4K (3840 × 2160) priority
• [1080p]: Full High Defi nition (1080p) priority
• [720p]: High Defi nition (720p) priority
• [480p/576p]: 480p/576p
HDMI Control
When the camera is in playback mode, it can be operated using the
television remote control (P. 282). Choose from [Off] and [On]. When
[On] is selected, the camera can be used for playback only.
Output Frame Rate Choose a frame rate for the signal output via the HDMI connector
according to whether the television supports NTSC (60p) or PAL
(50p).
• [HDMI Control] and [Output Frame Rate] settings cannot be changed while the camera is
connected to another device via HDMI.
• Audio can be output only on devices that support the audio format selected with the
camera.
• The options available via [HDMI Control] vary with the device connected. See the device
manual for details.
1
Press the MENU button to display the menus.
2
Display G Custom Menu S (Disp/8/PC).
1
2
D2
D3
D4
E1
E2
E3
F
D1
D4
On
100
%D4. Disp/8/PC
USB Mode
HDMI
8
Auto
Back Set
3
Highlight [HDMI] using FG on the arrow pad and
press the I button.
1
2
D2
D3
D4
E1
E2
E3
F
D1
D4
On
100
%D4. Disp/8/PC
USB Mode
HDMI
8
Auto
Back Set
281
EN
Connecting the Camera to External Devices
5
4
Highlight an item using the FG buttons and press
the I button.
100
%HDMI
HDMI Control
Output Frame Rate
Output Size
60p Priority
Back Set
Off
1080p
5
Highlight the desired option using the FG buttons
and press the Q button.
• Repeat Steps 4 and 5 as required.
100
%HDMI
HDMI Control
Output Frame Rate
Output Size
60p Priority
Off
1080p
Back Set
C4K
4K
1080p
720p
480p/576p
6
Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.
Connecting the Camera to a TV
Connect the camera using an HDMI cable.
1
After confi rming that the camera is off, connect it to the TV using an HDMI
cable.
HDMI cable
(Connect to the HDMI connector on
the TV.)
HDMI connector
Type D
Type A
2
Switch the TV to HDMI input and turn the camera on.
• The TV will show the contents of the camera monitor. Press the q button to view
pictures.
• If [On] is selected for [HDMI Control] (P. 282), the camera monitor will turn off when an
HDMI cable is connected.
• For information on switching to HDMI input, see the manual provided with the TV.
• Depending on TV settings, the image may be cropped and some indicators may not be
visible.
• HDMI cannot be used while the camera is connected to a computer via USB.
• If [Record Mode] is selected for [n HDMI Output] (P. 164) > [Output Mode] in the
n video menu, the signal will be output at the current movie frame size. No image will be
displayed if the TV does not support the selected frame size.
• If [4K] or [C4K] is selected, 1080p priority format will be used during still photography.
282
EN
Connecting the Camera to External Devices
5
Using a TV Remote (HDMI Control)
When connected to a TV via an HDMI cable, the camera can be operated using the
television remote control.
• The television must support HDMI control. See the television manual for more information.
On The television remote control can be used to operate the camera in playback mode.
The camera can be used for playback only.
Off The television remote control cannot be used to operate the camera. Indicators
appear only in the TV display.
1
Press the MENU button to display the menus.
2
Highlight [HDMI] in G Custom Menu S (Disp/8/
PC) and press I on the arrow pad.
1
2
D2
D3
D4
E1
E2
E3
F
D1
D4
On
100
%D4. Disp/8/PC
USB Mode
HDMI
8
Auto
Back Set
3
Highlight [HDMI Control] using the FG buttons
and press the I button.
100
%
HDMI Control
Output Frame Rate
Output Size
60p Priority
Off
1080p
HDMI
Back Set
4
Highlight [On] using the FG buttons and press the
Q button.
100
%
HDMI Control
Output Frame Rate
Output Size
60p Priority
HDMI
Back Set
Off
1080p
Off
On
5
Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.
6
Connect the camera and TV via HDMI.
• Play pictures back using the TV remote. Follow the guide displayed on the TV screen.
• In single-frame playback, use the “red” button to choose the information displayed
and the “green” button to switch to the index display.
• Some functions may be unavailable on some televisions.
• The camera monitor turns off while the TV is used for playback.
283
EN
Cautions
6
6
Battery and charger
• The camera uses a single Olympus lithium-ion battery. Never use any battery other than
genuine OLYMPUS batteries.
• The camera’s power consumption varies widely with usage and other conditions.
• As the following consume a lot of power even without shooting, the battery will be drained
quickly.
• Performing auto focus repeatedly by pressing the shutter button halfway in shooting
mode.
• Displaying images on the monitor for a prolonged period.
• When connected to a computer.
• Leaving wireless LAN/Bluetooth® enabled.
• When using a drained battery, the camera may turn off without the low battery warning
being displayed.
• The battery will not be fully charged at the time of purchase. Charge the battery using the
provided charger before use.
• Remove the batteries before putting the camera into storage for periods of a month or
more. Leaving the batteries in the camera for extended periods shortens their lives,
potentially rendering them unusable.
• The normal charging time using the supplied charger is approximately 2 hours (estimated).
• Do not attempt to use chargers not specifi cally designated for use with the supplied
battery, or to use batteries not specifi cally designated for use with the supplied charger.
• There is a risk of explosion if the battery is replaced with the incorrect battery type.
• Dispose of the used battery following the instructions “CAUTION” (P. 323) in the
instruction manual.
Cautions
284
EN
Cautions
6
Using your charger abroad
• The charger can be used in most home electrical sources within the range of 100 V to
240 V AC (50/60 Hz) around the world. However, depending on the country or area you
are in, the AC wall outlet may be shaped differently and the charger may require a plug
adapter to match the wall outlet.
• Do not use commercially available travel adapters as the charger may malfunction.
Usable cards
In this manual, all storage devices are referred to as “cards”. The
following types of SD memory card (commercially available) can
be used with this camera: SD, SDHC, and SDXC. For the latest
information, please visit the Olympus website.
SD card write protect switch
The SD card body has a write protect switch. Setting the switch to
“LOCK” prevents data being written to the card. Return the switch to
the unlock position enable writing.
LOCK
• The data in the card will not be erased completely even after formatting the card or
deleting the data. When discarding, destroy the card to prevent leakage of personal
information.
• Access to some playback functions and the like may be restricted when the write-protect
switch is in the “LOCK” position.
285
EN
Cautions
6
Interchangeable lenses
Choose a lens according to the scene and your creative intent. Use
lenses designed exclusively for the Micro Four Thirds system and
bearing the M.ZUIKO DIGITAL label or the symbol shown at right.
With an adapter, you can also use Four Thirds System and OM System
lenses. The optional adapter is required.
• When you attach or remove the body cap and lens from the camera, keep the lens mount
on the camera pointed downward. This helps prevent dust and other foreign matter from
getting inside the camera.
• Do not remove the body cap or attach the lens in dusty places.
• Do not point the lens attached to the camera toward the sun. This may cause the camera
to malfunction or even ignite due to the magnifying effect of sunlight focusing through the
lens.
• Be careful not to lose the body cap and rear cap.
• Attach the body cap to the camera to prevent dust from getting inside when no lens is
attached.
Lens and camera combinations
Lens Camera Attachment AF Metering
Micro Four Thirds system
lens Micro Four Thirds
system camera
Yes Yes Yes
Four Thirds system lens Attachment possible
with mount adapter
Yes*1Yes
OM System lenses No Yes*2
*1 Not available during movie recording or starry sky AF.
*2 Accurate metering is not possible.
286
EN
Cautions
6
MF Clutch Lenses
The “MF clutch” (manual focus clutch) mechanism on MF clutch lenses can be used to
switch between auto and manual focus simply by repositioning the focus ring.
• Check the position of the MF clutch before shooting.
• Sliding the focus ring to the AF/MF position at the end of the lens selects autofocus, while
sliding it to the MF position closer to the camera body selects manual focus, regardless of
the focus mode chosen with the camera.
Focus distances visible
2153mm
∞
0.5
5.6 8 11 16
5.681116
2153mm
∞
0.5
5.6 8 11 16
5.681116
Focus ring
AF/MF MFAF/MF MF
• Selecting [Inoperative] for [MF Clutch] (P. 184) in G Custom Menu I disables manual
focus even when the MF clutch is in the MF position.
287
EN
Cautions
6
Optional Accessories
Designated External Flash Units
When using an optional fl ash unit designed for use with the camera, you can choose
the fl ash mode using camera controls and take pictures with the fl ash. See the
documentation provided with the fl ash unit for information on fl ash features and their
use.
Choose a fl ash unit to suit your needs, taking into consideration such factors as
the output required and whether the unit supports macro photography. Flash units
designed to communicate with the camera support a variety of fl ash modes, including
TTL auto and super FP. Flash units can be mounted on the camera hot shoe or
connected using a cable (available separately) and fl ash bracket. The camera also
supports the following wireless fl ash control systems:
Radio-Controlled Flash Photography: CMD, #CMD, RCV, and X-RCV Modes
The camera controls one or more remote fl ash units by means of radio signals. The
range of locations in which fl ash units can be placed increases. Flash units can control
other compatible units or be fi tted with radio commander/receivers to allow the use of
units that do not otherwise support radio fl ash control.
Wireless Remote-Control Flash Photography: RC Mode
The camera controls one or more remote fl ash units by means of optical signals. The
fl ash mode can be selected using camera controls (P. 105).
Features Available with Compatible Flash Units
Flash unit Supported fl ash control
modes GN (Guide Number,
ISO 100) Supported wireless
systems
FL-700WR
TTL-AUTO, MANUAL,
FP TTL AUTO,
FP MANUAL, MULTI, RC,
SL MANUAL
GN 42 (75/150 mm *1)
GN 21 (12/24 mm *1)CMD, #CMD, RCV,
X-RCV, RC
FL-900R TTL-AUTO, AUTO,
MANUAL, FP TTL AUTO,
FP MANUAL, MULTI, RC,
SL AUTO, SL MANUAL
GN 58 (100/200 mm *1)
GN 27 (12/24 mm *1)RC
FL-600R GN 36 (42.5/85 mm *1)
GN 20 (12/24 mm *1)RC
STF-8 TTL-AUTO, MANUAL,
RC *2GN 8.5 RC *2
FL-LM3 Varies with camera
settings. GN 9.1 (12/24 mm *1) RC *2
*1 Maximum lens focal length at which unit can provide fl ash coverage (fi gures following
slashes are 35 mm format equivalent focal lengths).
*2 Functions as commander (transmitter) only.
288
EN
Cautions
6
Wireless remote control fl ash photography
Wireless fl ash photography is available with compatible fl ash units that support
wireless remote control (RC). The remote fl ash units are controlled via a unit mounted
on the camera hot shoe. Settings can be adjusted separately for the camera-mounted
unit and units in up to three other groups.
RC mode must be enabled on both the master and remote fl ash units (P. 287).
Enabling RC Mode
1
Set the remote fl ash units to RC mode and place them as desired.
• Turn the external fl ash units on, press the MODE button, and select RC mode.
• Select a channel and group for each external fl ash unit.
2
Select [On] for [#RC Mode] (P. 193) in G Custom Menu W and press the
Q button.
• The camera will exit to the shooting display.
• An q icon will be displayed. q icon
ISO-A
200
1023
1:02:03
P
S-IS AUTOS-IS AUTO
250 F5.6
RC
#
0.0
30p
30p
4K
YFYF
100
%
3
Press the Q button.
• The RC mode super control panel will be displayed.
• The standard LV super control panel can be displayed
by pressing the INFO button. The display will change
each time the INFO button is pressed.
A Mode
P
250
1023
1:02:03
F5.6
TTL
Manual
Off
+5.0
TTL +3.0
1/8
–
Low
1Ch
100
%
RC mode super control panel
289
EN
Cautions
6
4
Adjust fl ash settings.
• Highlight items using the FGHI buttons and rotate the rear dial to choose
settings.
Flash compensation
A Mode
P
250
1023
1:02:03
F5.6
TTL
Manual
Off
+5.0
TTL +3.0
1/8
–
Low
1
Ch
100
%
Group
Flash mode
Optical signal strength
Channel
Flash control mode
Group Choose a group. Changes to settings apply to all units in
the selected group. Choose Q to adjust settings for the unit
mounted on the camera.
Flash control mode Choose a fl ash mode.
Flash compensation Adjust fl ash output. When [Manual] is selected for fl ash mode,
you can a value for manual fl ash output.
Optical signal
strength
Choose the brightness of the optical control signals emitted by
the fl ash units. Choose [HI] if you have placed fl ash units at
close to the maximum distance from the camera. This setting
applies to all groups.
Flash mode/
fl ash level
Choose # (standard) or FP (super FP). Choose super FP for
shutter speeds faster than the fl ash sync speed. This setting
applies to all groups.
Channel Choose the channel used for fl ash control. Change the
channel if you fi nd that other light sources in the area are
interfering with remote fl ash control.
5
Set the unit mounted on the camera to [TTL AUTO].
• Flash control settings for the FL-LM3 can only be adjusted using the camera.
Positioning Remote Flash Units
1
Set the wireless RC fl ash units to RC mode.
• After turning compatible fl ash units on, press the MODE button and choose RC
mode.
• Choose a group for each of the compatible fl ash units using fl ash controls and match
the channel to that selected with the camera.
2
Position the fl ash units.
• Position the wireless units with the remote sensors facing the camera.
3
Take pictures after confi rming that the remote units and the unit on the
camera are charged.
290
EN
Cautions
6
Wireless Flash Control Range
The illustration is intended as a guide only. The fl ash control range varies with the type
of fl ash mounted on the camera and the conditions in the surrounding area.
Flash Control Range for Camera-Mounted FL-LM3 Flash Units
7m
5m
100°100°
50°
50° 50°
50°
60°
60°
30°
30°
30°
30°
• We recommend that each group contain no more than 3 fl ash units.
• Wireless fl ash photography is not available in anti-shock mode or in rear-curtain slow sync
mode when a shutter speed slower than 4 s is selected.
• Start wait times longer than 4 s cannot be selected in anti-shock and silent modes.
• Flash control signals may interfere with exposure if subject is too close to the camera.
This can be mitigated by reducing the brightness of the camera fl ash, for example by
using a diffuser.
Other external fl ash units
Note the following when using a third-party fl ash unit mounted on the camera hot shoe:
• Using obsolete fl ash units that apply currents of more than about 250 V to the X-contact
will damage the camera.
• Connecting fl ash units with signal contacts that do not conform to Olympus specifi cations
may damage the camera.
• Select mode M, choose a shutter speed no faster than the fl ash sync speed, and set
[K ISO] to [AUTO].
• Flash control can only be performed by manually setting the fl ash to the ISO sensitivity
and aperture values selected with the camera. Flash brightness can be adjusted by
adjusting either ISO sensitivity or aperture.
• Use a fl ash with an angle of illumination suited to the lens. Angle of illumination is usually
expressed using 35-mm format equivalent focal lengths.
291
EN
Cautions
6
Principal Accessories
Remote cable (RM-CB2)
Use when the slightest camera movement can result in blurred pictures, for example
for macro or bulb photography. Connect the cable to the camera remote cable terminal
(P. 17).
Converter lenses
Converter lenses attach to the camera lens for quick and easy fi sh-eye or macro
photography. See the OLYMPUS website for information on the lenses that can be
used.
Eyecup (EP-13)
You can switch to a large-size eyecup.
Removal
1
2
292
EN
Cautions
6
System chart
: E-M1 Mark 3 compatible products
: Commercially available products
For the latest information, please visit the Olympus website.
*1 HDMI cables are available from third-party suppliers.
*2 There are restrictions on the lenses that can be used with the adapter. Visit the OLYMPUS website for
details.
*3 Visit the OLYMPUS website for information on compatible lenses.
Software
Olympus Workspace
Digital Photo Managing Software
Headphone Microphone
Remote
Operation
RM-CB2
Remote Cable
SD/SDHC/
SDXC
Memory Card
Case / Strap Shoulder Strap /
Camera Case
Power Supply
BCH-1
Lithium-ion Charger
BLH-1
Lithium-ion battery
HLD-9
Power Battery
Holder
AC-5
AC Adapter
Connection
Cable USB Cable /
HDMI Cable *1
F-5AC
USB-AC Adapter
Viewfinder
EP-13
Eyecup
293
EN
Cautions
6
Lens
MMF-2/MMF-3*2
Four Thirds Adapter
Four Thirds system
lenses
Micro Four Thirds system lenses
Converter
Lens*3
FCON-P01
Fisheye
WCON-P01
Wide
MCON-P01
Macro
MCON-P02
Macro
Flash
FL-900R
Electronic Flash
FL-LM3
Electronic Flash FL-700WR
Electronic Flash
FC-WR
Wireless Radiowave
Commander
STF-8
Macro Flash FR-WR
Wireless Radiowave
Receiver
294
EN
Information
7
7 Information
Cleaning and storing the camera
Cleaning the camera
Turn off the camera and remove the battery before cleaning the camera.
• Do not use strong solvents such as benzene or alcohol, or a chemically treated cloth.
Exterior:
• Wipe gently with a soft cloth. If the camera is very dirty, soak the cloth in mild soapy water
and wring well. Wipe the camera with the damp cloth and then dry it with a dry cloth. If you
have used the camera at the beach, use a cloth soaked in clean water and well wrung.
Monitor:
• Wipe gently with a soft cloth.
Lens:
• Blow dust off the lens with a commercially available blower. For the lens, wipe gently with
a lens cleaning paper.
Storage
• When not using the camera for a prolonged period, remove the battery and card. Store
the camera in a cool, dry place that is well ventilated.
• Insert the battery periodically and test the camera’s functions.
• Remove dust and other foreign matter from the body and rear caps before attaching them.
• Attach the body cap to the camera to prevent dust from getting inside when no lens is
attached. Be sure to replace the front and rear lens caps before putting the lens away.
• Clean the camera after use.
• Do not store with insect repellent.
• Avoid storing the camera in places where chemicals are treated, in order to protect the
camera from corrosion.
• Mold may form on the lens surface if the lens is left dirty.
• Check each part of the camera before use if it has not been used for a long time. Before
taking important pictures, be sure to take a test shot and check that the camera works
properly.
295
EN
Information
7
Cleaning and checking the image pickup device
This camera incorporates a dust reduction function to keep dust from getting on the
image pickup device and to remove any dust or dirt from the image pickup device
surface with ultrasonic vibrations. The dust reduction function operates when the
camera is turned on.
The dust reduction function operates at the same time as the pixel mapping, which
checks the image pickup device and image processing circuitry. Since dust reduction
is activated every time the camera’s power is turned on, the camera should be held
upright for the dust reduction function to be effective.
Pixel Mapping - Checking the image processing functions
The pixel mapping feature allows the camera to check and adjust the image pickup
device and image processing functions. For best results, wait at least a minute after
shooting and playback have ended before performing pixel mapping.
1
In G Custom Menu b, select [Pixel Mapping] (P. 198).
2
Press I, then press the Q button.
• The [Busy] bar is displayed when pixel mapping is in progress. When pixel mapping
is fi nished, the menu is restored.
• If you accidentally turn the camera off during pixel mapping, start again from Step 1.
296
EN
Information
7
Shooting tips and information
The camera does not turn on even when a battery is loaded
The battery is not fully charged
• Charge the battery with the charger.
The battery is temporarily unable to function because of the cold
• Battery performance drops at low temperatures. Remove the battery and warm it by
putting it in your pocket for a while.
No picture is taken when the shutter button is pressed
The camera has turned off automatically
• If [On] is selected for [Quick Sleep Mode] (P. 199), the camera will enter sleep mode if
no operations are performed for a set period. Press the shutter button halfway to exit the
sleep mode.
• The camera automatically enters sleep mode to reduce the drain on the battery if no
operations are performed for a set period of time. g G Custom Menu c > [Sleep]
(P. 199)
If no operations are performed for a set time after the camera has entered sleep mode,
the camera will turn off automatically. g G Custom Menu c > [Auto Power Off]
(P. 199)
The fl ash is charging
• On the monitor, the # mark blinks when charging is in progress. Wait for the blinking to
stop, then press the shutter button.
Unable to focus
• The camera cannot focus on subjects that are too close to the camera or that are not
suited to autofocus (the AF confi rmation mark will blink in the monitor). Increase the
distance to the subject or focus on a high contrast object at the same distance from the
camera as your main subject, compose the shot, and shoot.
Subjects that are diffi cult to focus on
It may be diffi cult to focus with auto focus in the following situations.
AF confi rmation
mark is blinking.
These subjects
are not focused.
Subject with low
contrast Excessively bright
light in center of frame
AF confi rmation
mark lights up but
the subject is not
focused.
Subjects at different
distances Fast-moving subject Subject not inside
AF area
297
EN
Information
7
Noise reduction is activated
• When shooting night scenes, shutter speeds are slower and noise tends to appear in
images. The camera activates the noise-reduction process after shooting at slow shutter
speeds. During which, shooting is not allowed. You can set [Noise Reduct.] to [Off].
g G Custom Menu T > [Noise Reduct.] (P. 192)
The number of AF targets is reduced
The size and number of the AF target changes depending on the [Digital Tele-converter]
(P. 143), [Aspect] (P. 98), and group target (P. 69) settings.
The date and time has not been set
The camera is used with the settings at the time of purchase
• The date and time of the camera is not set when purchased. Set the date and time before
using the camera. g “Initial setup” (P. 33)
The battery has been removed from the camera
• The date and time settings will be returned to the factory default settings if the camera is
left without the battery for approximately 1 day (in-house measurements). The settings
will be canceled more quickly if the battery was only loaded in the camera for a short time
before being removed. Before taking important pictures, check that the date and time
settings are correct.
Set functions are restored to their factory default settings
Settings adjusted in custom modes (modes C1–C4) will be reset to saved values when
another shooting mode is selected or the camera is turned off. If [Hold] is selected for [Reset/
Custom Modes] > [Custom Mode Save Settings] in W Shooting Menu 1 when a custom
mode is selected, changes to settings will automatically be saved to the selected mode.
g “Updating Custom Modes Automatically” (P. 57)
Image taken appears whitish
This may occur when the picture is taken in backlight or semi-backlight conditions. This is
due to a phenomenon called fl are or ghosting. As far as possible, consider a composition
where strong light source is not taken in the picture. Flare may occur even when a light
source is not present in the picture. Use a lens hood to shade the lens from the light
source. If a lens hood does not have effect, use your hand to shade the lens from the light.
g “Interchangeable lenses” (P. 285)
Unknown bright dot(s) appear on the subject in the picture taken
This may be due to stuck pixel(s) on the image pickup device. Perform [Pixel Mapping].
If the problem persists, repeat pixel mapping a few times. g “Pixel Mapping - Checking the
image processing functions” (P. 295)
Functions that cannot be selected from menus
Some items may not be selectable from the menus when using the arrow pad.
• Items that cannot be set with the current shooting mode.
• Items that cannot be set because of an item that has already been set:
Combinations of [T] (P. 78) and [Noise Reduct.] (P. 192), etc.
298
EN
Information
7
The subject appears distorted
The following functions use an electronic shutter:
movie recording (P. 59), silent mode (P. 81), Pro Capture shooting (P. 81), High
Res Shot (P. 83), focus bracketing (P. 148), focus stacking (P. 149), the live ND fi lter
(P. 159)
This may cause distortion if the subject is moving rapidly or the camera is moved abruptly.
Avoid moving the camera abruptly during shooting or use standard sequential shooting.
Lines appear in photographs
The following functions use an electronic shutter, which may result in lines due to fl icker and
other phenomena associated with fl uorescent and LED lighting, an effect that can sometimes
be reduced by choosing slower shutter speeds:
movie recording (P. 59), silent mode (P. 81), Pro Capture shooting (P. 81), High
Res Shot (P. 83), focus bracketing (P. 148), focus stacking (P. 149), the live ND fi lter
(P. 159)
Flicker can be reduced by choosing slower shutter speeds. You can also reduce fl icker using
fl icker scan. g G Custom Menu U > [K Flicker Scan] (P. 234), n Video Menu >
[n Mode Settings] > [n Flicker Scan] (P. 166)
299
EN
Information
7
Error codes
Monitor indication Possible cause Corrective action
No Card
The card is not inserted, or it
cannot be recognized. Insert a card. Or reinsert the
card properly.
5Card Error
There is a problem with the
memory card in Slot 1. Remove and reinsert the
memory card. If this does not
solve the problem, format the
card. If formatting fails, the card
cannot be used.
4Card Error
There is a problem with the
memory card in Slot 2.
5Write Protect
The memory card in Slot 1 is
write-protected (“locked”). The memory card write-protect
switch is in the “LOCK” position.
Return the switch to the
unlocked position (P. 284).
4Write Protect
The memory card in Slot 2 is
write-protected (“locked”).
5Card Full
• Shooting disabled; the
memory card in Slot 1 does
not have space for additional
pictures.
• Shooting disabled; the
memory card in Slot 1 is full.
Insert another memory or
delete pictures. Before deleting
pictures, be sure any pictures
you wish to keep have been
copied to a computer.
If [Dual Independent] or [Dual
Same] is selected for [Card Slot
Settings] (P. 237) in G Custom
Menu Y, choose a different
setting.
4Card Full
• Shooting disabled; the
memory card in Slot 2 does
not have space for additional
pictures.
• Shooting disabled; the
memory card in Slot 2 is full.
5No Picture
Playback unavailable; the
memory card in Slot 1 contains
no pictures. The selected memory card
contains no pictures. Take
pictures before choosing
playback mode.
4No Picture
Playback unavailable; the
memory card in Slot 2 contains
no pictures.
300
EN
Information
7
Monitor indication Possible cause Corrective action
5Picture Error
The selected fi le is damaged
and cannot be played back.
Alternatively, the picture is in a
format that is not supported by
the camera.
View the picture using computer
imaging software or the like. If
the picture cannot be displayed
on a computer, the fi le may be
corrupt.
4Picture Error
5The Image Cannot Be
Edited Camera retouch features
cannot be applied to pictures
recorded with other devices.
Retouch the picture on a
computer or other device.
4The Image Cannot Be
Edited
Y/M/D The clock is not set. Set the clock (P. 33).
m
The internal temperature of
the camera has risen due to
sequential shooting.
Turn off the camera and wait for
the internal temperature to cool.
Internal camera
temperature is too high.
Please wait for cooling
before camera use.
Wait a moment for the camera
to turn off automatically.
Allow the internal temperature
of the camera to cool before
resuming operations.
Battery Empty The battery is drained. Charge the battery.
No Connection
The camera is not correctly
connected to a computer,
HDMI display, or other device. Reconnect the camera.
The lens is locked.
Please extend the lens. The lens of the retractable lens
stays retracted. Extend the lens.
Please check the status
of a lens.
An abnormality has occurred
between the camera and the
lens.
Turn off the camera, check the
connection with the lens, and
turn the power on again.
301
EN
Information
7
Default Settings
*1: Can be added to [Assign to Custom Mode].
*2: Default can be restored by selecting [Full] for [Reset].
*3: Default can be restored by selecting [Basic] for [Reset].
Live Controls/LV Super Control Panel
Shooting mode Item Default *1 *2 *3 g
P/A/S/M/BISO Auto 75, 91
Flash Mode #
86, 105
x±0  105
Manual Value #FULL (fl ash set to
[#MANUAL])
 105
K Image Stabilizer S-IS AUTO  97
n Image Stabilizer M-IS1 97
WB Auto ([On] selected for
[W Keep Warm Color])
 94
WB compensation A ±0 ―96
WB compensation G ±0 ―
Kelvin 5400K ([CWB] selected for
[WB])
―94
AF Area Center; Single  69
AF Mode S-AF 64, 91
IFace Priority Face Priority Off ―92
j/Yo 98
Metering p 77
K Save Settings Standard ―99
KK5YF (High Res Shot:
IF+RAW)
 100
4YF (High Res Shot:
IF+RAW)

nK 101
Picture Mode Natural  106
Sharpness ±0 ―110
Contrast ±0 ―110
Saturation ±0 ―110
Gradation Gradation Normal ―111
Effect ― ([i-Enhance] selected for
[Picture Mode]: 3Standard)
―113
Color Filter ― ([Monochrome] selected
for [Picture Mode]: N:None)
 112
Monochrome Color ― ([Monochrome] selected
for [Picture Mode]: N:Normal)
 113
Aspect 4:3  98
Color Space sRGB  114
302
EN
Information
7
Shooting mode Item Default *1 *2 *3 g
P/A/S/M/BHighlight&Shadow
Control f (±0)  115
Movie ROn  169
n (movie) ISO [P], [A], or [S] selected for
[n Mode] (movie exposure
mode): Auto (fi xed)
[M] selected for [n Mode]
(movie exposure mode): 200
―75, 91
Flash Mode Flash Off (fi xed) ――― ―
x±0 (fi xed) ――― ―
K Image Stabilizer S-IS AUTO  97
n Image Stabilizer M-IS1 97
WB Auto ([On] selected for
[W Keep Warm Color])
― 94
WB compensation A ±0 ――96
WB compensation G ±0 ――
Kelvin 5400K ([CWB] selected for
[WB])
――94
AF Area Center; 9-target group  69
AF Mode C-AF 64, 91
IFace Priority Face Priority Off ―92
j/Yo (fi xed) ――― ―
Metering p (fi xed) ――― ―
K Save Settings Standard ―99
KK5YF 100
4YF
nK 101
Picture Mode Natural  106
Sharpness ±0 ―110
Contrast ±0 ―110
Saturation ±0 ―110
Gradation Gradation Normal ―111
Aspect 16:9 (fi xed)
C4K selected for [nK]:
17:9
――― ―
Color Space sRGB (fi xed) ――― ―
Highlight&Shadow
Control f (±0)  115
n Mode P――165
Movie ROn  169
303
EN
Information
7
Shooting mode Item Default *1 *2 *3 g
RC mode QA group A TTL  288
QB group B Off 
QC group C Off 
Q camera fl ash Off 
Flash compensation ±0 (TTL, Auto) 
Flash level 1/1 (Manual) 
#/FP # (Normal) 
a optical signal
strength Low 
Channel 1 
K Shooting Menu
Tab Function Default *1 *2 *3 g
WReset / Custom
Modes Reset Basic ――57, 141
Assign to Custom
Mode Shooting mode: P
Image quality:
YF+RAW
Custom Mode Save
Settings Reset
Recall from Custom
Mode
―
Picture Mode C Natural  106,
142
KKYF (High Res Shot:
IF+RAW)

100, 142
Image Aspect 4:3  98
Digital Tele-converter Off  143
j/Yo 78
Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse Off ― 144
Number of Frames 99
Start Waiting Time 00:00:01
Interval Length 00:00:01
Time Lapse Movie Off
Movie
Settings Movie
Resolution FullHD
Frame
Rate 10fps
304
EN
Information
7
Tab Function Default *1 *2 *3 g
XBracketing Off  146,
147,
149
AE BKT 3f 1.0EV
WB BKT A– BOff
G– M
FL BKT Off
ISO BKT Off
ART BKT Off
Focus BKT Off
Focus Stacking Off
Set number of shots [Off] selected for
[Focus Stacking]: 99
[On] selected for
[Focus Stacking]: 8
Set focus differential 5
#Charge Time 0 sec ―
HDR Off  152
Multiple
Exposure Number of Frames Off ― 154
Auto Gain Off
Overlay Off
Keystone Comp. Off  156
Anti-Shock r/
Silent s
Anti-Shock rr 0 sec ―157
Silent ss 0 sec
Noise Reduction sOff
Silent s Mode
Settings
――
8Not Allow
AF Illuminator Not Allow
Flash Mode Not Allow
High Res Shot
High Res Shot h0 sec ―158
#Charge Time 0 sec
Shooting Method
Handheld
Live ND Shooting Off  159
ND Number ND8(3EV) ―
LV Simulation On ―
305
EN
Information
7
n Video Menu
Tab Function Default *1 *2 *3 g
nn Mode
Settings n Mode P――161,
165
n Flicker Scan Off ― 161,
166
n Specifi cation
Settings nKMOVn4K 30p  161,
167
b ISO-Auto Set 75, 161
Upper Limit / Default Upper Limit: 6400
Default: 200

b ISO-Auto Off ――
n Noise Filter Standard  161
n WB Auto ―
94, 161
n All xA±0, G±0 ――96, 161
nW Keep Warm
Color On ―
96, 161
n Picture Mode Off ―106,
161
n AF/IS
Settings n AF Mode C-AF 64, 91,
162
n C-AF Speed ±0  162
n C-AF Sensitivity ±0  162
n Image Stabilizer M-IS1
97, 162
n IS Level ±0  162
306
EN
Information
7
Tab Function Default *1 *2 *3 g
nn Button/Dial/Lever 163
n Button
Function FExposure F――116,
163
RRREC
uu View Selection
tAEL/AFL
KISO
dN
DN (Electronic
Zoom)
EN (WB)
YPeaking
ZMagnify
mISO
nAEL/AFL
vDirect Function
wElectronic Zoom
xWB
lAF Stop
n Dial
Function P Position 1 k: F
j: F
――163
Position 2 k: RVOL
j: RVOL
A Position 1 k: F
j: FNo.
――
Position 2 k: RVOL
j: RVOL
S Position 1 k: F
j: Shutter
――
Position 2 k: RVOL
j: RVOL
MPosition 1 k: FNo.
j: Shutter
――
Position 2 k: RVOL
j: ISO
n Fn Lever Function mode2 ――163
mode2 AF Mode/
AF Target Mode/
AF Target Point
n Shutter Function w――163
n Elec. Zoom Speed Normal ――163
307
EN
Information
7
Tab Function Default *1 *2 *3 g
nn Display Settings 164
n Control Settings Live Control,
Live SCP
――
n Info Settings Custom1 ――
Time Code
Settings Time Code Mode Drop Frame ――
Count Up Rec Run ――
Starting Time 0:00:00 ――
8 Display Pattern min ――
a View Assist Off ――
Movie ROn  169
Recording
Volume Built-in R±0 ――
MIC R±0 ――
R Volume Limiter On ――
Wind Noise Reduction Off ――
Recording Rate 48kHz/16bit ―
R Plug-in Power Off ――
Headphone Volume 8 ―
n HDMI
Output Output Mode Monitor Mode ――164
REC Bit Off ―
Time Code On ―
q Playback Menu
Tab Function Default *1 *2 *3 g
qROn  170
Edit Sel. Image RAW Data Edit ――――170
JPEG Edit ―171
Movie Edit ―173
R―136
Image Overlay ―172
Print Order ――――134
Reset Protect ――――175
Reset share Order ――――175
Copy All ――――175
TWi-Fi Connect ――――247,
262,
264,
266
308
EN
Information
7
e Setup Menu
Tab Function Default *1 *2 *3 g
eCard Setup ――――177
X Settings X――――33
Time Zone
WEnglish ―――35, 176
sj±0, k±0, Natural ―176
Rec View Off ―176
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Settings Availability On ――178,
246,
255,
271
Connection Password ――――178,
272
Power-off Standby Off ――178,
249
RAW+JPEG hJPEG ――133,
178
Reset Settings ――――178,
273
Wi-Fi MAC Address ――――178
Firmware ――――176
G Custom Menu
Tab Function Default *1 *2 *3 g
GAF/MF
JK AF mode S-AF 64, 91,
181
K AF+MF Off  200
K AEL/AFL S-AF mode3  181,
201
C-AF mode4
MF mode3
FAF mode3
Half Way AF Operative 
Face Priority AF w: On
t: On

AF Scanner mode2  181
K C-AF Sensitivity ±0  203
K C-AF Center Start q (All Targets)  204
K C-AF Center Priority 5, 9, or 25 targets  205
309
EN
Information
7
Tab Function Default *1 *2 *3 g
GKKNMode Settings All; Small; 5-, 9-, or
25-target group
 182
AF Area Pointer On1  182
N Set Home AF Target Mode
(q), AF Target
Point
― 206
N Select Screen Settings Set 1  207
kNMode
jNMode
A6Pos
B6Pos
N Loop
Settings N Loop Selection Off  208
Via qNo 
t Target Mode Settings 1×1; vertical and
horizontal step
size: 1
―209
K Orientation Linked NOff ―210
LAF Targeting Pad Off  183
AF Limiter Off  183
Distance settings Setting 1 
Release Priority On 
AF Illuminator On  183
IFace Priority Off ―92, 183
AF Focus Adj. * Off  183
IStarry Sky AF Setting Speed  184
Preset MF distance 999.9 m  184
MF Assist Magnify Off ―184,
215
Peaking Off ―
MF Clutch Operative  184
Focus Ring b 184
Bulb/Time Focusing On  184,
216
Reset Lens On  184
* Using [Reset] to perform a full or standard reset does not affect saved values.
310
EN
Information
7
Tab Function Default *1 *2 *3 g
GButton/Dial/Lever
JK Button
Function FExposure F―116,
185
RRREC
uu View Selection
tAEL/AFL
KISO
dN
DN (Flash Mode)
EN (j/Y)
Yk
ZPreview
mISO
nAEL/AFL
vN
wN (Flash Mode)
xN (j/Y)
lAF Stop
S Center Button Off ―185,
217
T Direction Key N―185,
217
K Dial
Function P Position 1 k: F
j: Ps
―185
Position 2 k: ISO
j: WB
A Position 1 k: F
j: FNo.
Position 2 k: ISO
j: WB
S Position 1 k: F
j: Shutter
Position 2 k: ISO
j: WB
M/B Position 1 k: FNo.
j: Shutter
Position 2 k: F
j: ISO
Menu k: B
j: A/Value
qk: Prev/Next
j: Ga
311
EN
Information
7
Tab Function Default *1 *2 *3 g
GJDial
Direction Exposure Dial1 ―185
Ps Dial1
K Fn Lever Function mode2 ――185,
219
mode2 AF Mode/
AF Target Mode/
AF Target Point
Fn Lever/Power Lever Fn ――185
KK Elec. Zoom Speed Normal ―185
qR Function H――185
9 Lock Off ―185
v Lock Off ―185
Release/j/Image Stabilizer
NS-AF Release Priority Off  186
C-AF Release Priority On  186
jL Settings 186,
220
j/♦jMax fps 10 fps 
Frame Count Limiter Off 
♥jMax fps 18 fps 
Frame Count Limiter Off 
0Max fps 18 fps 
Pre-shutter Frames 8 shots 
Frame Count Limiter 25 shots 
jH Settings 186,
220
jMax fps 15 fps 
Frame Count Limiter Off 
♥jMax fps 60 fps 
Frame Count Limiter Off 
0Max fps 60 fps 
Pre-shutter Frames 14 shots 
Frame Count Limiter 25 shots 
Flicker
Reduction Anti-Flicker LV Auto ―186,
222
Anti-Flicker Shooting Off ―
OK Image Stabilizer S-IS AUTO 
97, 186
j Image Stabilizer Fps Priority ―186
Half Way Rls With IS On ――186
Lens I.S. Priority Off  186
312
EN
Information
7
Tab Function Default *1 *2 *3 g
GDisp/8/PC
PK Control Settings Live SCP ―187,
224
G/Info
Settings q Info Image Only, Overall  187,
226
qa Info All On ――
LV-Info Image Only,
Custom1 (u),
Custom2 (Level
Gauge)
―
Informations during
half way On ―
LV OFF-Info Shooting Information ―
G Settings 25, Calendar ―
Picture Mode Settings All On ―187
j/Y Settings ♥o, T, ♥T, p,
S, ♥S, q, X,
c, h
―187
Multi Function Settings All on except WB
and ISO
―187
QLive View
Boost Manual Shooting Off  188
Bulb/Time On2, Frame Rate
Priority
Live Composite Off
Others Off
Art LV Mode mode1 ―188
Frame Rate Normal  188
LV Close Up
Settings LV Close Up Mode mode2 ―188
Live View Boost Off ―
qa Default Setting Recently ――188
z Settings z Lock Off ―189
Live View Boost Off ―
RGrid Settings Display Color Preset 1 ―189
Displayed Grid Off ―
Apply Settings to EVF On ―
Peaking
Settings Peaking Color Red ―189
Highlight Intensity Normal
Image Brightness Adj. Off
Histogram
Settings Highlight 255 ―189
Shadow 0
Mode Guide Off ―189
Selfi e Assist On ――189,
229
313
EN
Information
7
Tab Function Default *1 *2 *3 g
GS8On  190
HDMI Output Size 1080p ――190,
230
HDMI Control Off ――
Output Frame Rate 60p Priority ―――
USB Mode Auto ― 190
Exp/ISO/BULB/p
TEV Step 1/3 EV  191
ISO Step 1/3 EV  191
K ISO-Auto
Set Upper Limit / Default Upper Limit: 6400
Default: 200
 191
Lowest S/S Setting Auto 
K ISO-Auto All ―191
K Noise Filter Standard  191
K Low ISO Processing Drive Priority  191
Noise Reduct. Auto  192
UBulb/Time Timer 8 min  192
Live Composite Timer 3h  192
Bulb/Time Monitor −7―192
Live Bulb Off ―192,
232
Live Time 0.5 sec ―192,
232
Composite Settings 1 sec ―54, 192,
233
K Flicker Scan Off  192,
234
VMetering p
77, 193
AEL Metering Auto  193
N Spot Metering Spot, Spot Highlight,
Spot Shadow
 193
Exposure
Shift p±0 ―193
B±0
C±0
#Custom
W#X-Sync. 1/250  193,
236
#Slow Limit 1/60  193,
236
x+FOff 193
#+WB Off ―193
#RC Mode Off  193,
288
314
EN
Information
7
Tab Function Default *1 *2 *3 g
GK/WB/Color
XK Set K1: YSF
K2: YF
K3: YN
K4: XN
 194,
236
Pixel Count Xiddle 3200×2400  194,
236
Wmall 1280×960
Shading Comp. Off  194
K WB Auto 
94, 194
K All xA±0, G±0 ―194
KW Keep Warm Color On  194
Color Space sRGB  114,
194
Record/Erase
YCard Slot
Settings K Save Settings Standard ―99, 195,
237
K Save Slot 5―
n Save Slot 5―
q Slot 5―
Assign Save Folder Do not assign ―
File Name Reset ―195
Edit Filename Off ―195
dpi Settings 350dpi ―195
Copyright
Settings * Copyright Info. Off ―195
Artist Name ――――
Copyright Name ――――
Lens Info Settings * Off ――195,
239
ZQuick Erase Off  196
RAW+JPEG Erase RAW+JPEG  196
Priority Set No  196
EVF
aEVF Auto Switch On1 ――196
EVF Adjust EVF Auto Luminance On ―196
EVF Adjust j±0, k±0
EVF Style Style 3 ――196,
240
V Info Settings Basic Information,
Custom1, Custom2
―196
EVF Grid
Settings Display Color Preset 1 ―197
Displayed Grid Off ―
V Half Way Level On ―197
S-OVF Off  197
* Using [Reset] to perform a full or standard reset does not affect saved values.
315
EN
Information
7
Tab Function Default *1 *2 *3 g
GK Utility
bPixel Mapping ――――198,
295
Press-and-
hold Time End LV a0.7 sec ―198
Reset LV a Frame 0.7 sec ―
End 60.7 sec ―
Reset 6 Frame 0.7 sec ―
Reset F0.7 sec ―
Reset x0.7 sec ―
Reset 70.7 sec ―
Reset c0.7 sec ―
Reset N0.7 sec ―
Call EVF Auto Switch 0.7 sec ―
End qa0.7 sec ―
End D0.7 sec ―
Reset D0.7 sec ―
Switch G Lock 0.7 sec ―
Call BKT Settings 0.7 sec ―
End Flicker Scan 0.7 sec ―
Level Adjust ――
―198
Touchscreen Settings On ――198
Menu Recall Recall ―198
Fisheye Compensation Off ―198,
242
cBattery
Settings Battery Priority PBH Battery ―198
Battery Status ――――
Backlit LCD Hold  198
Sleep 1 min  199
Auto Power Off 4h  199
Quick Sleep Mode Off ―199
Backlit LCD 8 sec ―
Sleep 10 sec
Certifi cation ――――199
316
EN
Information
7
Memory Card Capacity
Memory Card Capacity: Photos
Figures are for a 16 GB SD card used to record photos with an aspect ratio of 4:3.
Record mode Image size
(Pixel Count) Compression
ratio File
format File size (MB)
(approx.)
Number of
storable still
pictures
AF+RAW
(Tripod)
10368×7776 Loss-less
compression ORF
(Tripod)
181.4 (Tripod)
80
10368×7776 1/4 JPEG
5240×3912 Loss-less
compression ORI
IF+RAW
(Tripod)
10368×7776 Loss-less
compression ORF (Tripod)
168.2
(Handheld)
121.3
(Tripod)
87
(Handheld)
120
(Handheld)
8160×6120
8160×6120 1/4 JPEG
5240×3912 Loss-less
compression ORI
JF+RAW
(Tripod)
10368×7776 Loss-less
compression ORF (Tripod)
157.5
(Handheld)
110.6
(Tripod)
94
(Handheld)
133
(Handheld)
8160×6120
5760×4320 1/4 JPEG
5240×3912 Loss-less
compression ORI
AF10368×7776 1/4 JPEG 34.9 394
IF8160×6120 1/4 JPEG 21.7 634
JF5760×4320 1/4 JPEG 10.9 1261
RAW
5184×3888
Loss-less
compression ORF 21.7 690
YSF 1/2.7
JPEG
13.1 1054
YF1/4 8.9 1550
YN1/8 4.6 3013
XSF
3200×2400
1/2.7 5.1 2697
XF1/4 3.6 3906
XN1/8 1.9 7397
XSF
1920×1440
1/2.7 2.0 6975
XF1/4 1.4 9765
XN1/8 0.9 16836
317
EN
Information
7
Record mode Image size
(Pixel Count) Compression
ratio File
format File size (MB)
(approx.)
Number of
storable still
pictures
WSF
1280×960
1/2.7
JPEG
1.0 13562
WF1/4 0.8 18083
WN1/8 0.5 28721
WSF
1024×768
1/2.7 0.8 18779
WF1/4 0.6 24413
WN1/8 0.3 61032
• The number of storable still pictures may change according to the subject, whether or not
print reservations have been made, and other factors. In certain instances, the number
of storable still pictures displayed on the monitor will not change even when you take
pictures or erase stored images.
• The actual fi le size varies according to the subject.
• The maximum number of storable still pictures displayed on the monitor is 9999.
Memory Card Capacity: Movies
Figures are for a 32 GB SDHC memory card.
Frame size Compression Frame rate Capacity (approx.)
C4K — 24p 17 minutes
4K — 30p, 25p, 24p 39 minutes
FHD
A-I 30p, 25p, 24p 20 minutes
SF 60p, 50p, 30p, 25p,
24p
1 hour 14 minutes
F 2 hours 2 minutes
N 3 hours 11 minutes
HD
A-I
60p, 50p, 30p, 25p,
24p
39 minutes
SF 2 hours 19 minutes
F 3 hours 55 minutes
N 5 hours 5 minutes
• Figures are for footage recorded at the maximum frame rate. The actual bit rate varies
with the frame rate and scene recorded.
• Individual movie fi les can be up to 4 GB in size. A new fi le is created when the size of the
current fi le reaches 4 GB.
• Individual movies can be no more than 29 minutes in length.
318
EN
Information
7
Specifi cations
Camera
Product type
Product type Digital camera with interchangeable Micro Four Thirds Standard lens
system
Lens M.ZUIKO DIGITAL, Micro Four Thirds System Lens
Lens mount Micro Four Thirds mount
Equivalent focal length on
a 35 mm fi lm camera Approx. twice the focal length of the lens
Image pickup device
Product type 4/3” Live MOS sensor
Total no. of pixels Approx. 21.77 million pixels
No. of effective pixels Approx. 20.37 million pixels
Screen size 17.4 mm (H) × 13.0 mm (V)
Aspect ratio 1.33 (4:3)
Viewfi nder
Type Electronic viewfi nder with eye sensor
No. of pixels Approx. 2.36 million dots
Magnifi cation 100%
Eye point Approx. 21 mm (−1 m−1)
Live view
Sensor Uses Live MOS sensor
Magnifi cation 100%
Monitor
Product type 3.0" TFT color LCD, Vari-angle, touch screen
Total no. of pixels Approx. 1.04 million dots (aspect ratio 3:2)
Shutter
Product type Computerized focal-plane shutter
Shutter speed 1/8000 - 60 sec., bulb photography, time photography
Flash sync speed Up to 1/250 sec.
Auto focus
Product type Hi-Speed Imager AF
Focusing points 121 points
Selection of focusing point Auto, Optional
Exposure control
Metering system TTL metering system (imager metering)
Digital ESP metering/Center weighted averaging metering/Spot metering
Metered range −2 to 20 EV (f/2.8, ISO 100 equivalent)
Shooting modes P: Program AE (program shift available); A: Aperture priority AE;
S: Shutter-priority AE; M: Manual; B: Bulb (bulb, time, and composite);
C1/C2/C3/C4: Custom Modes; n: Movie
ISO sensitivity L64; L100; 200 - 25600 in steps of 1/3 or 1 EV
Exposure compensation ±5.0 EV (1/3, 1/2, 1 EV step)
319
EN
Information
7
White balance
Mode setting Auto/Preset WB (7 settings)/Customized WB/One-touch WB (camera can
store up to 4 settings)
Recording
Memory SD, SDHC and SDXC
UHS-II compatible (Slot 1 only)
Recording system Digital recording, JPEG (DCF2.0), RAW Data
Applicable standards Exif 2.3, Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)
Sound with still pictures Wave format
Movie MPEG-4 AVC/H.264
Audio Stereo linear PCM, 16 bit; sampling frequency 48 kHz (wave format)
Stereo linear PCM, 24 bit; sampling frequency 96 kHz (wave format)
Playback
Display format Single-frame playback/Close-up playback/Index display/Calendar display
Drive
Drive mode Single frame; sequential; anti-shock; silent; Pro Capture; self-timer;
High Res Shot
Sequential shooting Up to 15 fps (T)
Up to 60 fps (♥T, p)
Self-timer Operation time: 12 sec./2 sec./Customized
Energy saving function Switch to sleep mode: 1 minute, Power OFF: 4 hours
(This function can be customized.)
Flash
Flash control mode TTL-AUTO (TTL pre-fl ash mode)/MANUAL
X-Sync. 1/250 s or slower
Wireless LAN
Compatible standard IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n/ac *
Bluetooth®
Compatible standard Bluetooth Version 4.2 BLE
External connector
USB (Type C); HDMI micro connector (type D); external fl ash; remote cable (ø2.5 mm mini-jack);
microphone jack (ø3.5 mm stereo mini-jack); headphone jack (ø3.5 mm stereo mini-jack)
Power supply
Battery Lithium-ion Battery ×1
Dimensions/weight
Dimensions Approx. 134.1 mm (W) × 90.9 mm (H) × 68.9 mm (D) (5.3" × 3.6" × 2.7")
(excluding protrusions)
Weight Approx. 580 g (1.3 Ib.) (including battery and memory card)
Operating environment
Temperature
−10 °C - 40 °C (14 °F - 104 °F) (operation)/ −20 °C - 60 °C (−4 °F - 140 °F)
(storage)
Humidity 30% - 90% (operation)/10% - 90% (storage)
Water resistance Type: IEC Standard publication 60529 IPX1 (applies if camera is used
with Olympus water-resistant lens)
* Note that cameras have been developed in line with the different standards of the countries.
320
EN
Information
7
Lithium-ion battery
MODEL NO. BLH-1
Type Rechargeable Lithium-ion battery
Nominal voltage DC 7.4 V
Nominal capacity 1720 mAh
No. of charge and
discharge times Approx. 500 times (varies with usage conditions)
Ambient temperature 0 °C - 40 °C (32 °F - 104 °F) (charging)
Dimensions Approx. 45 mm (W) × 20 mm (H) × 53 mm (D) (1.8" × 0.8" × 2.1")
Weight Approx. 74 g (2.6 oz.)
Lithium-ion charger
MODEL NO. BCH-1
Rated input AC 100 V - 240 V (50/60 Hz)
Rated output DC 8.4 V, 1100 mA
Charging time Approx. 2 hours (room temperature)
Ambient temperature 0 °C - 40 °C (32 °F - 104 °F) (operation)/
–20 °C - 60 °C (–4 °F - 140 °F) (storage)
Dimensions Approx. 71 mm (W) × 29 mm (H) × 96 mm (D) (2.8" × 1.1" × 3.8")
Weight (without AC cable) Approx. 85 g (3.0 oz.)
• The supplied power cable is for use exclusively with this camera. Do not use with other
equipment. Do not use the camera with cables for other equipment.
• The appearance and specifi cations of this product are subject to change without notice
or obligation on the part of the manufacturer.
• Visit the OLYMPUS website for the latest specifi cations.
The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Defi nition
Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing Administrator, Inc. in the United
States and other countries.
321
EN
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
8
8
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK, DO NOT
REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED OLYMPUS SERVICE PERSONNEL.
An exclamation mark enclosed in a triangle alerts you to important operating
and maintenance instructions in the documentation provided with the
product.
WARNING If the product is used without observing the information given under this
symbol, serious injury or death may result.
CAUTION If the product is used without observing the information given under this
symbol, injury may result.
NOTICE If the product is used without observing the information given under this
symbol, damage to the equipment may result.
WARNING!
TO AVOID THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRICAL SHOCK, NEVER DISASSEMBLE, EXPOSE
THIS PRODUCT TO WATER OR OPERATE IN A HIGH HUMIDITY ENVIRONMENT.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
General Precautions
Read All Instructions — Before you use the
product, read all operating instructions. Save all
manuals and documentation for future reference.
Power Source — Connect this product only to
the power source described on the product label.
Foreign Objects — To avoid personal injury,
never insert a metal object into the product.
Cleaning — Always unplug this product from
the wall outlet before cleaning. Use only a damp
cloth for cleaning. Never use any type of liquid or
aerosol cleaner, or any type of organic solvent to
clean this product.
Heat — Never use or store this product near
any heat source such as a radiator, heat register,
stove, or any type of equipment or appliance that
generates heat, including stereo amplifi ers.
Attachments — For your safety, and to avoid
damaging the product, use only accessories
recommended by Olympus.
Location — To avoid damage to the product,
mount the product securely on a stable tripod,
stand, or bracket.
WARNING
• Do not use the camera near fl ammable or
explosive gases.
• Rest your eyes periodically when using
the viewfi nder.
Failure to observe this precaution could result
in eyestrain, nausea, or sensations similar to
motion sickness. The length and frequency
of the required rest varies with the individual;
use your own judgement. If you feel tired
or unwell, avoid using the viewfi nder and if
necessary consult a physician.
• Do not use the fl ash and LED (including
AF illuminator) on people (infants, small
children, etc.) at close range.
• You must be at least 1 m (3 ft.) away
from the faces of your subjects. Firing the
fl ash too close to the subject’s eyes could
cause a momentary loss of vision.
• Do not look at the sun or strong lights
with the camera.
322
EN
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
8
• Keep young children, infants away from
the camera.
• Always use and store the camera out of
the reach of young children and infants to
prevent the following dangerous situations
which could cause serious injury:
• Becoming entangled in the camera
strap, causing strangulation.
• Accidentally swallowing the battery,
cards or other small parts.
• Accidentally fi ring the fl ash into their
own eyes or those of another child.
• Accidentally being injured by the
moving parts of the camera.
• Should you notice that the charger is
emitting smoke, heat, or an unusual noise
or smell, immediately cease use and
unplug the charger from the power outlet,
and then contact an authorized distributor
or service center.
• Stop using the camera immediately if
you notice any unusual odors, noise, or
smoke around it.
• Never remove the batteries with bare
hands, which may cause a fi re or burn
your hands.
• Never hold or operate the camera with wet
hands.
This may cause overheating, exploding,
burning, electrical shocks, or malfunctions.
• Do not leave the camera in places where
it may be subject to extremely high
temperatures.
• Doing so may cause parts to deteriorate
and, in some circumstances, cause
the camera to catch fi re. Do not use
the charger if it is covered (such as a
blanket). This could cause overheating,
resulting in fi re.
• Handle the camera with care to avoid
getting a low temperature burn.
• When the camera contains metal
parts, overheating can result in a low-
temperature burn. Pay attention to the
following:
• When used for a long period, the
camera will get hot. If you hold on
to the camera in this state, a low-
temperature burn may be caused.
• In places subject to extremely cold
temperatures, the temperature of the
camera’s body may be lower than the
environmental temperature. If possible,
wear gloves when handling the camera
in cold temperatures.
• To protect the high-precision technology
contained in this product, never leave the
camera in the places listed below, no matter if
in use or storage:
• Places where temperatures and/or
humidity are high or go through extreme
changes. Direct sunlight, beaches, locked
cars, or near other heat sources (stove,
radiator, etc.) or humidifi ers.
• In sandy or dusty environments.
• Near fl ammable items or explosives.
• In wet places, such as bathrooms or in
the rain.
• In places prone to strong vibrations.
• The camera uses a lithium-ion battery
specifi ed by Olympus. Charge the battery
with the specifi ed charger. Do not use any
other chargers.
• Never incinerate or heat batteries in
microwaves, on hot plates, or in pressure
vessels, etc.
• Never leave the camera on or near
electromagnetic devices.
This may cause overheating, burning, or
exploding.
• Do not connect terminals with any metallic
objects.
• Take precautions when carrying or storing
batteries to prevent them from coming into
contact with any metal objects such as
jewelry, pins, fasteners, keys, etc.
The short circuit may cause overheating,
exploding, or burning, which burn or damage
you.
• To prevent causing battery leaks or damaging
their terminals, carefully follow all instructions
regarding the use of batteries. Never attempt
to disassemble a battery or modify it in any
way, solder, etc.
• If battery fl uid gets into your eyes, fl ush
your eyes immediately with clear, cold
running water and seek medical attention
immediately.
• If you cannot remove the battery from the
camera, contact an authorized distributor
or service center. Do not try to remove the
battery by force.
Damage to the battery exterior (scratches,
etc.) may produce heat or an explosion.
• Always store batteries out of the reach of
small children and pets. If they accidentally
swallow a battery, seek medical attention
immediately.
• To prevent batteries from leaking,
overheating, or causing a fi re or explosion,
use only batteries recommended for use with
this product.
• If rechargeable batteries have not been
recharged within the specifi ed time, stop
charging them and do not use them.
• Do not use batteries with scratches or
damage to the casing, and do not scratch
the battery.
323
EN
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
8
• Never subject batteries to strong shocks or
continuous vibration by dropping or hitting.
This may cause exploding, overheating, or
burning.
• If a battery leaks, has unusual odor, becomes
discolored or deformed, or becomes
abnormal in any other way during operation,
stop using the camera, and keep away from
fi re immediately.
• If a battery leaks fl uid onto your clothing
or skin, remove the clothing and fl ush the
affected area with clean, running cold water
immediately. If the fl uid burns your skin, seek
medical attention immediately.
• Never use lithium-ion batteries in a low-
temperature environment. Doing so may
cause generation of heat, ignition, or
explosion.
• The Olympus lithium-ion battery is designed
to be used only for the Olympus digital
camera. Do not use the battery to other
devices.
• Do not allow children or animals/pets to
handle or transport batteries (prevent
dangerous behaviour such as licking,
putting in mouth or chewing).
Use Only Dedicated Rechargeable
Battery and Battery Charger
We strongly recommend that you use only the
genuine Olympus dedicated rechargeable battery
and battery charger with this camera.
Using a non-genuine rechargeable battery and/
or battery charger may result in fi re or personal
injury due to leakage, heating, ignition or damage
to the battery. Olympus does not assume any
liability for accidents or damage that may result
from the use of a battery and/or battery charger
that are not genuine Olympus accessories.
CAUTION
• Do not cover the fl ash with a hand while
fi ring.
• Never store batteries where they will be
exposed to direct sunlight, or subjected to
high temperatures in a hot vehicle, near a
heat source, etc.
• Keep batteries dry at all times.
• The battery may become hot during
prolonged use. To avoid minor burns, do not
remove it immediately after using the camera.
• This camera uses one Olympus lithium-ion
battery. Use the specifi ed genuine battery.
There is a risk of explosion if the battery is
replaced with the incorrect battery type.
• Please recycle batteries to help save our
planet’s resources. When you throw away
dead batteries, be sure to cover their
terminals and always observe local laws and
regulations.
NOTICE
• Do not use or store the camera in dusty or
humid places.
• Use SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards only.
Never use other types of cards.
If you accidently insert another type of card
into the camera, contact an authorized
distributor or service center. Do not try to
remove the card by force.
• Regularly back up important data to a
computer or other storage device to prevent
accidental loss.
• OLYMPUS accepts no liability for any loss of
data associated with this device.
• Be careful with the strap when you carry the
camera. It could easily catch on stray objects
and cause serious damage.
• Before transporting the camera, remove
a tripod and all other non-OLYMPUS
accessories.
• Never drop the camera or subject it to severe
shocks or vibrations.
• When attaching the camera to or removing
it from a tripod, rotate the tripod screw, not
the camera.
• Do not touch electric contacts on cameras.
• Do not leave the camera pointed directly
at the sun. This may cause lens or shutter
curtain damage, color failure, ghosting on
the image pickup device, or may possibly
cause fi res.
• Do not leave the viewfi nder exposed to a
strong light source or direct sunlight. The
heat may damage the viewfi nder.
• Do not push or pull severely on the lens.
• Be sure to remove any water droplets or
other moisture from the product before
replacing the battery or opening or closing
covers.
• Before storing the camera for a long period,
remove the batteries. Select a cool, dry
location for storage to prevent condensation
or mold from forming inside the camera. After
storage, test the camera by turning it on and
pressing the shutter button to make sure that
it is operating normally.
• The camera may malfunction if it is used in
a location where it is subject to a magnetic/
electromagnetic fi eld, radio waves, or high
voltage, such as near a TV set, microwave,
video game, loud speakers, large monitor
unit, TV/radio tower, or transmission towers.
In such cases, turn the camera off and on
again before further operation.
• Always observe the operating environment
restrictions described in the camera’s
manual.
324
EN
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
8
• Insert the battery carefully as described in the
operating instructions.
• Before loading, always inspect the battery
carefully for leaks, discoloration, warping, or
any other abnormality.
• Always unload the battery from the camera
before storing the camera for a long period.
• When storing the battery for a long period,
select a cool location for storage.
• Power consumption by the camera varies
depending on which functions are used.
• During the conditions described below, power
is consumed continuously and the battery
becomes exhausted quickly.
• The zoom is used repeatedly.
• The shutter button is pressed halfway
repeatedly in shooting mode, activating
the auto focus.
• A picture is displayed on the monitor for
an extended period of time.
• Using an exhausted battery may cause the
camera to turn off without displaying the
battery level warning.
• If the battery’s terminals get wet or greasy,
camera contact failure may result. Wipe the
battery well with a dry cloth before use.
• Always charge a battery when using it for
the fi rst time, or if it has not been used for a
long period.
• When operating the camera with battery
power at low temperatures, try to keep
the camera and spare battery as warm as
possible. A battery that has run down at
low temperatures may be restored after it is
warmed at room temperature.
• Before going on a long trip, and especially
before traveling abroad, purchase extra
batteries. A recommended battery may be
diffi cult to obtain while traveling.
Using the wireless LAN/
Bluetooth® functions
• Turn off the camera in hospitals and other
locations where medical equipment is
present.
The radio waves from the camera may
adversely affect medical equipment, causing
a malfunction that results in an accident. Be
sure to disable wireless LAN/Bluetooth®
functions in the vicinity of medical equipment
(P. 255, 271).
• Turn off the camera when onboard
aircraft.
Using wireless devices onboard may hinder
safe operation of the aircraft. Be sure to
disable wireless LAN/Bluetooth® functions
onboard aircraft (P. 255, 271).
• Do not use this product where it may
interfere with nearby radar systems.
Monitor
• Do not push the monitor forcibly; otherwise
the image may become vague, resulting in
a playback mode failure or damage to the
monitor.
• A strip of light may appear on the top/bottom
of the monitor, but this is not a malfunction.
• When a subject is viewed diagonally in the
camera, the edges may appear zigzagged on
the monitor. This is not a malfunction; it will
be less noticeable in playback mode.
• In places subject to low temperatures, the
monitor may take a long time to turn on or its
color may change temporarily.
When using the camera in extremely cold
places, it is a good idea to occasionally place
it in a warm place. The monitor exhibiting
poor performance due to low temperatures
will recover in normal temperatures.
• The monitor of this product is manufactured
with high-quality accuracy, however, there
may be a stuck or dead pixel on the monitor.
These pixels do not have any infl uence
on the image to be saved. Because of the
characteristics, the unevenness of the color
or brightness may also be found depending
on the angle, but this is due to the structure
of the monitor. This is not a malfunction.
Legal and Other Notices
• Olympus makes no representations or
warranties regarding any damages, or
benefi t expected by using this unit lawfully,
or any request from a third person, which
are caused by the inappropriate use of this
product.
• Olympus makes no representations or
warranties regarding any damages or any
benefi t expected by using this unit lawfully
which are caused by erasing picture data.
Disclaimer of Warranty
• Olympus makes no representations or
warranties, either expressed or implied, by
or concerning any content of these written
materials or software, and in no event
shall be liable for any implied warranty of
merchantability or fi tness for any particular
purpose or for any consequential, incidental
or indirect damages (including but not limited
to damages for loss of business profi ts,
business interruption and loss of business
information) arising from the use or inability
to use these written materials or software
or equipment. Some countries do not allow
the exclusion or limitation of liability for
consequential or incidental damages or of
the implied warranty, so the above limitations
may not apply to you.
• Olympus reserves all rights to this manual.
325
EN
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
8
Warning
Unauthorized photographing or use of
copyrighted material may violate applicable
copyright laws. Olympus assumes no
responsibility for unauthorized photographing,
use or other acts that infringe upon the rights of
copyright owners.
Copyright Notice
All rights reserved. No part of these written
materials or this software may be reproduced
or used in any form or by any means, electronic
or mechanical, including photocopying and
recording or the use of any type of information
storage and retrieval system, without the prior
written permission of Olympus. No liability
is assumed with respect to the use of the
information contained in these written materials
or software, or for damages resulting from
the use of the information contained therein.
Olympus reserves the right to alter the features
and contents of this publication or software
without obligation or advance notice.
Trademarks
• Microsoft and Windows are registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
• Mac, OS X, and macOS are trademarks of
Apple Inc.
• SDXC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
• Apical logo is a registered
trademark of Apical Limited.
• Micro Four Thirds, Four Thirds, and the
Micro Four Thirds and Four Thirds logos are
trademarks or registered trademarks of the
OLYMPUS CORPORATION in Japan, the
United States, the countries of the European
Union, and other countries.
• Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of the Wi-Fi
Alliance.
• The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED
logo is a certifi cation mark
of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
• The Bluetooth® word mark and logos
are registered trademarks owned by the
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such
marks by OLYMPUS CORPORATION is
under license.
• The standards for camera fi le systems
referred to in this manual are the “Design
Rule for Camera File System/DCF” standards
stipulated by the Japan Electronics and
Information Technology Industries Association
(JEITA).
• All other company and product names are
registered trademarks and/or trademarks of
their respective owners.
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE
AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE
PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL USE
OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN
COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC
VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT
WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED
IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL
ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A
VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE
AVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR
SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED
FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE HTTP://WWW.
MPEGLA.COM
The software in this camera may include third
party software. Any third party software is subject
to the terms and conditions, imposed by the
owners or licensors of that software, under which
software is provided to you.
Those terms and other third party software
notices, if any, may be found in the software
notice PDF fi le stored at
http://www.olympus.co.jp/en/support/imsg/
digicamera/download/notice/notice.cfm
326
EN
Symbols
0 (Protect) .....................................131
8 (Beep sound) ...............................190
n Mode (movie exposure mode) .....165
n Save Slot ......................................237
P (Trimming) ...................................171
qR Function ..................132, 133, 185
qa Default Setting.........................229
qa Info ..................................187, 227
q Info ......................................187, 226
q Slot ..............................................237
#RC Mode ........................................288
#Slow Limit.......................................236
#X-Sync. ..........................................236
#+WB ...............................................193
G (Index display/Calendar display) .129
G/Info Settings ................................226
j/Y (Drive Mode) ......................78, 98
j/Y Settings ..................................187
jH Settings ............................186, 220
jL Settings .............................186, 220
j Image Stabilizer ..........................186
s (Monitor brightness adjustment) .176
KNMode Settings ............69, 71, 182
K Orientation Linked N ................210
K Save Settings ..............................237
K Save Slot .....................................237
(Single-frame erase) .....................132
N Select Screen Settings ...............207
N Set Home ............................182, 206
N Spot Metering .............................193
N Loop Settings..............................208
W (Language) ...........................35, 176
0 (Uploading Pictures) ................275
v (Image selection) .........................133
9 Lock..........................................185
I (Face priority AF) ............................92
I Face Selection ..............................122
a (Close-up playback) .....................129
R (Image rotation) ...........................170
V Half Way Level .............................197
V Info Settings .................................196
W Keep Warm Color .........................94
Movie ..............................................161
Still image .................................96, 194
t Target Mode Settings .................209
x+F ...............................................193
S Center Button ...............................217
T Direction Key ................................217
v Lock ..............................................185
z Settings .........................................189
FAF ....................................................64
M PC RAW .......................................231
A
A (Aperture priority mode) ..................46
AC adapter ..........................................25
Accessories ...............................287, 291
AdobeRGB ........................................114
AE bracketing ....................................146
AEL/AFL ............................................201
AEL Metering .....................................193
AE lock ........................................77, 201
AF Area Pointer .................................182
AF Focus Adj. ............................183, 212
AF Illuminator ....................................183
AF Limiter ..........................................183
AF+MF ...............................................200
AF Mode
Movie ..............................................162
Still image ...................................64, 91
AF Scanner........................................181
AF Targeting Pad ...............................183
AF Target Mode ...................................69
AF Target Point ....................................72
AF Target Selection .......................69, 72
AF tracking ..........................................64
All x .................................................96
Movie ..............................................161
Still image .......................................194
Anti-Flicker LV ...........................186, 222
Anti-Flicker Shooting .................186, 223
Index
327
EN
Anti-shock shooting .....................80, 157
Aperture-Priority AE .............................46
Apps ..................................................245
ART bracketing ..................................147
Art Filter settings................................106
Art LV Mode .......................................188
Aspect ratio..........................................98
Assign Save Folder ...........................237
Assign to Custom Mode ....................142
Audio recording
Movie ..............................................169
Still image .......................................136
Auto Power Off ..................................199
Available recording time ....................317
B
Backlit LCD ........................................198
Battery charge ...............................20, 22
Battery level .........................................32
Battery Settings .................................198
Beep sound .......................................190
Bit rate .......................................102, 167
Bluetooth® ................................246, 273
Bracketing..........................................146
Bulb .....................................................52
Bulb/Time Focusing ...................184, 216
Bulb/Time Monitor .............................192
Bulb/Time Timer ................................192
Button function...................................116
Movie ..............................................163
Still image .......................................185
C
Cable clip .............................................19
C-AF Center Priority ..................182, 205
C-AF Center Start ......................182, 204
C-AF (Continuous AF) .........................64
C-AF Release Priority ........................186
C-AF Sensitivity .........................181, 203
C-AF+TR (AF tracking) ........................64
Calendar display ................129, 137, 228
Card ............................................. 26, 284
Card Setup ........................................177
Card Slots ............................................27
Card Slot Settings..............................237
Certifi cation........................................199
Close-up playback .............................129
Color Creator .....................................108
Color Filter .........................................112
Color Space ...............................114, 194
Composite Settings .....................54, 233
Compression rate ......100, 102, 236, 316
Connecting via USB ............22, 274, 278
Connection
Computer ................................256, 274
Smartphone ....................................245
Continuous AF .....................................64
Contrast .............................................110
Control Settings
Movie ..............................................164
Still image ...............................187, 224
Copying Pictures
Copy ...............................................131
Copy All ...........................................175
Copyright Settings .............................195
Custom Menu ............................181, 308
Custom Mode (C1/C2/C3/C4) ........... 56
Custom Self-timer ................................80
Custom Settings ................................183
D
Date/time setting (X) ..........................33
Dial Direction .....................................185
Dial Function
Movie ......................................163, 168
Still image .......................................185
Digital Tele-converter .........................143
Diopter adjustment ..............................38
dpi Settings ........................................195
DPOF .................................................134
E
Edit ....................................................170
Edit Filename.....................................195
Effect (i-Enhance) ..............................113
Electronic Zoom.................................121
328
EN
Elec. Zoom Speed
Movie ..............................................163
Still image .......................................185
Erase
All images .......................................177
Selected images .............................133
Single-frame ...................................132
EVF Adjust .........................................196
EVF Auto Switch ................................196
EVF Grid Settings ..............................197
EVF Style...........................................240
EV Step .............................................191
Exif data.............................................195
Exposure compensation ......................68
Exposure Shift ...................................193
External fl ash units ............................287
External power sources .......................22
Eyecup...............................................291
Eye priority AF .....................................92
F
Face Priority ......................................122
Face priority AF ...........................92, 201
Fast-motion movie .............................104
File format..................................100, 316
File Name ..........................................195
File size .............................................316
Firmware ............................................176
Fisheye Compensation ......................242
Flash .................................................... 84
Flash intensity control (x) ...............105
FL bracketing .....................................147
Flicker Reduction .......................186, 222
Flicker Scan
Movie ..............................................166
Still image .......................................234
Fn Lever Function
Movie ..............................................163
Still image .......................................219
Fn Lever/Power Lever .......................185
Focus bracketing ...............................148
Focus mode ...................................64, 91
Focus Ring ........................................184
Focus Ring Lock ................................122
Focus Stacking ..................................149
Format ...............................................177
Formatting the card ...........................177
Frame Rate
Movie ..............................102, 167, 317
Still image .......................................188
Frame size .................................102, 317
G
GPS log .............................................254
GPS tag .............................................254
Gradation ........................................... 111
Grid Settings ......................................189
H
Half Way Level ..................................197
Half Way Rls With IS .........................186
HDMI .........................190, 230, 279, 280
HDMI Control .....................................282
HDMI Output......................................164
HDR (High Dynamic Range) .............152
Highlight&Shadow Control.................115
High Res Shot (High resolution shooting)
83, 158
Histogram display ................................39
Histogram Settings ............................189
I
Image aspect .......................................98
Image Overlay ...................................172
Image quality
Movie (nK) .........................101, 167
Still image (KK) ................. 100, 142
Image quality settings
Movie (n Specifi cation Settings) ...161
Still image (K Set) ................194, 236
Image size
Movie ..............................................167
Still image .......................100, 236, 316
Image Stabilizer ...................97, 162, 186
Index display......................129, 137, 228
INFO button ................................39, 127
Information display ..............................36
Playback .........................................126
329
EN
Info Settings
G/Info Settings ......................187, 226
V Info Settings ..............................196
In-Movie Image Capture ....................173
Installing Apps ...................................245
Installing Software .............................256
Interchangeable lenses .....................285
Intrvl. Sh./Time Lapse ........................144
ISO-Auto
Movie ........................................75, 161
Still image .......................................191
ISO-Auto Set
Movie ..............................................161
Still image .................................75, 191
ISO bracketing ...................................147
ISO sensitivity ................................75, 91
ISO Step ............................................191
K
Keystone Comp. ................................156
L
Language setting (W) ...............35, 176
Lens Info Settings ..............................239
Lens I.S. Priority ................................186
Level Adjust .......................................198
Level Disp ..........................................120
Level Gauge ........................................40
Light box display ................................226
Live Bulb ......................................52, 232
Live composite photography................54
Live Composite Timer ........................192
Live control ........................................225
Live ND Shooting...............................159
Live Time .....................................52, 232
Live View Boost .................................188
Location data .............................244, 254
Long exposure (BULB/TIME) ..............52
Low ISO Processing ..........................191
LV Close Up Settings .........................188
LV-Info .......................................187, 227
LV OFF-Info ...............................187, 227
LV super control panel ...........88, 90, 301
M
M (Manual mode) ................................50
Manual Exposure.................................50
Manual focus .......................................64
Manual focus clutch (MF clutch) ........286
Menu..........................................139, 301
Menu Recall.......................................198
Metering.........................................77, 92
MF (AF/MF toggle) ............................118
MF Assist ...........................................215
MF Clutch ..........................................286
MF (Manual focus)...............................64
Mode Guide .......................................189
Monochrome Color ............................113
Movie R .............................................169
Movie H ...................................123, 125
Movie exposure mode .......................165
Movie playback ..................................130
Movie recording .............................59, 60
Movie Trimming .................................174
Multi Function ....................................124
Multi Function Settings ......................187
Multiple Exposure ..............................154
My Menu ............................................179
N
Noise Filter
Movie ..............................................161
Still image .......................................191
Noise Reduct. ....................................192
Number of storable still pictures ........316
O
OI.Palette...........................................245
OI.Share ............................................245
OI.Track ............................................. 245
OLYMPUS Capture ...........256, 268, 274
Olympus Workspace .........................274
One-touch white balance (k) .... 95, 118
P
P (Program mode) ..............................44
Partial Color .......................................109
Peaking......................................120, 215
330
EN
Peaking Settings................................189
Picture Mode .............................106, 142
Picture Mode Settings .......................187
Pixel Count ........................194, 236, 316
Pixel Mapping ....................................295
Playback
Movie ......................................128, 130
Still image .......................................128
Playback Menu ..........................170, 307
Position information ...........................254
Power Battery Holder ..........................24
Power lever..................................32, 185
Power-off Standby .............................249
PreMF (Preset MF) ................64, 67, 121
Preset MF ..............................64, 67, 121
Preset MF distance............................184
Press-and-hold Time .........................198
Preview ..............................................117
Priority Set .........................................196
Pro Capture shooting...........................81
Program AE .........................................44
Program shift (Ps) ..............................45
Protect ...............................................131
Ps (Program shift) ..............................45
Q
Quick Erase .......................................196
Quick Sleep Mode .............................199
R
RAW Data Edit ..................................170
RAW image .......................................100
RAW+JPEG h ..........................133, 178
RAW+JPEG Erase ....................132, 196
RC Mode (#RC Mode) .....................288
Recall from Custom Mode ...................58
Rec View ...........................................176
Remote Photography.........................253
Reset .................................................141
Reset Lens ........................................184
Reset Protect .....................................175
Reset Settings (Wi-Fi/Bluetooth) .......273
Reset share Order .............................175
Rotate ................................................ 130
S
S (Shutter priority mode) .....................48
S-AF Release Priority ........................186
S-AF (Single AF)..................................64
Saturation .......................................... 110
Save Settings ..............................99, 237
Save Slot ...........................................237
SD card..............................................284
Formatting the card .........................177
Selfi e Assist .......................................229
Self-timer .................................78, 80, 98
Sequential shooting .......................78, 98
Setup Menu ...............................176, 308
Shading Comp. ..................................194
Share Order .......................................132
Sharpness .........................................110
Shooting
Movie ................................................60
Still image .........................................41
Shooting Menu ..........................141, 303
Shooting modes...................................41
Shutter-Priority AE ...............................48
Silent controls ......................................61
Silent shooting .............................81, 157
Single AF .............................................64
Sleep ...................................................32
Slow motion movie ............................104
Software ............................................256
S-OVF ................................................197
sRGB .................................................114
Starry Sky AF.......................................64
Starry Sky AF Setting ........................184
Storage .............................................. 277
Super control panel ...............88, 90, 301
Super Spot AF .....................................73
T
Test Picture ........................................ 118
Time .....................................................52
Time Code Settings ...........................164
Time Lapse Movie .............................144
Time lapse shooting ..........................144
Touch AF..............................................43
Touch screen operations .............43, 137
331
EN
Touchscreen Settings ........................198
TV ...................................................... 230
U
USB Mode .........................................190
USB Power Delivery ..........................278
User registration ..................................11
V
Video Menu ...............................161, 305
W
WB
Movie ..............................................194
Still image .........................................94
WB bracketing ...................................146
WB Compensation...............................96
White balance ..............................94, 194
White balance compensation ..............96
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings ....178, 246, 261
Wi-Fi Connection ...............245, 256, 260
Wireless remote control fl ash ............288
Z
Zoom frame AF ....................................73
WD656900
date of issue 2020.02.
… 304 …

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Olympus E-M1 Mark III bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Olympus E-M1 Mark III in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 6.67 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info